JPS5886528A - Self-timer device - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To obtain a self-timer device which is improved in operability without increasing the size of constitution by reinstating the electrically set state of a self-timer through a setting member before the operation of the self-timer is completed. CONSTITUTION:When a selector lever 22 is positioned at a mark 28, a self- timer mode is set to close a corresponding switch S1, and the output of an inverter I1 is inverted to a high level. This high-level signal sets a counter in a camera and while self-timer time is counted, an LED turns on through a control circuit according to the result of AND with a battery detection signal, etc., to display the self-timer mode. On the other hand, when said lever 22 is returned to its initial position before the operation of the self-time is completed, the output of the inverter I1 is reinverted to the low level and while a self- timer counter is reset, the LED turns off to initialize the self-timer without double operation including a battery check. Thus, a self-timer device having excellent operability is obtained without increasing its constitution.

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a camera, and particularly to a self-timer device used for self-timer photography of the camera 2.

Mechanical bottle self-tie using conventional governor! Although such a device has been put into practical use, since such a device occupies a considerable amount of space, in recent years, an electronic self-timer device using a CR circuit or a delay circuit using a welfare counter has been proposed.

However, in such an electronic self-timer device, once the self-timer operation is started after the self-timer setting lever is set, even if the self-timer operation is returned to the initial state in an attempt to cancel the self-timer operation, the self-timer will not return to its initial state. There is a drawback that the release cannot be performed by simply pressing the button, and on the contrary, the shutter will be released by the returning operation. Therefore, the conventional device is configured such that the self-timer operation can only be canceled when a separately provided self-timer canceling member, such as a battery check button, is operated and the setting lever is then returned to its initial state. However, it is not only extremely troublesome to require double operations for release, but also providing a separate release member for this purpose is not only space-saving, but also manufacturing cost-effective. This is problematic.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a self-timer device that overcomes these drawbacks, has good operability, does not require space, and can be used at a low cost.

Note that the description related to the present invention is mainly shown in FIG.

93, pages 540 to 41, pages 479 to 480, pages 507 to 508 related to these figures, the following details of the invention are provided for ease of understanding. In the description, descriptions related to drawings other than the above-mentioned drawings will also be explained in detail.

Hereinafter, the camera system of the present invention will be explained in more detail with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 is a six-sided view of a camera device to which a camera system according to an embodiment of the present invention is applied, in which FIG. 1(a) is a front view, FIG. 1(b) is a top view, and FIG. ) is the bottom view, and the same figure (d
) shows a right side view, (e) a left side view, and (f) a rear view.

The camera device with the configuration shown in the figure is a single-lens reflex camera equipped with a dual-priority automatic exposure control mechanism based on the TTL photometry method.
It is a camera, and its parts are arranged with particular emphasis on its operability.

This camera device is composed of a lens device 2 which is an optical system and a body 4 which is a main body system, and various combinations of different types of lens devices and main body systems are possible.
It is similar to conventional single-lens reflex cameras in that it allows for wide-ranging photography.

The lens device 2 includes a distance adjustment ring 6 and an aperture adjustment ring 8, and is attached to the body 4 by a tightening ring 1o. Note that this lens device 2 can change the imaging position of the subject using the distance adjustment ring 6, that is, perform focusing operations, and can also preset the aperture value using the aperture adjustment ring 8. can be done. Here, the aperture value preset refers to the aperture adjustment ring 8.
According to this, the aperture position display 9 displayed on the circumference is aligned with the index 7 attached to the lens barrel of the lens device 2,
In fact, in this state the lens device 2 is in an open state. In this manner, the preset aperture value is obtained by narrowing down the aperture blades of the lens device 2 to the preset position using the driving force from the body 4 during exposure after shutter release. However, as a general rule, this camera device focuses on the operability of automatic exposure control, so the aperture adjustment ring 8 has a mark 1 on its circumference.
The aperture value is configured so that it is possible to preset the aperture value from the body 4 side while aligning the aperture value with the index 7, and this mechanism serves as the central function when controlling the aperture with this camera device. becomes. The lens device 2 also includes a mechanism for transmitting information regarding its maximum aperture value and the like to the body 4 side. This mechanism is an important mechanism for the arithmetic unit built into the body 4 to take in information necessary for performing arithmetic operations for exposure control.

The body 4 basically constitutes a dark box for forming the subject image introduced by the lens device 2 on the film surface, and the film is a 35 mm roll film in a cartridge. The exposed surface is replaced by winding the roll film onto the take-up spool one frame at a time. /Yatta is a two-curtain running focal plane shutter placed on the side of the lens device 2 on the exposed surface of the film, and will be described in detail later.
The running force of the curtain is controlled by a charged spring force, and the running timing of the two curtains, ie, running start control, is performed by electrical means. The body 4 has a built-in finder mechanism including a quick return mirror and a pentaprism section 11, and is configured to perform framing and focusing operations through the finder window 13 before photographing. This finder mechanism is exactly the same as that of a well-known single-lens reflex camera. However, the difference, which will be explained in detail later, is that most of the information necessary for photographing can be obtained from the finder window 13, and this is one of the features of this camera device. This finder mechanism is equipped with a TTL photometry function that measures the brightness of the subject light introduced through the lens device 2, and the subject brightness information pair pex value: BV required for calculation for automatic exposure control. ) is obtained. - The upper surface of the body 4 is equipped with a winding lever 14 that works in conjunction with the film winding spool to wind up the film by one frame and to charge springs to move the mechanical parts necessary for shutter release. It will be done. This winding lever 14
The number of frames of the film that has been wound is displayed on the film counter 15. The button 16 provided at the center of rotation of the winding lever 14 is a multiple exposure button, and when this button 16 is pressed until the winding lever 4 is operated, only the necessary mechanical parts are charged and the film is loaded. No winding takes place. Furthermore, the function attached to this winding lever 14 is to act as a power switch for the electrical function section within the camera device, and the power is turned on by pulling it out slightly in the direction of arrow α. This function is effective in preventing forgetting to turn off the power, especially for camera devices that have an automatic exposure control mechanism that consumes a lot of battery power and is likely to cause serious malfunctions due to battery consumption. .

18 is a shutter release button, which is arranged on the top surface of the body 4 so that it can be pressed with the index finger of the right hand when the body 4 is held with both hands, just like in conventional cameras. Various operations required after the release start. Incidentally, the hole 20 provided in the center of the shutter release button 18 is a cable release. This is the air release insertion hole. A selector lever 22 is arranged near the shutter release button 18 and configured to select various functions by rotating around the button 18. This selector lever 22 can be operated with the same finger that operates the shutter release button 18, that is, the index finger of the right hand holding the body 4.

Now, when the selector lever 22 is rotated to the position where the mark 24 is selected, the shutter release button 18 is locked and cannot be pressed. This locked state can be applied even if the shutter release button 18 is held down when the shutter release button 18 is pressed down and the shutter release button 24 is selected, so the shutter speed is It also allows for long exposures when selected in the pulp position. That is,
Is it possible depending on this selector lever 22? The 24 choices are
This is applied to achieve two functions: to prevent the shutter release button 18 from being pressed down due to erroneous operation, and to enable long-time exposure.

Furthermore, when the selector lever 22 is aligned with the position where the mark 26 is selected, the AE (Automatic-E
xposure) becomes locked. In this AE lock state, during automatic exposure control operation, the exposure amount (combination of aperture and shutter speed) obtained as a result of photometry and calculation is maintained at the amount immediately before the mark 26 was selected. The amount of exposure is held fixed, and even if there is a change in the amount of photometry thereafter, the amount of exposure is fixed, and when exposure is actually performed, it follows the amount of exposure that has been fixed. This function can be applied extremely effectively especially when photographing subjects with large brightness differences, and when the actual frame to be photographed differs from the frame in which only the subject brightness related to photometry is desired, it can be applied extremely effectively. For cameras with functions,
This is an absolutely necessary feature. This AE clock mechanism has
Although a mechanical lifting mechanism and an electrical processing mechanism are conceivable, the electrical processing mechanism will be applied to this camera device. It should be noted that the reno 5-22 that has selected the mark 26 automatically returns to its original position as the shutter release button 18 is returned after being depressed. Incidentally, this does not apply if an external force is applied that prevents the lever 22 from returning.

When the selector lever 22 is moved to the position where the mark 28 is selected, the self-timer is set. In this camera device, unlike conventional cameras, the self-timer is equipped with an electrical time counting mechanism, and when the self-timer is set, the shutter release - When the button 18 is pressed, a series of operations associated with the shutter release is controlled by an electrical signal that is emitted after a predetermined period of time. Note that during the period when the self-timer is operating, the light emitting diode (t--)" (LED ) The lamp 32 flashes to notify that the self-timer is operating.In addition, if the selector lever 22 is returned to its original position while the self-timer is operating, the self-timer setting can be canceled. After that, normal shutter release using the shutter release button 18 becomes possible.Also, since the self-timer mechanism in this camera is not released even after the shutter release operation is performed, It is possible to repeatedly take self-timer shots without having to set the self-timer again.As will be described later, this function can also be used in combination with a motor drive device to take automatic shots at intervals of time. It is something that helps you get used to it, and its usefulness is extremely great.

When the selector lever 22 is set at a position where the mark 3o is selected, a battery check state is entered. If the LED lamp 32 blinks during this battery check state, it indicates that the power battery voltage is sufficient.If the LED lamp 32 remains off, it indicates that the power battery voltage has decreased, and the camera device Indicates that the electrical functions of the device cannot function properly. Note that the selector lever 22, which has selected the position of the mark 3o, is constantly applied with a return force toward the position of the mark 28 by the biasing force of the spring;
After checking the battery, when you release your finger, it returns to the position of mark 28. This function is to prevent not only the camera device from functioning properly if you forget to return the lever 22 after checking the battery, but also to prevent wasted power consumption due to the blinking LED lamp 32. be.

Reference numeral 34 designates a key for setting the aperture value or shutter speed in the exposure information, and the set value is displayed on the display window 36. As mentioned repeatedly, this camera/device is equipped with an automatic exposure control mechanism, but it does not specifically adopt only one of aperture priority, °゛, or shutter speed priority, but can selectively use both methods. This method adopts a method that can be used for different purposes, the so-called priority method. Therefore,
Aperture priority mode that automatically calculates and controls the shutter speed by setting the aperture value and automatically controlling the shutter speed by setting the aperture value and automatically controlling the shutter speed.
There are two modes that can be selected: a shutter speed priority mode that calculates and controls the aperture value, and (1) listed above.
As is clear from equation (2), whether the aperture is selected preferentially or the shutter speed is preferentially selected, the handling in performing calculations is exactly the same; therefore, one dial At 34, a desired amount corresponding to the aperture value or shutter speed is set. Here, whether the amount set on the dial 34 is an aperture value or a shutter speed is specified by switching the mode changeover switch 38. In addition, depending on the switching of the mode changeover switch 38, the value of the numerical value displayed on the display window 36 is changed. That is, when the mode changeover switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode, the aperture value is displayed on the display window 36, and when the mode selection switch 38 is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the shutter speed is displayed on the display window 36. is displayed. This mechanism may be a simple one that selectively fires one of the aperture value and shutter speed that are displayed in parallel.

40 is an ASA sensitivity general setting dial, which is used to set the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used.

This dial 40 can be rotated by slightly lifting it with a finger in the direction of the arrow β, and when the finger is released after setting the film sensitivity, the dial 40 returns to the opposite direction of the arrow β by the biasing force of the spring and the set position is fixed. .

This is a mechanism provided to prevent the dial 40 from rotating inadvertently during photographing.

42 moves the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 when performing automatic exposure control and wants to take a photo with an overexposure or underexposure amount relative to the appropriate exposure amount,
This is a scale that serves as an index for obtaining excessive or insufficient exposure by changing the set film sensitivity relative to the actual film sensitivity. This is the relational expression (1) listed earlier.
, As is clear from (2), if the set film sensitivity is changed with respect to the actual film sensitivity, the exposure amount that is deemed appropriate as a result of the calculation will be the same as that of the actual film used. By focusing on the fact that the film sensitivity is overexposed or underexposed by the change made to the set film sensitivity, it is possible to easily take photographs with overexposure or underexposure without making any special changes to the calculation circuit or its calculation routine. Therefore, it can be said that it is an extremely effective method.

Reference numeral 44 denotes a film rewind knob. When the rewind lever 46 is retracted, the film that is being exposed while being wound up one frame at a time by the winding lever 14 is rotated by the rotation of this knob. Then, it is rehoused in Patrone. To rewind the film, press the rewind button 48 provided on the bottom of the body 4 to release the film winding mechanism from the film winding lever 14, and then press the rewind lever from the film rewind knob 44. 46 and rotate it in the direction of arrow γ. This method of rewinding the film is well known.

This camera device is provided with an accessory shoe 50 like a general camera.

Of course, the main purpose of the construction is to attach a strobe or a light emitting device for flash photography, but the strobe included in the camera system of the present invention works closely with this camera device, as will be described in detail later. It is something to do. Also,
An adapter for external photometry included in the camera system of the present invention can be connected to this accessory shoe 50.

In addition to the synchronization contact 52, the accessory shoe 50 includes a control terminal 54 for receiving control information from a strobe, an external photometry adapter, etc., a data terminal 56 for receiving data, and an AE lock terminal 58. Several levels of level signals are input from the control terminal 54, each instructing the camera to operate in different modes, and from the data terminal 56, the aperture value set on the strobe and the subject measured by an external metering adapter are input. Data related to brightness is input as an analog value.Please note this regarding strobes and external metering adapters.

will be explained in detail later.

60 is a lever for the 1 eyepiece shutter.

The eyepiece shutter is provided to shield the viewfinder window 13 from light, so when you take your eye off the viewfinder window 13, especially when using the self-timer, the light that has entered through the viewfinder window 13 may be blocked by the film surface. This is to prevent the eyepiece from being exposed to light, and also to prevent errors caused by light entering from the finder window 13 from being added to subject brightness information, which is a prerequisite for automatic exposure control. - The finder window is closed by operating the shutter lever 60 in the direction of arrow C. This mechanism is definitely required for cameras with TTL photometry function.

Reference numeral 62 denotes an X contact, which has exactly the same function as that provided in a general camera, and constitutes a synchronization contact when taking pictures using a strobe or flash.

Reference numeral 64 denotes an aperture lever, and when pushed in the direction of arrow δ, the lens device 2 is apertured. Now, if the aperture value is preset by the aperture adjustment ring 8 of the lens device 2, the lens device 2 will be stopped down to the preset position by operating the aperture lever 64, and the aperture adjustment ring 8 will be marked with a mark on the aperture adjustment ring 8. 12 is aligned with the index 7, the operation of the tightening lever 64 is restricted. Note that it is possible to align the mark 12 on the aperture adjustment ring 8 with the index 7 while the aperture lever 64 is operated to the aperture position, but this is considered an erroneous operation and the viewfinder 1
A warning will be issued within 3 days. The state of the aperture adjustment lever 8 of this lens device 2 and the aperture reduction lever 6 of the body 4
4 and the state of the mode changeover switch 38 will be described in detail later. This squeeze lever 64 is locked when it is operated to the squeeze position, but this lock is released by pressing the release button 66, and the lever 64 returns to its original position.

A screw hole 68 for fixing a tripod is provided on the bottom of this camera device, but this screw hole 68 can also be used for mounting a motor drive device. When installing the motor drive device, remove the cover 7o at the bottom of the shaft of the winding lever 14 to fit the shaft of the winding lever 14 and the winding shaft of the motor drive device, and mechanically A combination is performed. When the motor drive device is attached, a control signal is applied to the monitor drive device through the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4. This motor drive device will be explained in detail later, but after the shutter release, this motor drive device
After all camera operations associated with release are completed, the drive force of the motor is used to advance the film and charge other necessary parts in place of the film advance lever 14. This makes it possible for the photographer to release the shutter with the camera, and also makes it easier for the photographer to capture the desired shutter opportunity.It is extremely useful, apart from the volume and weight of the motor and its drive power source. This is an excellent feature.

When the film rewinding knob 44 is pulled up, the back cover 74 on the back of the body 4 opens, allowing the film in the cartridge to be refilled.

By opening the back cover 74, the film counter 15 on the top surface of the body 4 is reset and returned to its original indicated position.

2. Although the configuration of each part of this camera device has been briefly explained above, it is important to note that specific information about the lens device 2 and the body 4 has been omitted, or the aperture control mechanism of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side has been explained briefly. , the relationship between the operation of the strobe or external photometry adapter attached to the accessory shoe 50 and the camera device, the relationship between the operation of the monitor drive device attached to the bottom of the body 4 and the camera device, and the viewfinder 13
Since the information contained herein is insufficient regarding the relationship between data display and the operation and operation of the camera device, a more detailed explanation will be given below.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view for explaining the case where the lens device 2 and the body 4 of the first illustrated camera device are separated, and the lens device 2 is moved relative to the body 4 as shown by the arrow λ and assembled. The body 4 is provided with a mount ring 76 on the mounting surface of the lens device 2, and the mount ring 76 has three independent brim portions 78A, 78B, and 78C protruding from its outer peripheral end. This mount ring 76 is firmly fixed to the body 4 in parallel to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis, that is, parallel to the film plane, so as to surround the optical path. This mount ring 76 is the only member that connects the lens device 2 to the body 4, and any deviation in the mounting accuracy or aging will definitely have a negative effect on the subject image formed on the film surface. It is based on. On the other hand, a tightening ring 1o is rotatably provided on the lens device 2 side.
In the illustrated state, when the lens device 2 is moved in the direction of the arrow λ and assembled to the body 4, the flange 7 of the mount ring 76
Notch 8 through which each of 8A, 78B, and 78C can pass
0A, 80B, and 80C. After each collar portion 78A, 78B, and 78C of the mount ring 76 is passed through the corresponding notch portion 80A, 80B, and 80C, the tightening ring 10 is moved along the arrow φ. By rotating the lens device 2 in the direction, the respective flange portions 78A, 78B, and 78C are engaged with the non-notched portions 82A, 82B, and 82C of the tightening ring 10, and the lens device 2 is fixed to the body 4. It is something that will be done.

The side where the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 is provided with various mechanisms for information exchange or control with the body 4.

A lever 84 is associated with the number of aperture stages from the open position of the lens device 2, and is movable in the directions of arrows ψ and -φ along the annular hole 86. This lever 84 is biased in the direction of arrow φ by a strong spring, but when the lens device 2 is not attached to the body 4 and the tightening ring 10 is in the ready state as shown in the figure. is held in a state of being moved in the direction of the arrow φ in the annular hole 86.

This state is released by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of the arrow φ in order to attach the lens mounting device 2 to the body 4. At this time, <-84 moves in the direction of the arrow φ due to the biasing force of the spring, but when it reaches a certain position, its movement is restricted. This certain position corresponds to the number of aperture steps from the surface number position for the preset aperture value of the lens device 2. As much as possible,
(As mentioned earlier, the lens device 2 can preset the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8, but the movement of the lever 84 Since the regulation position changes depending on this preset aperture value, the reno-84 also moves accordingly, so that the aperture setting ring 8 is set depending on the position of reno<-84. It has the possibility of transmitting the number of stops from the open aperture to the preset aperture value to the camera side 4.The term "possible" here means that the camera device applied to this example only performs automatic exposure control. As will be explained in detail later, it is also possible to preset the aperture value from the body side of the camera device. This is because it is not necessary to detect the number of aperture stages preset in step 8.

When the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, the lever 84 is always moved to the position corresponding to the maximum aperture stage of the lens device, that is, in the annular hole 86 by the biasing force of the spring. is moved all at once in the direction of the arrow φ.

Incidentally, no matter where the lever 84 is restricted from moving in the φ direction according to the spring biasing force, it cannot be moved in the direction of the smaller number of aperture stages, that is, in the arrow ψ direction, against the spring biasing force. is possible. In other words, Renoku-
By setting 84 at a desired position against the biasing force of the spring, a desired aperture value can be set without relying on the aperture setting ring 8. This characteristic can be applied to so-called servo-type AE cameras, which automatically control the aperture value by controlling the position of this lever 84 with a servo motor. Because it has drawbacks,
In this embodiment, this characteristic is utilized by a different method.

Now, what is indicated by 88 is the aperture lever,
The aperture lever 88 is always urged in this direction by a spring, with the direction of the arrow Ω corresponding to the open position of the aperture, ie, the large diameter side. Since the arrow ν direction still corresponds to the narrowed-down position of the lens, that is, the small diameter side, the lens device 2 can be moved from the open position by moving the narrowing lever 88 in the arrow ν direction against the biasing force of the spring. The aperture is narrowed down by the number of aperture stages corresponding to the position of the lever 84.

Further, 90 denotes an aperture pin having a protrusion amount corresponding to the aperture value of the lens device 2, and the aperture pin 90 of the body 4.
It is used to transmit the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 to the lens device 2. This open pin 90 is important in performing various corrections for calculating accurate subject brightness information in exposure calculation based on subject brightness information by TTL photometry.

Further, 91 indicates a minimum aperture bottle having a protruding amount corresponding to the maximum aperture value, that is, the minimum aperture of this lens device 2, and is used to transmit the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 to the body 4. It will be done. , °Which minimum diameter pin 91 is,
It is used to detect the limit of the aperture of the controllable lens device 2 during exposure control.

92 is an AE pin that protrudes when the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, and the aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side.
It was designed to convey information to the outside world.

On the other hand, the body side is provided with a mechanism that cooperates with various mechanisms of the lens device 2 as described above.

94 is an AE that operates by bringing its surface on the arrow θ side into contact with the surface on the arrow φ side of the lever 84 provided on the lens device 2.
The lever is always biased in the direction of arrow θ with a weak spring force. The spring that biases this lever 94 in the direction of the arrow θ is extremely weak compared to the force that biases the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side in the direction of the arrow φ. It is impossible to resist. Therefore, this AE lever 94 is always urged in the σ direction by the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side. When the winding lever 14 is operated, the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of the arrow δ along with the lever 84 and against the biasing force thereof, and is locked at the position shown.

This lock is released when the shutter is released, but
- When the lock is released, the AE lever 94 naturally moves in the direction of the arrow σ due to the biasing force of the lever 84. The body 4 is equipped with a mechanism for clamping the AE lever 94 at an appropriate position based on the control aperture value set by the dial 34 or calculated as a result of calculation.
When this clamp mechanism operates, the AE lever 94 stops at the clamp position. Therefore, naturally, L/bar 8
4 is also prevented from moving in the direction of the arrow φ at a position corresponding to the clamp position of the AE lever 94, and the number of aperture stages is preset. Q1: The clamp position of the AE lever 94 is extremely important in determining the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2, and therefore a highly accurate mechanism is required for detecting the clamp position. Such a mechanism converts the amount of movement of the AE lever 94 in the direction of the arrow σ from the lock position into pulses, and counts the number of pulses in correspondence with the number of aperture stages as desired. A configuration that obtains a number of aperture stages is applied. Due to the cypress structure, when you want to narrow down the lens by pushing the aperture lever 64 provided on the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ, the AE lever 94 is either locked at the reference position or unclamped at the desired position. Te, A.E.
The lever '94 runs in the direction of the arrow σ due to the biasing force of the lever 84. At this time, if the aperture value has been selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the lever 84 is restricted from traveling at a position corresponding to the number of aperture stages up to this aperture value, and therefore the AE lever 94 is also restricted from moving. The vehicle stops traveling and the aperture is eventually narrowed down to the set aperture value, but
If mark 12 is set on aperture setting ring 8,
Since the lever 84 is not restricted to travel to the position of the maximum aperture value, that is, the minimum aperture position, the aperture is eventually tightened to the maximum aperture value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the aperture setting ring 8 is setting the mark 12, the aperture closing lever 64 is locked so that it cannot be operated. However, if for some reason the lock of the E lever 94 to the reference position is released before the shutter release, the film will not be advanced by operating the winding lever while pressing the multiple exposure button 16. The AE lever 94 can be easily locked at the reference position. Note that when the AE lever 94 is locked at the standard position, it is said to be in a state where AE charging is being performed, and also when the AE lever 94 is locked at the standard position.
Locking the lever 94 at the reference position is called performing AE charging. Further, the release of the AE lever 94 from the reference position is called AE discharge.

Reference numeral 96 denotes an aperture input pin for taking in the aperture value of the lens device 2, which contacts the aperture pin 90 of the lens device 2 and outputs a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 90, that is, in response to the aperture value of the lens device 2. It is used to capture signals. In addition,
This open input pin 96 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement thereof into a digital value, and as a result, the open aperture value of the lens device 2 is taken in as a digital value.

Reference numeral 97 is a minimum aperture input pin for taking in the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2, and when the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2 is applied, a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91, that is, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is generated. This is for capturing a signal corresponding to the aperture value, that is, the minimum aperture aperture. Note that this minimum aperture input pin 97 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement thereof into a digital value, and as a result, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is taken in as a digital value.

Reference numeral 98 denotes an aperture drive lever, which brings the surface in the direction of the arrow ε into contact with or faces the surface in the direction of the arrow Ω of the aperture lever 88 of the lens device 2, and moves in the direction of the arrow ε before exposure starts during shutter release and -z. Then, the aperture drive lever 88 is driven in the direction of arrow ν, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is moved from the open position to the lever 8.
The aperture is narrowed down to the aperture position specified by (9). After the exposure is completed, the aperture drive lever 98 moves in the direction of the arrow ω and returns to its original position, thereby opening the aperture of the lens device 2 again. This aperture drive lever 9
8 can also be moved in the direction of the arrow ε by operating the narrowing lever 64 of the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ. This is a necessary mechanism for viewing the subject image through the lens device 2 which is focused through the finder 13.

Reference numeral 100 denotes an AE detection unit facing the AE pin 92 of the lens device 2, which detects the protruding AE pin 92 and detects the mark 12 when the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2. It is provided to capture a control signal indicating that is selected.

As is clear from the above explanation, when trying to control the aperture value of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 needs to be aligned with the index 7. Mark 12 is called the AE mark.

Next, the lever 8 is used after the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 until the aperture is stopped, that is, the shutter is released.
4. Regarding the movements of the AE lever 94, the aperture lever 88, and the aperture drive lever 98, when the aperture setting ring 8 is set to a certain aperture value, the aperture 9 is set according to the explanatory diagram in FIG. The case where the setting ring 8 is set to the AE mark 12 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 4.

As mentioned before, FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where some aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side. With the lens device 2 in the preparation state, the tightening ring 1o has not rotated to the mounting position, so the lever 84 is moved against the force of the spring that urges the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ. Now, if only the tightening limb O is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever 84
The diaphragm 9 moves in the direction of the arrow φ to a position defined by the setting ring 8, as shown in FIG. This movement depends on the force of the spring which tends to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. Now, let us assume that this lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 when AE charging is not completed or when the aperture lever 64 is being operated to suppress it. In this case, the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is biased in the direction of the arrow δ, but it is not specifically locked, so
When the tightening ring 10 of the lens device 2 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ and attached to the body 4, a spring tends to rotate the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.

Since the biasing force of is superior to the biasing force of the spring which tries to move the AE lever 94 in the direction of arrow a, the lever 84 is set by the aperture setting ring 8 as shown in FIG. move in the direction of the arrow φ to the position shown. Along with this, the AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and enters a state as shown in FIG. 2(c). Now, if AE charging is performed by operating the winding lever 14 with the throttle setting lever 64 of the body 4 returned to its original position, the AE Reno-94 will be affected by the biasing force of the Reno-84. Conversely, it is driven in the direction of arrow θ and locked at its reference position as shown in FIG. 2 (2).

Therefore, the lens (-84) on the side of the lens device 2 is pushed by the lever 94 and held in the state shown in FIG. It is obvious that the positions of AE Reno (-94 and Reno <-84) will be held in the position shown in Figure 2 (to) i in exactly the same way when 2.・When the release is performed, the AE lever (-94) is unlocked, so the lever 84 runs in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94, and the aperture setting ring moves as shown in Figure 4. At this time, the AE lever 94 that has been pushed by the lever 84 stops at the position where the lever 84 has stopped, as shown in (8) of the same figure. When the aperture drive lever 98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in the figure, the aperture lever 88 of the lens device 2 is driven in the direction of the arrow ν as shown in the figure. The aperture is stopped to the specified position. In this state, exposure is started, but the candy state i in the same figure (G) is maintained at least until the exposure stops. Note that the aperture is stopped when the exposure is finished. When the drive lever 98 returns in the direction of the arrow ω, the lever 84, the aperture lever 88, the AE lever 94, and the aperture drive lever 98 return to the state shown in FIG. 6(C).

In addition, through the above operations, the lever 84 and the AE lever 9
4 does not have any particularly meaningful action. This is because, as mentioned earlier, this embodiment does not have a mechanism for taking in the aperture step number information regarding the aperture value preset by the aperture setting ring 8 from the lever 84 to the body 4; The AE lever 94 depends on being clamped at a desired position, and the lever 84 is restricted from running in the direction of the arrow σ, so that the aperture is pre-circulated from the so-called body 4 side. Since the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is used to preset the aperture, the levers 84 and 94 do not perform any function.

) However, as is clear from the explanation of the same figure, each lever 84
．． Since each of the 94 has independent functions, there will be no interference or operational failure in modes unrelated to those functions. This largely depends on the arrangement of the AE lever 94 and the lever 84 for a given lens device configuration and the force distribution of the springs that bias each lever.

As mentioned before, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where no aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side. With the lens device 2 in the preparation state, since the tightening ring 10 has not been rotated to the mounting position, the lever 84 is moved against the force of the spring that urges the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ. Now, if only the tightening ring 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever 8
4 moves in a negative direction in the direction of arrow φ as shown in FIG. 4(b). Incidentally, this movement position is the same as the position defined when the minimum aperture of the lens device is selected with the aperture setting ring 8. Note that this moving force depends on the force of the spring that attempts to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. Next time,
Let's attach this lens device 2 to the body 4 where AE charging has not been completed or the aperture lever 64 is pressed. In this case, the AE lever 9.4 on the body 4 side is set to the previous shooting situation or the aperture lever 64.
is in an uncertain position depending on the state of the That is, when presetting the aperture is controlled from the POD 4 side, the AE;
-94 is clamped at a location corresponding to the controlled aperture value and remains in that position until the next AE charge is performed, and when the aperture lever 64 is operated, the AE discharge is performed and the clamp is released. Ru.

Therefore, tightening of the lens device 2. When the ring 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ and attached to the body 4, the lever 84 is urged toward the position shown in FIG. Since the lever 94 is clamped at the position shown in FIG. Then, it moves in the direction of arrow φ to the position shown in FIG. Now, if the winding lever 14 of the body 4 is operated and AE charging is performed, the AE reno (-94 is driven in the direction of arrow θ against the biasing force of -84, (to) is locked at its reference position.Therefore, the lens device 2
The lever 84 on the side is pushed by the AE lever 94 and
It will be held in the state shown in. It should be noted that even when the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 after AE charging has been completed, the positions of the AE lever 94 and the lever 84 will be maintained at the positions shown in (2) (I5) in the same way. is self-evident. Next, when the shutter is released, the AE lever 94 is unlocked, so the lever 84 starts running in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94. The AE lever 94 is the same as the lever 84.
During this time, the AE lever 940 travel distance is detected in a pulsed manner within the camera device and corresponds to the number of aperture stages corresponding to the aperture set or calculated on the body 4 side. When the vehicle travels the amount of travel, the AE lever 94 is clamped to restrict further travel.

Therefore, the AE lever 94 is clamped and held at the position shown in FIG. Through the above operations, the emblem set or calculated on the body 4 side becomes a preset state. Next, when the aperture drive/+-98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in the figure, the aperture lever 88 of the lens device 2 is driven in the direction of the arrow υ as shown in the figure is narrowed down to a position regulated by lever 84.

In this state, exposure is started, but the state shown in the figure is maintained at least until the exposure is stopped. In addition,
When the exposure is completed and the aperture drive lens (-98) returns to the direction of the arrow ω, the lever 84, aperture lever 88, AE lever 94, and aperture drive lever 9B are the same as shown in Figures (C) and (C'). It will return to the state of.

The above operations are performed while performing wide-open photometry with the lens device 2. This operation is performed when an automatic exposure control operation including aperture priority and shutter speed priority is applied, and is particularly effective in controlling the aperture value from the body 4 side of the camera device.

FIG. 5 shows an example of a strobe applied to the power camera system of this embodiment, and FIG. 5 (a) is a front view (b).
is a rear view, and (c) is a bottom view. This strobe has a well-known automatic light adjustment function, but is also unique in that it has an information exchange function with a camera device.

In the figure, 1.02 is a light emitting section, which emits a flash of light up to the limit of the light emitting ability of this strobe. Further, 104 is the light emitting section 1
This is a light detection unit that detects the reflected flash from the subject in order to dim the flash of 02. The automatic light adjustment method applied to this strobe is such that when taking a photo, the strobe is emitted and the light emitting section 102 emits light toward the subject, and at the same time, the light detecting section 104 detects the reflected light from the subject. The purpose is to provide an appropriate amount of exposure to the film surface by photometry and stopping the light emission from the light emitting section 102 when the total amount of reflected light reaches a predetermined value. Note that in order to perform such automatic light adjustment, the film sensitivity to be used and the aperture value of the photographic lens must be given in advance as setting information, and for this purpose, the film sensitivity setting dial 106 and the aperture value are provided. This is a value setting dial 108. Considering this, it seems possible to set information regarding film sensitivity and aperture value through the film sensitivity setting dial 40 and the dial 34 for setting the aperture or shutter speed provided on the main body of the camera device. In this example, the strobe is connected to a camera other than this system.
In order to make it possible to use it in a system, we purposely provided the necessary prerequisites and information input means for automatic light adjustment on the strobe side. The aperture value setting dial 108 is set in manual mode, that is, in which the operator sets the aperture value without relying on automatic light adjustment. You can select the mode of selecting. This selection is made by rotating the dial 108 so that the manual mode display 110 or the aperture value display 112 written on the dial 108 is aligned with an index 114 provided on the strobe body. Further, the film sensitivity setting dial 106 can be rotated by moving a lock lever 116 that restricts its rotation in the direction of the arrow τ. This lock lever 116 is always biased by a spring in the direction opposite to the arrow τ.
The film sensitivity setting dial 106 is prevented from being rotated inadvertently. By rotating the dial 106, a film ASA sensitivity display 120 appears in a window 118 provided on the dial 106. Among these, the desired ASA sensitivity display 120 is displayed as an indicator provided on the dial 106. 122, the film sensitivity setting is completed. Note that this film sensitivity setting dial 106 also serves as a guide number calculation board, and the dial 10
If manual mode is selected by 8,
It can be used to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 based on the distance to the subject. That is, when the aperture value setting dial 108 is set to manual mode, the strobe emits the maximum amount of light that the strobe has without performing automatic light adjustment. Therefore, in order to give the proper amount of exposure to the film surface, it is necessary to select an appropriate combination of shooting distance and shooting lens aperture value, and the guide number calculation board used for this purpose is A configuration is adopted in which the combination of aperture value with respect to photographing distance is changed to match the guide number of the flash according to the film sensitivity. Therefore, it is naturally possible to use the film sensitivity setting dial 106 as a guide number calculation board, but in this embodiment, the aperture value series is displayed in the window 124 facing the dial 106. , the point portion 124 of the dial 106
A shooting distance series display 128 is displayed on the periphery of the camera, and the photographer can manually set the aperture value on the camera device side from the corresponding aperture value display 126 and shooting distance display 128 to obtain an appropriate exposure amount on the film surface. It has a structure that gives the following. As is well known, many strobes have a capacitor discharge type configuration, in which a battery or commercial power supply is boosted to a voltage sufficient to cause a xenon discharge tube to emit light, and then the voltage is stored in a capacitor. However, a configuration is adopted in which the charge in the capacitor is discharged through the xenon discharge tube to cause the discharge tube to emit light during photographing. Therefore, in order for the xenon discharge tube to reliably emit light, it is necessary that the capacitor be charged to a specified voltage, and photography should not be performed before the capacitor is fully charged. Since the strobe does not emit light, the film surface will not be exposed to sufficient light. Therefore, what is needed is a charging completion indicator light 130, which emits light when charging is complete to notify the photographer of this fact. Note that this charging completion indicator light 130 also serves as a switch for a light emission test, and the strobe emits light by pressing this switch. This function can be effectively used when measuring exposure using a flash meter or the like. 132 is a power switch, and by turning on this switch, charging of the capacitor is started.

The functions of this strobe 10 flash described above are roughly the same as those of conventional strobes equipped with an automatic light control device, but as mentioned earlier, this strobe is equipped with a camera device. A combination of

This constitutes one component of the camera system, and can greatly improve the operability of the camera device. .

The strobe shown in the fifth figure is an accessory for the camera device shown in the first figure.
- It can be attached to the shoe 50, but in that case, the shoe 134 provided at the bottom of the strobe body from the back side of the camera device
After fitting and mounting on the accessory 9-IJ second shoe 50, it is fixed by tightening with a tightening rod 136. The bottom of the shoe 134 of the strobe is equipped with a synchronization contact 13i1, a control signal contact 140, and a data signal contact 142. When the strobe is attached, the synchro contact 52, control terminal 54, and
They are electrically connected to the data terminals 56, respectively. Furthermore,
The front shoe 134 has a ground terminal 144 in a part thereof, and is grounded to the main body of the accessory shoe 50 when the strobe is attached.

When taking pictures using strobe light, the shutter speed at which a camera equipped with a focal plane shutter can perform exposure in synchronization with the strobe light emission, that is, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS￥N, is generally 60 This is on the low side, from 1/1 second to 1/125 second or less, but it is common to make mistakes in setting this when operating the camera, and it is difficult to set the shutter speed for flash photography. Doing so may impede its operability, and some countermeasures have been required.

On the other hand, the strobe applied to this embodiment is
Rather than a passive method that simply issues a warning in preparation for a photo shoot, the camera uses a proactive method of controlling the shutter speed necessary for flash photography from the flash side. This includes a fully automatic method that automatically releases the shutter at the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN, regardless of the shutter speed set on the camera device, prior to taking a photo with strobe light, and is set to a higher speed than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, the strobe synchronization shutter speed and ivy speed T
A semi-automatic method can be considered in which the shutter is released with SYN, and in a shutter speed range smaller than this strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, the shutter is released with the shutter speed set on the camera device side, but in this example, the fully automatic method is used. Alternatively, the system is configured to appropriately select and adopt a semi-automatic method. Choosing between fully automatic and semi-automatic methods is
This is a changeover switch 146 provided on the back of the strobe body.

Note that the determination signal for the switching position of the changeover switch 146 indicates that charging of the strobe is completed. A signal containing two pieces of information is applied from the control contact 140 to the control terminal 54 of the accessory shoe 50 along with a signal indicating the situation. This is possible by setting the current value that flows when a voltage is applied from the control terminal 54 on the camera side to the control contact 140 on the strobe side to be different depending on the switching position of the changeover switch 146. Note that each of these two pieces of information is given to the camera device according to an AND condition with information indicating that charging of the strobe is completed.

Therefore, when charging of the strobe is not completed, no signal is transmitted to the camera device side. Now, if a signal indicating that strobe charging is complete is given as the first information,
This will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the fully automatic method, and if a charging completion signal is given as second information, it will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the semi-automatic method. The camera device enters the strobe photography mode in response to the first or second information signal from the control terminal 54, and the shutter speed is set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed or a lower second (in the case of semi-automatic mode). At the same time, the aperture value or full light emission data is taken in from the data terminal 56. This data terminal 56 contains information set by the aperture setting dial 108 in analog values. That is,
In automatic light control mode, as mentioned earlier, information about the aperture value of the lens is essential, and although this is configured to be set on the strobe side, this setting value cannot be directly used on the camera device side. In order to use this as an aperture control signal, a transmission system is required. For this purpose, a data contact 142 is provided on the strobe side 1, and a data terminal 56 is provided on the camera body side. Now, when a charging completion signal is input to the camera device side, the camera device takes in analog information regarding the aperture value from the data terminal 56, and performs aperture control according to that information. In addition, when the strobe aperture setting dial 10g'% and manual mode are selected, the data contact 142
outputs analog information other than the level corresponding to other aperture values, such as an analog signal at a relatively higher level than the data representing the aperture value, thereby indicating that the strobe is in manual mode and at maximum light intensity. A signal indicating that the light will be emitted is transmitted to the camera body.

At this time, since aperture control is not performed on the camera device side, it is necessary to set the desired aperture value on the lens device 2 side or the aperture value calculated by the guide number calculation board through the aperture setting ring 8.

According to the configuration described above, the camera system in this embodiment can completely automatically obtain the appropriate exposure amount even when shooting using an auxiliary light called a strobe. Conventionally, when taking pictures using an auto-adjustable flash, the shutter speed on the camera device side must be set to a strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or less that can be synchronized with the strobe, for example, 1/60th of a second or less. Whereas it was necessary to set the aperture value to a value specified by the flash for automatic flash control, the shutter speed and aperture settings are completely automatic, making it much easier to operate. It is possible to improve performance and avoid operational errors. Also, on the camera device side, automatic exposure control will be performed until the strobe is fully charged, so even if you release the shutter without fully charging the flash, it will not be possible to get the correct exposure or an exposure close to it. Since the photo is taken, the probability of obtaining a good photographic image increases.This means that with conventional camera equipment, when taking strobe photography, the strobe is not fully charged and the strobe is not activated when the shutter is released. This is a big improvement compared to the case where the shutter speed and aperture value set for strobe photography often resulted in underexposure when the flash did not fire.

In addition, with this camera system, when taking photos with a strobe, there is no need for any special operations on the camera device side; simply attach the strobe to the camera device, turn on the strobe's power switch, and wait until the strobe is ready to fire. When the battery is charged, the camera device automatically switches to strobe shooting mode, so all that is left is to adjust the distance, release the shutter, and release the shutter. We are trying to significantly improve the operability of turtles and other devices that require a lot of effort.

One of the most important elements when incorporating an automatic exposure control function into a camera is the photometry system. This photometry system has a function to take in object brightness information, which is one element for exposure calculation, and most commonly used is a configuration in which the brightness of the object is converted into an electrical signal through a photoelectric conversion element.

Currently, most of the light meters built into single-lens reflex cameras use internal light metering (TTL), and this is true even for single-lens reflex cameras with automatic exposure control functions. This is not an exception. This TTL photometry method actually measures the brightness of the subject that enters through the lens, so relatively accurate photometry is possible, and it is useful because it can be equally applied even when using lenses with different focal lengths. The gender is extremely large.

Additionally, since you can check the photometry area or frame through the viewfinder, you can easily make corrections to the photometry amount.

What is discussed in camera devices using this TTL photometry method is the issue regarding the photometry area in the frame.

This photometry area can also be roughly divided into two areas: a partial photometry area that measures only a specific part of the frame, such as the center, and an average photometry area that measures the entire area of the frame.
Irregular photometry areas are also being considered, such as combining the partial photometry area and the average photometry area, or dividing the average photometry area into several areas and changing the weight of each area.

In camera devices incorporating an automatic exposure control function, it is convenient to apply the average photometry area to this photometry area from the viewpoint of instant shooting, etc., so the average photometry area is widely applied. It still includes some problems.

This is a big problem when using a wide-angle lens, etc., but if the background brightness is extremely different compared to the actual subject you want to photograph, the automatic exposure control mechanism will adjust the brightness of the background. Therefore, there is a risk that the exposure control operation will result in extreme underexposure or overexposure of the subject that you actually want to photograph. In order to deal with this problem, the AE lock mechanism was provided in the above-mentioned AE lock mechanism, but in a camera device that performs average light metering, it is possible to measure the brightness of a subject at a specific position within the frame. If you want to measure the distance, first approach the subject and measure the specific positional force of the subject.
After framing it so that it occupies most of the frame,
This involves the troublesome operation of performing photometry, then moving away from the subject while operating the AE lock mechanism, performing desired framing and focusing, and then releasing the shutter.

In order to avoid this, it is preferable to measure the subject brightness using partial metering.

In the camera system of this embodiment, in order to deal with this problem, an accessory shoe 50 of the camera device is provided.
The camera is configured such that an external photometer other than the KTTL photometer can be attached, and automatic exposure control is performed based on the photometry results from this external photometer.

FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment, and shows the bottom surface 145 of this photometer.
The contact point 146 provided on the camera device side
contactable with a control terminal 54 provided in the shoe 50;
When the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, this information is notified to the camera side. This is given from the photometer to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which consists of two pieces of information indicating whether the strobe attached to the accessory shoe 50 is fully automatic or semi-automatic. The camera device that receives this third information switches to external photometry mode and takes in the analog information input from the data terminal 56 as subject brightness information. A contact point 148 provided on the bottom of the photometer can be contacted with the data terminal 56 when the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, and outputs the brightness of the subject light incident through the light receiving window 150 as analog data. The data is transmitted to the camera device side through the data terminal 56. The light-receiving angle of the light-receiving window 150 may be fixed as appropriate depending on the purpose; however, in this embodiment, a zoom function is added to the light-receiving angle, and the focal length of the photographing lens used is adjusted using the dial 152 on the top surface of the photometer. The light-receiving angle can be freely and variably set according to the desired photometry area.

With this configuration, the camera device automatically switches to external metering mode with a photometer for external metering attached to the accessory shoe 50, and performs automatic exposure control operation based on the metering information from the meter. As a result, the scope of application can be further expanded.

Now, when we consider the TTL exposure meter built into an eye-reflex camera and the external photometer mentioned earlier, these metering systems are so-called reflected light metering systems that measure the light reflected from the subject. Since this is a method, the amount of photometry corresponds to the actual brightness of the subject as the subject brightness.

However, since this object brightness is greatly affected by the color tone and surface condition of the object, in practical terms it depends on accurately measuring the brightness of the light, that is, the illuminance. This is not an appropriate method when trying to determine exposure accurately without being affected by the color tone of the subject. For example, when measuring an all-white subject and an all-black object under the same lighting, if you use the reflected light method - 1. Of course, there will be a difference in the amount of photometry, but if you measure the photo using the incident light method Of course, the amount of photometry depends only on the lighting conditions under which the two-wave object is placed, so there is no difference between the two. Therefore, when trying to find out the exact amount of exposure, it is better to use the incident light method, and even cameras and devices that have an automatic exposure control function are based on photometry results based on the incident light method. (It is preferable to have automatic exposure control.

From this point of view, the camera system in this embodiment further includes an incident light type exposure meter as an external photometry system.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system and stem of this embodiment, and this exposure meter 60 is connected to the camera device by a cord 154. This code 1
Reference numeral 54 includes a signal line for transmitting various information or data from the exposure meter 160 to the camera device, and a coupler 156 at one end is attached to the accessory seat 1-so of the camera device, and a coupler 156 is provided at the other end. By attaching the plug 158 to the socket 162 of the exposure meter 160, the exposure meter 1
60 is connected to a camera device.

A contact 166 on the bottom surface 164 of the coupler 156 is contactable with a control terminal 54 in the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device, so that the exposure meter 160 can be connected just as in the case of the external photometer described above. This is to notify the camera 2 side of the connection when it is connected to the camera device. This is also given from the exposure meter to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which consists of two pieces of information indicating whether the strobe attached to the accessory shoe 50 is fully automatic or semi-automatic. The camera device that receives this third information switches to external photometry mode and takes in the analog information input from the data terminal 56 as illuminance information. Note that this illuminance information is treated as a value that is completely equivalent to the subject brightness information input from the external photometer mentioned above in terms of exposure calculation. Note that the contact point 168 provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156 is connected to the accessory-1 shoe 50.
When attached to the camera, it can come into contact with the data terminal 56', and transmits illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry with the exposure meter 160 as analog data to the camera device side through the data terminal 56. Further, a contact 170 provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156 is capable of contacting the AE lock terminal 58 of the accessory shoe 50, and the contact 170 comes into contact with the AE lock terminal 58 at the same time as the coupler 156 is attached. to lock the automatic exposure control mechanism of the camera device, especially the amount of light metering. This AE lock is released only while the photometry button 174 provided on the exposure meter 160 is pressed. Note that by pressing this metering button 174, the exposure meter 160
starts metering, and when you release it, it stops metering.

17 to explain the exposure meter 160 in more detail.
Reference numeral 6 denotes a rotatably provided light receiving head, the light receiving portion of which is covered with a hemispherical diffusion member 178. During photometry,
After positioning the light receiving section of the light receiving head 176 from the subject toward the camera device side, the photometry button 174 is pressed.

By this operation, the AE lock on the force zero camera device side is released, calculations for automatic exposure control are started, and
The exposure meter 160 starts photometry, and the data regarding the illuminance measured by the light receiving section is passed through the code 154 and given to the camera device side as data. Here, A
The camera device whose E-lock has been released performs calculations for automatic exposure control based on the data regarding the illuminance. Note that during photometry, the illuminance obtained as a result of photometry is measured by the exposure meter 160.
It is also displayed on the side meter 180. Therefore, the photographer uses the calculation board 184 from the meter 1800 pointer 182.
You can also find out the combination of aperture value and shutter speed necessary to obtain the correct exposure. At the end of photometry, by releasing the pressure on the photometry button 174, the camera device enters the AE lock state again and the pointer 18 of the meter 180 is released.
2 is clamped. In this state, remove the exposure meter 160 from the metering position, perform appropriate operations such as framing and focusing on the camera device, and then release the shutter to automatically expose based on the AE-locked calculation result. It is controlled and exposure can be obtained under desired conditions.

In addition, this incident light type exposure meter is equipped with the camera device AE Coro 2.
The reason why this function was added is because the incident light type exposure meter must be used close to the subject, away from the location where the camera is installed when shooting, and therefore it is necessary to use the location where the light metering operation using the exposure meter 160 is performed and when shooting. The location of the camera equipment for the exposure is not necessarily the same, and if you release the shutter while continuing to measure the light, there is a risk that the exposure meter will be inside the subject, which must be avoided. Depends on the reason.

That is, the exposure meter 160, like a general incident light type exposure meter used as a standalone unit, temporarily performs photometry operation near the subject, and only during photometry, removes the AE lock of the camera device and changes the photometry data. The calculation result for the automatic exposure control based on the exposure control is performed, and the calculation result during photometry is locked by the AE lock when the exposure metering is completed. This basically makes exposure control possible.

As mentioned above, by adding an automatic exposure control function based on photometric data from an incident light exposure meter to a camera device that has an automatic exposure control function, the range of application of camera devices can be greatly expanded. It is.

The camera system of this embodiment allows application of a motor drive device. This motor drive device has a mechanism that automatically winds the film after the shutter release, allowing continuous shooting of moving objects,
It can be used extremely effectively to capture the correct shutter speed, but since it eliminates the need to wind the film, you can concentrate on 7-raming and focusing for photography, and you can also use the shutter speed.・Since there is more leeway for opportunities, the possibility of photographing can be greatly improved.

The motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment is extremely effectively applied to photographing.
It is required that the camera device be compact and functionally superior, without deteriorating the operability of the camera device compared to before the motor drive is installed.

FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment. a camera mounting screw that protrudes and can be screwed into a screw hole 68 provided on the bottom surface of the body 4 of the camera device, and is used to attach the main body 186 to the body 4;
Reference numeral 190 is a mounting ring that is pivotally connected to the camera mounting screw 188 and is used to rotate the mounting screw 188, 192 is a power switch for this motor drive device, and 194 is the number of frames that can be taken with the film being used or the number of frames desired by the photographer. A frame number setting gear 196 for setting the desired number of frames to be photographed by this motor drive device is the number of remaining frames that can be photographed on the film that is fed one frame at a time by this motor drive device, or A film counter for displaying the number of frames set by the frame number setting gear 194, and 198 is a contact that is connected to the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4 when this motor drive device is attached to the camera device. Terminal 200 is a winding coupler that fits with the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device for mechanical connection when the motor drive device is attached, and 202 is a winding coupler for connecting the motor drive device to the bottom of the camera device body 4. Since the rewind button 48 cannot be operated when the rewind button 48 is installed, a rewind lever 204 is provided to operate the button 48 from the motor drive device side.
This is a rewind bottle that protrudes onto the main body 186 and is used to press the rewind button 48 on the bottom surface of the camera device body 4 by operating the rewind bottle.゛When attaching the motor drive device to the camera device, please use the cover 7 on the bottom of the body 4.
0 must be removed to expose the coupler 206 that interlocks with the winding lever 14C+- shaft of the camera device. After removing the lid 70, when the motor drive and device main body 186 are attached to the bottom surface of the camera device body 4, the winding coupler 200 on the main body 186 side and the coupler 206 on the body 4 side are fitted, and the motor drive and main body 186 are fitted. The film can be wound from the drive device side.

Note that the motor drive device attached to the camera device needs to operate in close cooperation with each operation of the camera device, and for this purpose, some kind of information transmission means is required between the motor drive device and the camera device.

The contact device 72 on the camera device side and the contact terminal 198 on the motor drive device side are provided for this purpose, and when the motor drive device is attached to the camera device, they are included in the contact device 72 on the bottom of the camera device body 4. 3 contacts 2
14.216.218 is the motor drive device main body 18
Three contacts 208.21 included in contact terminal 198 of 6
o1212, respectively. Note that the contact between the contacts 208 and 2114 is to connect the ground wire of the camera device and the motor drive device, and the contact between the contacts 210 and 216 is to connect the ground wire of the camera device to the motor drive device. It transmits a signal to drive the winding motor from the time when exposure is completed until winding is completed, and contacts 212 and 218' are connected to the shutter release device provided on the motor drive device side to the camera device. There is a tray for performing the shutter release.

Note that 220 is the aforementioned shutter release device, which is a device for remotely performing operations on the camera device, particularly for winding the film using the shutter release and motor drive device.

This shutter release device 220 is connected to the main body of the motor drive device by 1°8 by a control cord 222 of an appropriate length.
6, which connects the plug 224 provided at the end of the control cord 222 to the motor drive device main body 18.
This is done by inserting it into a socket 226 provided at 6.

This shutter release device 220 has an operation button 228
By pressing this operation button 228, a shutter release signal is applied from the motor drive device to the camera device through the contacts 212 and 218 mentioned above.

This operation button 228 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4 on the camera device side. Note that the operation button 228 is locked in the pressed state by sliding it in the direction of the arrow while being pressed.

To explain in more detail the motor drive device configured as described above, when applying the motor drive device to a camera device, first remove the lid 70 provided on the bottom surface of the camera device body 4, and then remove the lid 70 from the bottom of the camera device body 4. 4 bottom and mo”
Align the top surfaces of the drive device main body 186. In this state, the winding coupler 200 is in a position where it can be fitted with the coupler 206, the mounting screw 188 is in a position where it can be screwed into the screw hole 68, and the bin 204 is in a position facing the rewinding button 48. , and each contact 20 of the contact terminal 198
8.210.212 is the corresponding contact 2 of the contact device 72
It is necessary to position it so that it can come into contact with 14.216.218. This positioning can be easily done by holding the bottom surface of the camera device body 4 with the holding edge 228 provided at the top edge of the motor drive device main body 186, unless the directions of the camera device and the motor drive device are reversed. And it can be done quickly. Next, the mounting ring 190
By rotating the mounting screw 188, the mounting screw 188 is rotated and screwed into the screw hole 68 on the bottom surface of the body 4, thereby firmly fixing the motor drive device to the camera device. In this state, the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206 are mated, and each of the contacts 208, 210, 212 of the contact terminal 198 abuts the corresponding contact 214, 216, 218 of the contact device 72. Note that the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206 are fitted together by inserting the two claws 230 of the winding coupler 200 into the two retaining holes 232 of the coupler 206. Therefore, the pawl 230 of the winding coupler 200 may not properly engage with the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206 when the motor drive device is installed. In preparation for such a case, the winding coupler 200 is designed to be able to sink in the axial direction and is held protruding by the biasing force of a spring. That is, winding coupler 2
If the pawl 230 of 00 does not engage with the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206, the pawl 230 will be pushed by a portion other than the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206 and will sink, so when the motor drive device is installed, each coupler will not be forced to do so. It can prevent force from being applied.

However, depending on the operation of the winding lever 14 on the camera device side or the rotation of the motor on the motor drive device side, the winding coupler 200 or the coupler 206 rotates, and the pawl 230 and the engagement hole 232 can be engaged. When the position is adjusted, the claw 230 protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring and engages the engagement hole 2.
32.

By installing a motor drive device, this camera device becomes capable of automatic film winding after photography is completed and continuous photography. When the photographer wants to take a picture using the monitor drive device, he turns on the power of the motor drive device using the power switch 192. At this time,
If film winding has already been completed on the camera device side, the motor drive device is in a standby state, but if film winding has not been completed, the motor drive device is in a standby state.
After the H film winding operation is performed, the machine enters a standby state. Next, by pressing the shutter release button 18 on the camera device side, the motor drive device winds up the film after the photograph has been taken. Further, by keeping the shutter release button 18 pressed, the shutter release and film winding are continuously repeated.

It should be noted that the film color/returner 196 performs a subtraction count each time the film is wound once, and when the content of this counter 196 reaches 0'', the operation of this motor drive device is regulated. This is an important function in the sense of protecting the film perforations and preventing excessive force from being applied to the motor of the motor drive device.

When rewinding the film after all frames of the film have been photographed, by rotating the rewind lever 202 in the direction of the arrow, the pin 204 pushes the rewind pin 48 of the camera device, and the film is rewound. becomes possible.

Note that the shutter release device 220 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on a camera device, and the shutter release and film winding are performed by pressing the operation button 228. By keeping the operation button 228 depressed or locked, continuous shutter release and film winding are performed.

Also, with the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the camera device body 4 aligned with the hook mark 28 at the selected position, hold down the release buttons 1 and -8, or release the shutter release button. When the operating button 228 of the device 220 is pressed and locked, the shutter release and film advance are repeated at intervals determined by a self-timer mechanism.

As described above, the motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment can greatly expand the range of use of this camera device, and greatly improve the mobility, quick-shooting performance, and operability of the camera device. This will greatly improve the performance.

The viewfinder plays an extremely important role in camera operation, and most camera operations, including framing and focusing operations, which are the basics of camera operation, are performed while looking through the viewfinder. As mentioned earlier, the viewfinder has an important relationship with the operability of the camera, and for that reason,
If most of the information necessary for camera operation can be obtained through the viewfinder, the operability can be greatly improved. However, the shooting information displayed in the viewfinder is
It is necessary to efficiently arrange the display in a limited area, and it is also necessary that the displayed information be easy to confirm. This is important in the sense that the photographer can concentrate on framing and focusing.

The camera system of this embodiment is equipped with a new information display system in the camera device viewfinder that allows shooting information to be viewed efficiently and easily, prevents erroneous camera operations, and improves its operability. .

Through this information display system, the operator can obtain various information such as shutter speed, aperture value, low brightness warning, - brightness warning, automatic/manual mode, pulp, strobe charging completion, and warnings for incorrect operation. Therefore, you can obtain information to deal with any situation while looking through the viewfinder.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of the finder information seen through the finder window 13 of the camera device, and the focusing screen 234 includes a split portion 236 and a micro-screen for more reliable and quick focusing. - The prism portion 238 is arranged coaxially. This focusing screen 234 is the most important part in projecting the subject onto it and performing focusing and framing operations. Desired information necessary for photographing can be obtained. The shooting information is configured to be displayed using light emitting elements such as LEDs so that it can be checked back when shooting with a strobe in the dark or shooting a stage performance, etc., but in this embodiment, the information is further displayed digitally. It is characterized by displaying

The digital display of shooting information allows the photographer to obtain objective shooting information, unlike the fixed point method, pursuit method, and other methods of relatively obtaining shooting information that were commonly used in the past. When performing a focusing operation, it is possible to predict the depth of field, hand movements, etc., and accurate photographic operations are possible.

This LED display is the focusing screen 23
A symbol display section 240 is provided in a part outside of 4, and consists of a symbol display section 240 for representing a reciprocal number, a numeric symbol display section 242 for displaying a 4-digit number or symbol, and a decimal point display section for representing a decimal point. The first display section 2 consists of a section 243.
44, a decimal point display section 246 to represent the decimal point, and an 8-character segment! A second display section 25 consisting of a numeric symbol display section 24El- for displaying 12-digit numbers or symbols.
Displays 0 and manual or automatic mode! For this reason, it is comprised of a third display section 252 that displays the characters "°°M" when in manual mode.

The first display section is mainly used to display the shutter speed, and the second display section is mainly used to display the aperture position, but depending on the operation mode, other information may also be displayed. be.

That is, the first display section not only displays the shutter speed from 60 seconds to 1/2000 seconds, but also displays "buLb" when Pulp is selected as the shutter speed, and also displays flash photography. When the strobe is fully charged, "EF" is displayed together with the shutter speed for strobe photography to let the photographer know that strobe photography is possible, and furthermore, when the photography is completed normally. EE as a warning to let the photographer know what is not allowed.
EE, ' blinking display ° is also performed.

In addition, the second to second displays display the apertures from Fl, 2 to F22, and when manually adjusting the exposure by operating the aperture 7 setting ring 8 with the aperture of the lens device 2 closed. , When the aperture value set by the manual adjustment is insufficient for the proper exposure, a blinking display "op" is displayed, when the aperture value is excessive, a blinking display "cL" is displayed, and when the aperture value is appropriate, a blinking display "oo" is displayed. This is to notify the photographer of the appropriate aperture, and furthermore, a flashing display of "EE:l" is displayed on the first display as a warning to the photographer that the photograph is not being taken normally. This will be done together with the department.

Since the information in the viewfinder as explained above is closely related to each operation mode of the camera device, below, while explaining each operation mode of the camera device shown in the first diagram,
What information is displayed in the finder accordingly will be clarified through the explanatory diagram of FIG. 10, which shows a display example.

Now, when performing automatic exposure control photography with shutter speed priority (hereinafter referred to as AE photography) with the camera device shown in the first figure, set the mode selector switch 38 on the top of the body 4 to the shutter speed priority mode side, and rotate the dial 34. Through operation,
Allows input of shutter speed settings. Further, the mark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set to the index 7, so that the aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset controlled from the body 4 side. In this state, this power camera device is in a state where it is possible to perform AE photography with shutter speed priority, and if you turn the dial 34 now, the shutter speed displayed on the first display section 244 will change. changes in accordance with the rotation of the dial 34. Note that the display of the shutter speed at this time is as shown in FIG. A desired shutter speed can be selected and set by rotating the shutter. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown) calculates appropriate exposure or excessive or insufficient exposure by the photographer's desired number of steps based on object brightness information (or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the object. It is set by selecting (+) or ←) on the scale 42 with the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 provided on the top surface, but the aperture value necessary to obtain the exposure (hereinafter also referred to as appropriate exposure) is The result is calculated and displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in FIG. 10(a)-'(1). Therefore, the photographer can know the aperture value calculated for the shutter speed he or she has set before releasing the shutter. If the shutter is released in this state, the camera device will stop the lens device 2 down to the calculated aperture value and release the shutter at the set shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper and lower limit, and if the aperture of the lens calculated for the set shutter speed is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, That is, when the subject brightness is low, aperture control using the calculated aperture value is impossible. In such a case,
In order to inform the photographer of this fact, the second display section 250 flashes the aperture value of the aperture lens 2 corresponding to the maximum aperture that can be controlled, that is, the open aperture value. The maximum controllable aperture of the photographic lens 2, that is, the maximum aperture value, is determined from the opening pin 90 of the lens device 2 to the opening opening 7 on the body 4 side.
96.

Furthermore, if the aperture and diameter of the lens calculated for the shutter speed set by the dial 34 are smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, if the subject brightness is high, the calculated aperture value It is impossible to control the aperture. In such cases, a second camera will be used to let the photographer know.
The display section 250 corresponds to the minimum aperture that allows aperture control.
The aperture value of the photographic lens 2, that is, the maximum aperture value υ is displayed blinking. Note that the controllable minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, the maximum aperture value, is taken in from the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2 through the minimum aperture input pin 97 on the body 4 side.

Note that even if the subject brightness is too low or too high for the set shutter speed and a warning is issued by flashing the open aperture value or maximum aperture value on the second display section 250, , shutter release is possible, and in this case, the aperture value is controlled according to the value blinking on the second display section 250.

When performing aperture-priority AE photography next time, the mode selector switch 38 on the top surface of the body 4 is set to the aperture-priority mode side, and the aperture value can be set and input by rotating the dial 340.

The mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is still
is set as the index 7, so that the aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset controlled to the aperture value set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side. In this state, this camera device is in a state where AE photography with aperture priority is possible, and now when the dial 34 is rotated, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 will be changed to 340 times by the dial 340. It changes depending on the movement. The display of the aperture value at this time is shown in Fig. 10 (a) - (II
), the photographer uses the second display section 25.
A desired aperture value can be selected and set by rotating the dial 34 while looking at the aperture value displayed at 0. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown) calculates the shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure based on object brightness information (t or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the object, and 244. In Figure 10 (a) - (I
It is displayed as shown in I). Therefore, the photographer can know the shutter speed calculated for the aperture value he or she has set before releasing the shutter. In this state,
When the shutter is released, the camera device' closes down the lens device 2 to the set aperture value and releases the shutter at the calculated shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper limit and a lower limit, and if the lens aperture set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, the aperture cannot be set. It is impossible to control the aperture with a small aperture value.

In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly.
Although some kind of countermeasure is required, in this embodiment, such erroneous settings are treated as if the aperture value of the maximum aperture of the photographing lens, that is, the one-shot aperture value was set. For example, if the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is F number "1.
Although it is 8", the dial 34 on the body 4 side
If the aperture value is set to 1.4n in F number, the camera equipment actually treats the set aperture value as 1.8 in F number, and changes the shutter speed based on this value. Perform calculations. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 10(e)-(I), the display in the finder displays the aperture value and shutter speed used to control the actual exposure, regardless of the setting value of the dial 34.

Conversely, if the lens aperture set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographing lens device 2, aperture control using the set aperture value is impossible. In such a case, the aperture value has been set incorrectly, and some countermeasure is required. aperture value,
In other words, it is treated as if the maximum aperture value has been set. For example, the maximum aperture value of lens device 2 is '°16'' in terms of F number.
However, if you set the aperture value to '22'' in terms of F number using the dial 34 on the side of the body 4, the aperture value is actually set to '16'' in terms of F number on the camera device.
” is set, and the shutter speed is calculated based on the value of “R”. At this time, the display in the viewfinder is shown as shown in Fig. 10(e)-(II), regardless of the setting value of the dial 34. The aperture value and shirting speed used to control the actual exposure are displayed.

Furthermore, there are upper and lower limits to the shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera body 4, and if the shutter speed calculated based on the set aperture value is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, that is, when the subject When the brightness is low, shutter control using the calculated shutter speed is impossible.

In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this fact, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Furthermore, if the shutter speed calculated for the aperture value set by the dial 34 is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, that is, if the subject brightness is high, the calculated shutter speed Shutter control is not possible. In such a case, it is impossible to control the shutter speed at a shutter speed calculated by Δ. In such a case, in order to inform the photographer of this, the first display section 244 blinks and displays the fastest shutter speed at which shutter control is possible.

Note that even if the maximum shutter speed or maximum shutter speed is blinking on the first display section 244 and a warning is issued because the brightness of one subject is too low or too high for the set aperture value, , shutter release is possible, in which case the shutter speed is controlled according to the value blinking on the first display section 244.

The camera device shown in Figure 1 is mainly a shutter speed priority AE system.
The main focus is on using it in the two modes mentioned above: shooting or aperture-priority AE shooting, but in normal photography, most of the shooting is done in the above two modes. It seems possible to satisfy the requirements of

However, the lens device 2 side is not always used by aligning the sheep mark 12 of the aperture setting ring 8 with the index 7, and sometimes the operation of aligning the aperture position display 9 on the ring 8 with the index 7 is necessary. There is a possibility that it will be done. In such a case, the camera device enters an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. At this time, the mode and dial 34 set the shutter speed preferentially using the dial 34 depending on the setting position of the mode selector 38, and then manually set the aperture value on the lens device 2 side.
There are two possible modes: in which the aperture value is set preferentially in , and then the same aperture value is manually set on the lens device 2 side.

Now, when the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the dial 34 is used as a dial for setting the shutter speed.By rotating this dial 34, you can set the desired shutter speed. You can select and set the speed. The selected shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(DI). On the other hand, the camera device measures light through the lens device 2. The aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 necessary to obtain proper exposure is calculated based on the brightness information of the subject and the set shutter speed, etc.
It is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in parentheses. Note that at this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but is determined by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. 9, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is set as the index 7.
This is preset on the lens device 2 side by adjusting the value to . In this way, the third display section in the viewfinder is used to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the lens device 2 side. The letter "M" is displayed on 25-2. Further, when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the dial 34 is not used as a dial for setting the aperture value, and by rotating this dial 34, an arbitrary value can be set. You can select and set the aperture value.

The selected aperture value is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in FIG. 10(a). On the other hand, the camera device calculates the shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure based on the subject brightness information measured through the lens device 2, the set aperture value, etc., as shown in FIG. , is displayed on the second display section 244. Furthermore, at this time,
The aperture value displayed on the second display unit 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but depends on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, and the aperture value displayed on the second display unit 250 is
The aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side by matching the same aperture value as the aperture value displayed on the display section 250, that is, the aperture value set by the dial 34, to the index 7. In this way, in order to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the lens device 2 side, the 3' display section in the viewfinder is displayed. 252
The letter “M” is displayed.

As described above, the shutter speed or aperture value is set with the dial 34, and the aperture value on the lens device 2 side is manually preset according to the display on the second display section 250 in the viewfinder. , at the time of shutter release, the lens device 2 is manually narrowed down to a preset position,
In the body 4, the shutter is released at a shutter speed set by the dial 34 or at a shutter speed determined as a result of calculation, allowing photographing with proper exposure.

Note that even in this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, especially when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side are different. This camera device relies on setting in advance so that the aperture value always matches the aperture priority AE.
A photographing operation will be performed. In other words, aperture) priority AE shooting is
Since the exposure time is calculated and controlled for a preset aperture value, when presetting the lens device 2 for a preset aperture value, it may be done from the body 4 side. This is because the operation of the system is the same regardless of whether it is performed on the lens device side. However, in this case, the aperture value must be set on both the body 4 and the lens device 2, so
It is unavoidable that there will be significant problems with operability. □ In addition, in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, if the aperture value calculated for the set shutter speed is smaller than the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2, or if the maximum aperture value There may be cases where the value is larger, but in that case, it is assumed that the value cannot be set, and the display of the open aperture value or the maximum aperture value is flashed to let the photographer know. Give a warning.

In addition, in this mode, the shutter speed calculated for the set aperture value is smaller than the minimum shutter speed (low speed) that can be controlled by the body 4, and the maximum shutter speed ( However, in such a case, the minimum shutter speed display or maximum shutter speed display should blink to let the photographer know that the value is uncontrollable. A warning will be issued.

In addition, in this mode, especially the mode selector 38
When the lens is set to the aperture priority side, the range of aperture values set by the dial 34 and the range of aperture values that can be set on the lens device 2 side are quite different.

-p, there is an upper and lower limit for the aperture, that is, the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 used, and if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the 4° side of the body is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2. If it is large, aperture control using the set aperture value is impossible.

In such a case, the aperture value may have been set incorrectly.
Some kind of countermeasure is required, but in this example,
Such erroneous settings are handled as if the aperture value of the maximum aperture of the photographing lens, that is, the aperture value at maximum aperture has been set.

This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

Conversely, if the lens aperture set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, it is impossible to control the aperture at the set aperture value. In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly, and some countermeasure is required. However, in this example, in order to prevent the incorrect setting, the minimum aperture of the photographic lens It is assumed that the aperture value of , that is, the maximum aperture value has been set. This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

The above-mentioned shutter speed priority, aperture priority AE shooting and aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting modes all perform only aperture metering, and therefore focus/goo focusing/
There is a problem in that the screen 234 makes it impossible to check the effect of the aperture, especially the depth of field effect of the shutter release.

In particular, when shooting with AE, the aperture value displayed on the second display in the viewfinder is preset after the shutter is released, so the aperture value is set before the shutter is released. It is not possible to perform narrowing confirmation based on 64. As is clear from the explanation of FIG. 2, when the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set to mark black for AE photography, the AE charge is canceled when the aperture lever 64 is operated. This is because it becomes impossible to control the aperture from the body 4 side to the lens device 2 side, and therefore, as mentioned earlier, in such a case, the aperture lever 64 is locked and cannot be operated. It's Nishide.

On the other hand, in the case of the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the lens device 2
It is possible to aperture the lens device 2 to the aperture position preset with the aperture setting ring 8 on the side. Through this operation, the photographer can know the state of the image when the lens device 2 is stopped down to the set position through the focusing screen 234. By the way, depending on the aperture operation at this time, the camera device switches from the aperture IQ light to the aperture focus metering operation.
The control operation of the camera device differs depending on whether shutter priority or aperture priority is selected. if,
When the mode selector switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the camera device is set to the aperture metering aperture priority AE shooting mode, and when the switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the camera is set to the aperture priority AE shooting mode. The device is in aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.

Now, to explain aperture-priority AE photography with aperture metering, the lens device 2 is always in a closed state, and the aperture value υ changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting ring 8. On the other hand, whatever aperture value is set on the dial 34 at this time, it is ignored. At this time, in the body 4, the lens is stopped down to the position set by the aperture setting/g8, and the brightness is measured through the device 2, taking into account the aperture value of the subject. The shutter speed calculated in this way is displayed on the first display in the viewfinder.
0 displayed as shown in Figures (a)-(IV) When the shutter is released after the above operations, the aperture/zoom device 2 maintains the aperture value in the closed state. ,
In the body 4, the result of the calculation is obtained and displayed on the first display section 244.
The shutter will be released according to the shutter speed displayed, allowing you to take pictures with proper exposure.

Even in this mode, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of the aperture stop light measurement is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this fact, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Furthermore, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of aperture photometry is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such cases, the first
The fastest shutter speed at which shutter control is possible is displayed blinking on the display section.

In this mode, the aperture value is not displayed on the second display section 250 in the finder. This is because, as described in the explanation of FIG. 2, the body 4 is not provided with means for inputting the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Next, description will be given of aperture metering manual exposure control photography. The lens device 2 is always in a stopped-down state, and its aperture value changes depending on the set position r of the aperture setting ring 8. On the other hand, the shutter speed is set using the dial 34 at this time, and the set shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 in the finder. At this time, in the body 4, the aperture setting ring 8 performs brightness metering that takes into account the aperture value of the subject through the lens device 2, which has been stopped down to the set position. It is determined whether proper exposure can be obtained based on the speed. If it is determined that the combination of aperture value and shutter speed at this time will result in a proper exposure or an exposure amount within a certain allowable range for the proper exposure, then
) -ff), 00'' is displayed on the second display section 250, informing the photographer that the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount can be obtained with the currently set ib value and shutter speed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the combination of the currently set aperture value and the 7-point speed is underexposed for the proper exposure or allowable exposure amount, the second display section 250 will display the first
As shown in Figure 0 (a) - ff), a flashing 'OP' message is displayed, informing the photographer that the set aperture value and shutter speed are insufficient for proper exposure. On the other hand, the photographer operates the aperture setting/g8.
Either set the aperture of the photographing/zipping device 2 to a larger diameter side, or operate the dial 34 to set the shutter speed to a slower side, or adjust the set exposure compensation to the second level. By repeating the process until 00'' indicating proper exposure is found on the display section 250, it is possible to set the aperture or shutter speed necessary to obtain the proper exposure or appropriate exposure amount.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set combination of aperture value and shutter speed is overexposed compared to the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount, the second display section 250 will display the first
As shown in Figure 0 (a) - (V), a blinking "cL" is displayed, informing the photographer that the aperture value and shutter speed set are correct or overexposed compared to the allowable exposure amount. . In response, the photographer operates the aperture setting ring 8 to reset the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 to a smaller diameter side, or operates the dial 34 to increase the shutter speed. It is necessary to correct the set exposure until the second display section 250 shows 'oo' indicating the appropriate exposure. You can set the aperture or shutter speed.

In this aperture focusing photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, "M" is displayed on the third display section 252 in the viewfinder to indicate the manual mode.

After the above operations, when the shutter release is performed, the lens device 2 maintains the aperture value in the closed state, and the shutter is released in the body 4 at the shutter speed set by the dial 34. Photographing with proper exposure is possible.Next, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the pulp mode can be selected using the dial 34. When this dial 34 is set to pulp, the shutter remains open while the shutter release button 18 is pressed, so the shutter speed follows the operator's will, but in many cases pulp is It is used for time exposure.

Now, when performing pulp photography, when setting the pulp using the dial 34 and aligning the mark 12 with the index 7 using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the shutter speed is not set. , it is not possible to calculate the aperture value to be controlled. Therefore, it is desirable that the aperture value be manually set to some value, but in this example, if the aperture value is not set, the pulp is generally used on the low brightness side. Focusing on a number of points, the aperture value is configured to be controlled to the open aperture value. At this time, "buLb" is displayed on the first display section 244 in the viewfinder, and "buLb" is displayed on the second display section 250.
The display of the open aperture value is shown in Figure 10 (b) - (I
).

On the other hand, when performing pulp photography, the pulp is set using the dial 34, and the aperture value is set on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value display 9 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. In this case, the camera device is in full manual mode. At this time, the display in the finder is shown in Figure 10 (b).
- As shown in (I[), buLb is displayed on the first display section 244.
” is displayed, and “M” is displayed on the third display section 252.

At this time, the reason why the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side is not displayed on the second display section 250 is that the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side is not displayed. This is because the body 4 side is not equipped with a means for taking in the.

Next, strobe photography will be described. This camera device, especially the camera system of this embodiment, mainly adopts a configuration to which the strobe shown in FIG. 5 is applied.
・'Automatic exposure control photography using a strobe is possible.

As mentioned above, the strobe shown in FIG.
Connected to, synchro contact 138, control signal contact 1
40, each of the data signal contacts 142 connects to the body 4.
side synchronization contact 52, control terminal 54, data terminal 5
6.

When considering this ohm strobe, it is necessary to consider it in two ways: when it is used in automatic light control mode and when it is used in full-emission mode.

The automatic light adjustment mode is selected when a desired aperture value is set using the aperture setting dial 108, and is used to provide an appropriate amount of exposure on the film surface at the set aperture value. As mentioned above, the light emitting section 102 emits a flash of light, and the light detecting section 104 detects the reflected light from the subject to dim the flash emitted from the light emitting section 102, as described above. However, at this time, the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is applied to the body 4 side as an analog signal from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56.

On the other hand, the full flash mode is selected when the mark "M" is set without setting the aperture value using the aperture setting dial 108, and the flash emitted from the light emitting unit 102 is not controlled in any way. The full amount of light that is possible with this strobe is emitted without any problems. Note that at this time, the fact that the strobe is in the full emission mode is given to the body 4 side from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56 by an analog signal at a predetermined level.

Note that this strobe device gives a signal to the camera device body 4 to control the shutter speed, whether in the automatic light control mode or in the all-light flash mode. This was considered in response to the fact that currently known focal plane shutters cannot synchronize the strobe at shutter speeds of 1/60th or 1/125th of a second or higher. As mentioned above, this control is applied in two ways, fully automatic or semi-automatic, which can be freely selected. This switching between fully automatic and semi-automatic is performed by selecting the changeover switch 146, and if the fully automatic method is currently selected, the shutter speed can be changed depending on the dial 34 of the body 4. Even if it is selected, the control signal contact 140 is sent from the strobe side as soon as the strobe is charged.
, a charge completion signal is input as a first level analog signal through the control terminal 54, the strobe synchronization shutter speed T8YN is set as the shutter speed on the body 4 side, and the semi-automatic method is selected, the body 4 side Only when a shutter speed equal to or higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS is selected using the dial 34, the control signal contact 14 is sent from the strobe side as soon as the strobe is charged.
0, the body 4 depending on the charging completion signal given by the second level analog signal input through the control terminal 54.
Automatically strobe synchronization speed TSYN to side shutter speed
is set, and the shutter speed that was set below 'strobe synchronization speed -TSYN by the dial 34 of the body 4 is used as the shutter speed for control.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the strobe-side selector switch 146 is set to fully automatic mode or semi-automatic mode, if pulp is set using the dial 34 on the body 4 side, pulp will have the highest priority. tortoise? The shutter of the device will be pulp controlled.

On the other hand, no matter how the camera device body 4 and strobe are set, the operation of the camera device will differ greatly depending on the position of the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. I'm coming. This depends on whether the mark 12 is selected to point to the index 7 by the aperture setting ring 8 or not.

Note that when a charging completion signal is input from the strobe side to the body 4 during flash photography, the first display section 2 in the viewfinder
In the lower two digits of 44, "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging is complete and the strobe can fire.The display is as shown in FIG. 10(C).

Various control or operation methods will be listed below, but it goes without saying that the various methods described below need to be used appropriately depending on the purpose of photographing.

First, the flash is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set. Ring 8 shows the case where mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and AEi shadows are possible, but when the strobe is fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to fully automatic/automatic light control/automatic strobe photography mode. At this time,
The shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed TS, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. When the aperture value is set to 1, the camera will be focused from the side of the body 4. At this time, a display as shown in Figures 10(C)-(I) will be displayed in the viewfinder.
In addition, the first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example 1/60th of a second, and an EF to notify the photographer that the strobe has been fully charged.
is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Note that when the shutter is released in this state, the strobe will perform automatic flash control and the camera device will be controlled with the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the window viewr.

Second, the flash is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture and shutter speeds are set. This is a case where ring 8 does not select mark 12, and at this time, if the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take a picture, but the strobe is not fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to fully automatic/automatic light control/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. In addition, at this time, the viewfinder shows the image shown in Figure 10 (C) -
A display as shown in (I[) will be made, and "E" will be displayed on the first display section 244 to display the strobe synchronization shutter speed and to inform the photographer that strobe charging has been completed.
F” is displayed, the second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side, and the third display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side.
2 is displayed, indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the aperture setting/grid 8. Therefore, the photographer can check the iris displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder. It is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side, but if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will automatically adjust the light emission by itself. Then, the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2.

Third, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position and the aperture setting. This is a case where ring 8 is selected with mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting with the aperture open, but when the strobe is When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in body 4 is set to maintain pulp preferentially, and the shooting lens The aperture value is set by the aperture setting dial lO8 on the strobe side, and is controlled from the body 4 side. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS.
The second display section 250 displays "b" to indicate that the flash is being photographed, and "EF" to notify the photographer that the strobe has been fully charged. The aperture value set in is displayed.If you release the shutter in this state, the flash will automatically adjust the flash independently, and the camera device will adjust the shutter speed and the viewfinder according to the photographer's will. The aperture is controlled using the same aperture value as displayed.

Fourth, when the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is controlled by the dial 34 to set the pulp position and aperture. In this case, the yarn setting ring 8 does not select the yarn 12, but at this time, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode before the strobe is fully charged, and the lens device 2 is in the pulp shooting mode.
The side camera is ready for pulp photography at the set aperture value, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device will switch to pulp, autoflash, and manual strobe photography. mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is kept constant to preferentially maintain the pulp.
The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8). At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(C)-(B) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and a "b" display indicating that pulp photography is being performed will be displayed on the first display section 244. , 'EF' is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete, the second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side, and the third display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side. 252 displays a message "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer can adjust the aperture as shown in the second display section 252 in the viewfinder. In other words, it is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value set on the strobe side, but if you perform the shutter release in this state, the strobe will automatically adjust the light emission by itself, and the camera will The device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed according to the photographer's intention and an aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

Fifth, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set. Ring 8 shows the case where mark 12 is selected. Before the strobe charging is completed, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but when the strobe has completed charging. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSX'NK if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN.
If it is less than or equal to N, the second is set using the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. becomes. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10 (C) to (V) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed TS" or the set value. “BP” to display the shutter speed and notify the photographer that the strobe has been charged
” is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Note that if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will perform automatic flash control independently. , the camera device will be controlled with the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder.

Sixth, the flash is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 is the case where mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and is ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/automatic light control/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set to - if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed, and if it is less than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed. ,
The seconds are set using the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled using the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder there is a screen shown in Figure 10 (C) - ((
The first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or the set shutter speed, and a display to notify the photographer that strobe charging is complete. 'EF' is displayed, the second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side, and the third display section 252 displays the aperture value set manually using the aperture setting ring 8. This indicates that it is necessary to match the
Ml+ is displayed. Therefore, the photographer needs to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. If you release the shutter in this condition, the strobe will automatically control the flash by itself.
The camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the finder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2.

Seventh, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the pulp position is set by the dial 341 for shutter 1 degree, and the shutter and aperture settings are set. This is a case where ring 8 is selected with mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at the maximum aperture value, but when the strobe When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulse, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side, and the aperture value of the photographic lens 2 is set from the body 4 side. It will be controlled. In addition,
At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(C)-(4) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display "b++" indicating bulb photography and "s)o". "EF" to notify the photographer that the camera is fully charged
is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Furthermore, when the shutter is released in this state, the flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled at the desired shutter speed and aperture value that is the same as the one displayed in the viewfinder. It happens.

Eighth, the strobe is in automatic dimming mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed is set by the pulp position by the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 does not select mark 12, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode, and bulb shooting is possible with the coverage value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged, a signal indicating this is sent to body 4.
When given, the camera device switches to pulp, autoflash, and manual strobe shooting modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the pulp at 1, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, the viewfinder displays a display as shown in FIG. 10(C), and the first display section 244 displays "b" indicating that pulp photography is being performed. "EF"° is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the diaphragm setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer should look at the second display section 2 in the viewfinder.
However, it is necessary to set the aperture on the lens/lens device 2 side in accordance with the aperture value displayed at 52, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side.

When the shutter is released in this state, the flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled by the arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value manually set on the lens device 2, depending on the photographer's intention. This will result in

Ninth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in full automatic mode, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set. Ring 8 indicates when mark 12 is selected.At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but when the strobe is fully charged, A signal indicating this is given to body 4.

When this happens, the camera device switches to fully automatic, full-flash, and minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in body 4 is automatically set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSY.
N is set to, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. In addition, at this time, in the finder, there is a message shown in Fig. 10 [
d) - A display as shown in (I) is displayed, and the first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example, the shutter speed of 1/60th second, and the strobe charging is completed. ° “BF” is displayed to inform the photographer of the situation. Although no display is displayed on the second display section 250, this does not necessarily mean that aperture of the lens device 2 to the maximum aperture value will give a mini-exposure. This is to give a warning.

In this state, when a shutter release is performed, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

Tenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the shutter speed and aperture are set. R/G 8 is the case where mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is charged When the process is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to fully automatic/full flash/manual strobe photography mode.

At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to the shutter speed of the strobe 111, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8'. Note that at this time, the first
The first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed and informs the photographer that the strobe charging source is complete. "EF" is displayed on the third display section 252.
``M'' is displayed to indicate that it is necessary to manually adjust the diaphragm using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer
Guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe
Therefore, it is necessary to determine the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

11th, the strobe is in full flash mode and the shutter is set to full auto mode 1, mode,
In addition, if the pulp position is set by the shutter speed dial 34 and the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12, at this time, the camera device is set to the pulp position before the strobe is fully charged. The camera is in shooting mode and is ready for pulp shooting at maximum aperture, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device will switch to pulp/full flash shooting/minimum aperture strobe shooting. Mode - Switch. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the photographing lens 2
The aperture is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. Note that at this time, the first
Displays as shown in Figures 0(d)-(III) will be made, and the first display section 244 will display "b" indicating that pulp photography is being performed, and a message indicating that strobe charging has been completed. "EF" will be displayed to notify the person.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

At the twelfth point, the strobe is in full flash mode,
A fully automatic mode is set for the shutter release, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set to the mark 12.
is not selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready to take pulp photos at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. When the strobe has completed charging and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp/full flash/manual strobe photography mode. At this time,
The shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder, there is a screen shown in FIG.
The display shown in IV) will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display "b" to indicate that pulp photography is being performed, and a message to inform the photographer that strobe charging has been completed. "EF" is displayed, and the third display section 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the diaphragm using the setting ring 8 degrees. Therefore, the photographer depends on the guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe.
Lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject.
It is necessary to find the aperture value to be set and manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the lens will emit full light, and the camera device will be controlled by the arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value manually set on the lens device'2, depending on the photographer's intention. 0 Thirteenth - When the strobe is in full flash mode,
The shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting is set to 8 when mark 12 is selected. However, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter-priority AE shooting mode.
E-photography is possible, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/full-power flash/minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, and the shutter speed is set to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN. If the shutter speed is on the low side below TSYN, the seconds set on the dial 34 will be set, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 will be controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(d) to 10(V) will be displayed within 7 A/D, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set value. The shutter speed is displayed and "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete.

In this state, when a shutter release is performed, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

Fourteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set to seconds using dial 34, and aperture setting ring 8 is set to semi-automatic mode. In the case where mark 12 is not selected, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged and When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 will be set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is higher than the strobe synchronized shutter speed, and will be set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed or lower than the strobe synchronized shutter speed. If the speed is on the low speed side, the seconds are set using the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting/g 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d)-(VO) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set shutter speed. is displayed and "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the third display section 252 indicates that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8''. Therefore, the photographer should check the guide number calculation board 1 that comes with the strobe.
06, it is necessary to find the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and manually set the aperture using the aperture setting/g8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

15th, when the strobe is in full flash mode,
The shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set to the pulp position using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the pulp photography mode and is ready for pulp photography at maximum aperture, but once the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4. The camera device switches to Pulp, full flash, and minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is set to maintain Pulp preferentially, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set to the Pulp mode. It will be controlled to the maximum aperture value. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(d)-(a) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will indicate that pulp photography is being performed.
"B" is displayed and "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that the strobe has been charged.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

Sixteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position using the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring 8. This is the case when mark 12 is not selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode, and pulp shooting is possible at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set to maintain the pulp preferentially.1. The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d) is displayed in the viewfinder, and "b" indicating pulp photography is displayed in the first display section 244. is displayed and "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that the strobe has completed charging.
The third light display section 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer must calculate the guide number attached to the strobe. It is necessary to use the panel 106 to determine the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and to manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed and an aperture value manually set in the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

In addition, in the above-mentioned strobe shooting mode, if the mode changeover switch 38 on the camera device body 4 side is selected to the aperture priority side, the aperture setting value set by the dial 34 is completely ignored, and the aperture is set to 1. The value is controlled to the aperture value set on the strobe side, the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, or the maximum aperture value.

Now, when the strobe is in full automatic mode, the shutter speed is automatically set to the strobe synchronization speed of 7, for example, 1/60th of a second, but when the strobe is in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is automatically set to 1/60th of a second, but when the strobe is in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is If there is no shutter speed set on the side, there is a risk that control regarding shutter speeds below the strobe synchronization speed of 7 will not be possible. Therefore, in principle, each mode described above requires that the mode selection switch 38 be set to the shutter speed priority side, but sometimes semi-automatic strobe photography is performed with the mode selection switch 38 set to the aperture priority side. It is also possible that it will happen.

Therefore, in order to deal with this problem, the camera of this embodiment
In the system, when the mode selector switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side in the strobe shooting mode, the shutter speed is synchronized with the strobe regardless of the state of the selector switch 146 even if the semi-automatic mode is set on the strobe side. It is configured to be controlled in a so-called fully automatic mode in which the shutter speed is set. This is based on the opinion that the semi-automatic mode is used when there is some intention regarding the shutter speed, so it is not used on the aperture priority side.

Figure 11 shows a diagram of the photographing mode at the time of strobe photography described above. However, although this figure does not specifically mention the case of pulp photography, it is the same if you replace the pulp with the shutter speed. Explain the system.

Originally, a camera system based on a comprehensive and rational system design would have to be designed to prevent erroneous operation or malfunction, but currently, as far as we know, the most Exposure control means that are highly accurate and can obtain good photographic images, namely shutter devices and aperture devices, are mostly composed of mechanical components, and their operations are mechanical with quite complex mechanisms. This is done by a sequential mechanism. On the other hand, in order to view the camera device as a comprehensive system and apply rational control, it is necessary to introduce a comprehensive electrical control mechanism, but this electrical machine interface It is extremely difficult to adopt a configuration that completely prevents erroneous operations and malfunctions due to the constraints of the complicated mechanisms of camera devices and cameras. In contrast, in this embodiment, if an erroneous operation is performed by the photographer, the erroneous operation is detected and notified to the photographer, and the erroneous operation caused by the erroneous operation is prevented. In order to do this, a locking system is used to prevent the shutter release from being performed.

In the right camera device applied to this embodiment, the following describes what operations are considered to be erroneous operations, according to the logic explanatory diagram in FIG. 11(B). The mentioned erroneous operation was caused by the lever 84 of the lens device 2 and the AE on the body 4 side as explained in FIG.
It is closely related to the operating characteristics of the lever 94. In other words, when the mark 12 is selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the maximum aperture value is selected as the aperture value on the lens device 2 side, and it is considered equivalent to the case where the aperture value is selected. If no aperture control is performed using the AE lever 94, the lens device will be unconditionally stopped down to the minimum aperture position, making control impossible. Also,
When attempting to perform AE photography, if A-94 is not charged, it is impossible to control the aperture of the lens device 2 from the body 4' side. In this embodiment, the above two cases are considered to be malfunctions and a warning lock is performed.
), @), and ■). However, especially in the condition of @) and leech), the film winding lever 14
The condition is that the state is after the film winding is completed by the operation. This is because the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharging state unless a special operation is performed before the AE lever 94 is charged with AE due to film winding, and this state is not necessarily a malfunctioning state and there is no soot. Note that the AE charging state cannot exist when the aperture of the lens device 2 is narrowed down by the aperture lever 64, as is clear from the explanation in FIG. 2, so it is blank in FIG. 11(B). ing.

Let us consider in what cases the erroneous operation states shown in FIG. 11(B)-(1) to (IV) occur.

Now, when the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set to mark 12, the camera device is in the shutter speed priority or aperture priority AE shooting mode depending on the state of the mode changeover switch, and the Figure 10 (a
) (■)' to (II) are shown. In such a state, even if the photographer actually stops down the lens device 2 to the aperture value displayed on the display section 250 of the lens 2 and tries to check the depth of field on the finder screen 234, the AE lever will not work in the AEI shooting mode. Due to the structure of the lens 94, it is not possible to narrow down the lens device 2 to the aperture value set or calculated on the body 4 side. Despite such conditions, if the aperture lever 64 is used to aperture the lens device 2, the aperture position set by the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 will be the same as that of the lens device 2.
Since this corresponds to the minimum aperture diaphragm position, the lens device 2 is stopped down to the minimum aperture diaphragm position. This state corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 11(B)-(I) and (If), and clearly results in an erroneous operation. However, in this embodiment, as mentioned earlier, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is mark 12
When this is selected, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted, so that such a situation is prevented from occurring. On the other hand, in order to check the depth of field, the photographer first cancels the selection of the mark 12 by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, and manually sets the aperture value to the lens. There is no problem with setting the lens device 2 on the device 2 side and then operating the aperture reduction lever 64 to aperture the lens device 2 to the set position. At this time, the camera device is in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. Alternatively, the mode becomes aperture-priority AE shooting mode with aperture metering, and the depth of field can be checked.

In this state, as is clear from the explanation in FIG. 2, the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharge state. In the case, the 11th
The state shown in Figure (B) - (I) or (II) is reached, but as mentioned earlier, this is clearly an erroneous operation, and the viewfinder contains "EEEE EE" as shown in Figure 10 (f).
” will be displayed flashing to indicate a warning lock, and the shutter will be locked so that the shutter cannot be released.

Furthermore, if the photographer cancels the aperture of the lens device 2 by pressing the aperture release button 66 from the state of Fig. 11-rB)-(1) or (II),
) - @), ff) As shown in K, the AE lever 94 returns to the AE shooting mode with the AE discharged and charged, and this is also an incorrect operation in that AE shooting is impossible, and the viewfinder As shown in Figure 10(f),
A blinking display indicating a warning lock of "EEEE EE" is displayed, and the shutter is locked so that the shutter release cannot be performed. Photographers who have received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in Figure 1 can release the aperture setting ring i of the lens device 2 from the mark 12 to enable manual exposure adjustment photography with aperture reduction metering or aperture priority AE photography with aperture metering. Furthermore, by opening the lens device 2 using the stop-down button 66, it is also possible to perform manual exposure adjustment photography with full-open metering. Furthermore, from this state, when the mark 12 is set with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, the warning lock state is again established as shown in FIG. It can be removed using a method.

In the state shown in Fig. 11 (B)-(2), leech), Fig. 10 (f
) When the photographer receives a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in (), by releasing the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from the mark 12, it becomes possible to perform wide-open metering manual exposure adjustment photography.

Alternatively, while pressing the multiple exposure button 16 provided on the top surface of the body 4, press the film winding lever 14.
By operating , the AE lever 94 can be recharged to enable shutter-priority or aperture-priority AE photography.

Note that Fig. 11 @)-(2), IIV) is determined as a malfunction only when film winding is completed, and when film winding is not completed, it is treated as a shutter-priority or aperture-priority AE shooting mode. (B) - (1)
, (II) is determined to be a malfunction regardless of whether film winding is completed or not.

As mentioned above, in the camera system of this embodiment, there is a gap between the mechanical configuration or the traditional lens device configuration and the various control mechanisms introduced for new improvements and functional enhancements. We are actively trying to improve performance and expand the range of various constraints that occur, and we also issue warnings in the viewfinder in the event of unavoidable erroneous operations or malfunctions. The system is configured so that the photographer is notified of this and the shutter mechanism is locked to prevent photography from taking place.Next, we will discuss the specific configuration of the camera device shown in the first diagram to achieve various performances. Explain in detail.

Conventionally known camera devices are equipped with an aperture control mechanism that determines the aperture of the lens device and a shutter mechanism that determines the exposure time for the film surface.
Traditionally, and in the future, it has been common to have a configuration that includes a mechanical control mechanism. Structures with additional features have been proposed and implemented. Most of these configurations with electrical mechanisms are concentrated in the exposure control mechanism including the photometry system of the camera device, but this is because the general photometry system relies on the light guide conversion function to Since all information such as brightness is input into the camera system as an electrical signal, it is necessary to go through an interface between electricity and machinery in order to perform automatic exposure control. It is from.

A simple mechanism is sufficient for such an interface to perform a single function in a camera system, and the specific configuration has been known for a long time.
As the functions required of camera systems increase, their configurations also tend to become more complex. In contrast, currently
Many known camera systems apply relatively simple analog electrical control systems, but these are configurations that simply perform either shutter speed priority or aperture priority functions. This is because it can be realized with a relatively simple and economical circuit configuration.

However, a configuration that has both shutter speed priority and aperture priority functions as well as various discrimination and judgment functions, such as the camera system in the above embodiment, is expected to have a considerably complicated configuration, but especially Applying a purely analog electrical circuit to such a configuration not only poses problems in terms of accuracy, but also complicates the configuration, leading to poor economic efficiency and an increase in the size of the device, so it is not a preferable solution. I can't say that.

On the other hand, one possibility is to configure most of the control circuit with digital electrical circuits that can be integrated, but this method can perform various functions as in the camera system shown in Figure 1. This can be said to be an extremely rational method for realizing a camera device that has the following features. This digital electric circuit is easier to design than analog electric circuits, and can easily realize various control modes. It also has the feature of being able to respond immediately to changes in specifications.
It is extremely suitable for application to equipment having various discrimination/judgment functions, measurement, and two-display functions, such as systems.

Therefore, most of the control system applied to the camera system of this embodiment can be constructed from digital electric circuits, thereby improving reliability and economical efficiency.

- Now, before explaining the system by which the camera device shown in the first diagram operates, it is necessary to explain how the camera device shown in the first diagram receives inputs regarding photometric data, setting data, operating conditions, operating states, etc. I will explain how this is done through composition. Considering the input of such various information is relatively important when configuring a digital system, especially in a camera system.
This is a major problem that must be taken into account in systems where various mechanically operating parts are compactly housed in a small space.

The camera device basically has a TT'L photometry system, and a photoelectric conversion element such as a CdS or silicon light-receiving element is used as a light-receiving element. The output of the photoelectric conversion element is an analog signal, which is then logarithmically compressed, that is, apex value converted, and then converted into digital information through an AD converter. The information obtained from such a photometry system is expressed as BVo in the apex value in the case of open photometry.
, if BVs is the case of aperture metering, then BVo=BV-AVo AVc (8) BV
s=BV-AV-AVc'<4) In the above equation, A V o is the open aperture value of the lens device 2, AV is the actual aperture value depending on the aperture reduction, and A V c
corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is opened, and AVC' corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is stopped down. In addition,
The respective errors AVc and AVc' need to be calculated and calculated based on the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 during photometry,
Regarding the curvature error when wide open, the aperture value is input from the lens device 2), so it can be easily calculated, whereas when the curvature error is stopped down, it can be calculated easily
Since there is no means to transfer the actual aperture value inward from the side to the body 4 side, it is impossible to calculate it. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, the bending error at the time of stopping down is ignored, and it is assumed that BVs = BV - AV (5). ' As is clear from the above explanation, the data obtained from the photometry system is data regarding the subject brightness expressed by the above equations (3) or (5).

The above data is later converted into 8-pit digital data through an A-D converter, but this digital data has a gravity of "14"- in the least significant bit and 16" in the most significant bit. In other words, the photometric data is converted into digital data with an accuracy of h steps using the apex value.

For TTL photometry, a well-known circuit that logarithmically compresses an analog voltage signal proportional to the amount of received light, converts it into an analog signal corresponding to an apex value, and outputs the analog signal is applied.

Also, as mentioned before, this camera device has a body 4.
An ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 for photographic film is provided on the top surface. This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is used to set the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used, but the current tendency of commercially available films is that the ASA sensitivity is set in increments of apex values. It is. Therefore, depending on this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, the film sensitivity is ASA16.20.25.32.40.50.6.
4.80.100.125.160.200.250.
320, -400, 500.64v1800...
・In this way, the apex value will be input and set with child actor precision. However, of course, the film sensitivity data set by this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 will also be imported as a digital value, but it is not necessary to input a value equivalent to 1 in decimal in binary code. It is possible. On the other hand, a binary value code may be used, but
Since all other data in this camera system is a binary value with a precision of one level, it is difficult to match it with other data for digital operations, and multiplication or division cannot be performed. On the other hand, if the calculation results for actual control are obtained as binary values with a precision of one level, such complicated calculation operations are meaningless. Therefore, a method of approximating and importing the data using a monitor with the precision of this camera system is adopted.

In other words, "yo" and "r are respectively 7±100 out of 3 1 1 1 T = 0.375...
・・・ (6) 2 1 1 3”2 + 100 = 0.625 ・・・・・・・・・
...(Force can be approximated with one precision, but the error that occurs in this case is ±0.042 steps, which is 1 step, that is, 0.1
If this is compared to 25 stages, it is within a sufficiently permissible error range. Therefore, the film sensitivity set by the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is directly set using a binary value code with one step precision. In this camera system, the film sensitivity is treated as 7-bit digital data, but the lowest bit of this digital data has a weight of "f" and the most significant bit has a weight of "8". It is binary data with weight.Of course, this binary data is (6
), it can be seen that the fee of s precision as shown in equation (7) stands. Therefore, when inputting data regarding the 7-bit film sensitivity, it is possible to set the relevant bit to '1' later without looking at anything in particular, so in the camera system of this embodiment, The ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 inputs film sensitivity data in the form of a 6-pin binary code, which is later converted to 7-bit data.

FIG. 12 shows a specific configuration for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 4o. The digital data setting plate 254 is configured so that digital data corresponding to the dial rotation position can be obtained. The digital data setting board 254 has an insulating base 25
A plurality of concentric conductive rings 256 corresponding to each bit of film sensitivity setting data are provided on the data setting plate 2.
a common ring 258 in electrical communication with all of the conductive rings 256 through 54 radially extending conductors 262;
It is made up of the following. Note that the common ring 258 is always in contact with the brush 260;
0 is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 261 and is also connected to an inverter 263. Note that between each conductive ring 256 there is a data track corresponding to each focus of the film sensitivity setting data, and six brushes 264 corresponding to each bit of data are in contact with each track. There is. The track includes brushes 264 and brushes 264 corresponding to pits with a weight of 2'' among the digital value pits of the setting data, corresponding to each setting position of the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 for setting the film sensitivity step by step. A conductive portion 266 extending in the radial direction from the conductive ring 256 is disposed at a portion facing each of the brushes 264 to establish electrical contact between the conductive rings 256.

As will be explained in more detail below, this camera system is controlled by eight timing pulses. Such timing pulses are <TBO to TB7 as shown in FIG. This is no exception in the case of importing film sensitivity data, and in order to input each of the nine types of setting data or setting conditions, 6 of TBI to TB6 shown in FIG.
A number of timing pulses are used.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 12, the timing pulses TBI
The brush 26 has a configuration in which ~TB6 is applied, but the brush 26 has a configuration in which a timing pulse is applied.
4 is not in contact with the conductive part 266, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 263 through the resistor 261.
The inverter 263 outputs a low level, and when the brush 264 is in contact with the conductive part 266, the input of the inverter 263 is the conductive ring 256, the brush 264,
Since the inverter 263 is pulled to a low level through the diode 265t'', the inverter 263 outputs a high level.

That is, a six-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of the ASA sensitivity set by the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is output from the inverter 263 as the timing pulse T.
The signals are sequentially output from the lower digit pit in synchronization with BI to TB6. In this 6-bit data, the lower 2 bits are data related to "Yo" and T4, and as mentioned earlier, if any of the lower 2 bits has 3 1's, 1" is set in the lower bit with a weight of The data SV (apex value) is finally imported as 7-bit digital data with i-precision. It has been imbued with considerable digital value.

Furthermore, as described above, this camera device has a configuration for capturing the open aperture value AVo (apex value) of the photographic lens device 2 to be used as a digital value. In this case, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 2, the lens device 2 is provided with the aperture pin 90 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the aperture value AVo of the lens, and the lens device 2 is provided with the aperture pin 90 on the body 4 side. An open input pin 96 is provided to detect the amount of protrusion. This open input pin 96 is connected to a mechanism that detects the amount of movement thereof and takes in the open aperture value A V o of the lens device 2 as a digital value. The detailed structure of the darning mechanism is shown in FIG. 14, and the opening mold 796 has one end in contact with the opening pin 90 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 9o. This amount of movement is replaced by the amount of swinging of the swinging lever 268, which contacts the other end of the open input bin 96, about the shaft 270. This amount of oscillation is converted into a 4-bit digital value and extracted according to its magnitude.
For this purpose, a fan-shaped open aperture value detection plate 272 centered on the axis 270 is provided. This open aperture value detection plate 272 has a digital display of the open aperture value AVf on an insulating substrate.
4 centered on axis 270 corresponding to each bit of data.
The concentric conductive ring 274 of the book is arranged concentrically with the pattern 274, and the power supply Vcc is connected through the resistor 275.
A common ring 276 is connected to the inverter 2-79 and further connected to the inverter 2-79. Note that between each of the conductive rings 274 are data tracks corresponding to each bit of the open aperture value AVo data of the lens device 2, and for each track there are four data tracks provided at one end of the swing lever 268. The brush 280 corresponds to this. The front brush 280 is in electrical continuity with a common brush 282 which is juxtaposed with the brush and is always in contact with the common ring 276. Said conductive ring 274. corresponds to the amount of rocking of the rocking lever 268, 1 in each bit of the lens open aperture value A V o
In order to create an electrically closed circuit with the brush 280 corresponding to the track corresponding to the lens device 2, a conductive portion 282 is extended to a portion of each track that is in contact with the brush 280. The maximum aperture value AV of the lens device 2 is set and inputted through the maximum aperture input pin 96 of the body 4 from maximum V/90.

The digital value corresponding to the apex value is the brush 280.
and selective contact of the conductive portion 282.

Note that the timing pulse shown in FIG. 13 is also involved in taking in the open aperture value AVo of this lens device 2. Four timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are used to capture the open aperture value AVo.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 14, the timing pulses TB3 are connected to conductive rings 274 through diodes 277 respectively
~TB6 is applied, but in such a configuration, the conductive ring 2 to which the timing pulse is applied.
When the brush 280 is not in contact with the conductive portion 282 extending from the conductive portion 74, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 279 through the resistor 275, so the inverter 279 is
The brush 280 performs level output and is also the conductive part 282.
When they are in contact with each other, the input of the inverter 279 is pulled to a low level through the common ring 276, the common brush 283, the brush 280, the conductive ring 274, and the diode 227, so that the inverter 279 outputs a high level. That is, from the inverter 279, the open pin 90
A four-digit digital value corresponding to the maximum aperture value of the photographing lens device 2 input through the maximum aperture input pin 92 is sequentially output from the upper bit in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. In this 4P cut data, the most significant digit has a weight of "4" and the least significant digit has a weight of "↓" 0.

When importing data regarding the open aperture value AVO'', the issue is the open aperture value AV of the open pin 90 provided in the lens device 2.

This is the difference in the amount of protrusion corresponding to . That is, for both the lens device 2 and the camera body 4, it is not possible to greatly change the amount of protrusion of the open V/90 for each open aperture value AVo due to space constraints, and the lens device 2 and the camera body 4 cannot be changed widely for each open aperture value AVo. Since it has a removable structure, it is difficult to reliably read minute differences in the amount of protrusion. This is especially true when reading binary code digital data from the open aperture detection plate 272 as shown in FIG. 14 in correspondence with the position of the brush 280. If the brush 280 is located between positions indicating other data, there is a risk of erroneous reading due to constraints on the accuracy of the brush 280. The erroneously read data at this time will never become intermediate data with the adjacent data, but will be taken out as completely different data, so the erroneously read data will cause a big problem in the operation of the system. Therefore, when reading the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use, a method was considered in which the reading is done using a gray code instead of a binary code. As is well known, the Kagaru Burecho code is such that the content differs by only one bit between adjacent digital data, and through a mechanism such as the configuration shown in Figure 14, the amount of movement of the open mold 796 is It can be applied very effectively when reading corresponding digital data. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, a gray code is applied to the mechanism for capturing the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2, and the gray code is used as data for processing such as calculation later. The structure is such that it is converted into a hexadecimal value code.

To explain in more detail, the Gray code is the 15th
As shown in the comparison table in the figure, unlike normal binary codes, adjacent codes differ by only one bit, and l
They correspond to O-base numbers and binary codes as shown. Now, when we think about the relationship between Gray code and binary code, we find that they do not have a random relationship that can be omitted. In other words, if we look at this binary °-code after associating each digit of the binary code with each digit of the Gray code, we can see that the - of the Gray code is
The digit corresponding to the digit "o" has the same content as the digit immediately above it, and the digit corresponding to the digit "1 n" in the Gray code has the content inverted from the digit above it. I can see that it is. 1 Therefore, the timing pulses TB3~T
Gray code data taken in from the upper digits in synchronization with B6 can be obtained as data converted into binary code by taking it out through a circuit as shown in FIG.

That is, a J-type flip-flop produces a Q output as shown in FIG. 17 when the input to the J-type is the same human power.

In other words, when both J- and human power are 1", the next clock
In synchronization with the pulse, the Q output is inverted, and when both inputs to J- are on, the Q output remains the same. Therefore, through a circuit as shown in Figure 16, a flip signal is applied to J-.
When a Gray code is sequentially applied to the J- input terminal of a flop starting from the most significant digits, the data sequentially obtained from the Q output terminal in synchronization with the clock pulse is converted into a binary code. Data name.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device has the above-mentioned configuration, and the maximum aperture value AvO of the photographic lens device used.
is imported as a digital value equivalent to the Apex value.

In this camera device, the lens device 2 can manually set its aperture, that is, the manual state in which the aperture value desired by the photographer is preset using the aperture setting ring 8, and the manual state in which the aperture can be preset from the body 4 side. As mentioned above, there is provided a mechanism for transmitting to the body 4 the automatic state in which the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8.

That is, on the side of the lens mounting device 2, there is an AE pin 9 that projects when the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8.
2, and the AE bin 92 is provided on the body 4 side.
An AB detection section 100 is provided which faces the AE pin 92 and detects that the AE pin 92 has protruded, and this AE detection section 100Jd is interlocked with a switch 284 as shown in FIG. This switch 284 is a normally closed contact, one end of which is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 275 and the input end of an inverter 279, and the other end to which a timing pulse TBI is applied through a diode 277. That is, the switch 284
Its state is sensed by the pulse TBI, and when it is in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is pulled to a low level through the switch 284 and the diode 277, so the inverter 279 outputs a high level. When the inverter 279 is in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 279 through the -resistance 275, so the inverter 279 outputs a low level.

Therefore, when the AE pin 92 is not protruding (that is, in the manual state), the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, and when the AE pin is protruding. , that is, when in the automatic state, the inverter 2
From 79 onwards, the low signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBI.
A level output is made.

Through the above-described configuration, the camera system of this embodiment has the aperture setting condition by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, that is, the aperture presetting is performed on the lens side, It incorporates the condition of being in a state where it is performed on the side. In the following explanation, the high level signal outputted from the inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI will be referred to as M.
It is called the NAL signal.

The first illustrated camera device also includes a lens device 2 and a body 4.
As mentioned above, the configuration is such that the lens can be narrowed down by operating the side aperture lever 64, but this aperture lever 64 merely has the function of mechanically narrowing down the lens device 2. Not only the 14th
As shown in the figure, it is linked to a switch 286 for detecting that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state.

This switch 286 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
79, and a timing pulse signal B2 is applied through the other i-p-diode 277. That is, the state of the switch 286 is sensed by the timing pulse TB2, and when it is in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 279 through the resistor 275. The inverter 279 provides a low level output, and in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is connected to the switch 286.
, the inverter 279Fi outputs a high level because it is pulled to a low level through the diode 277. Therefore, when the aperture lever 64 is operated to bring the photographic lens 2 into the aperture state, the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2.

Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment incorporates the condition regarding whether or not the lens device 2 is in the focused state. In the following explanation, the high level signal outputted from the inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 will be referred to as 5.
It is called a PDW signal.

As is clear from the above explanation, the MNAL signal is output from the fourteenth illustrated inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing of the timing pulse TBI.
The 5PDW signal is output in synchronization with the timing of B and 2, and the data regarding the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used is output sequentially from the upper digit side in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. In other words, the output of the inverter 279 is the timing pulse TBI~T.
They will be separated as appropriate in accordance with B6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device includes a dial 34 on the front surface of the body 4 for setting the shutter speed or aperture value desired by the photographer. This dial 34 is
It is used to set the shutter speed TV (apex value) when shooting with shutter priority and the aperture value AV (apex value) when shooting with aperture priority using digital values.The specific configuration is the ASA sensitivity. The configuration is similar to the configuration for taking in the digital value of film sensitivity - from the setting dial 40. In other words, the dial 34! As shown in FIG. 18, the system is configured such that digital data corresponding to the rotational position of the dial is input to the system from a digital data setting plate 288 that is rotated in unison with the dial 34.

The digital data setting board 288 has a plurality of concentric conductive rings 292 corresponding to each digital value bit of the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV data on an insulating substrate;
A conductor 29 extending in the radial direction of this data setting plate 288
A common ring 294 maintains electrical continuity with all of the conductive rings 292 through 8. In addition,
The common ring 294 is always in contact with a brush 296, which is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 297.
and an inverter 299.

Note that between each conductive ring 292 there is a data track corresponding to each bit of digital data of shutter speed TV or aperture value AV, and for each track there are five 9 brushes corresponding to each bit of data. 290 are in contact. The track includes brushes 290 and brushes 290 corresponding to bits that are "1" in each bit of the digital value of the setting data, corresponding to each setting row of the dial 34 for setting the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV. In order to make electrical contact between the conductive rings 292, a conductive portion 300 extends in the radial direction from the conductive ring 256 at a portion where each brush 290 comes into contact with the conductive ring 292.
It is made up of

In addition, from this configuration, the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
In order to incorporate this, timing pulses are involved. In the configuration shown in FIG. 18, there are five brushes 29.
Among the timing pulses, TB2 to TB6 are applied to each of the timing pulses through a diode 301 at each of the timing pulses. If not, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 263 is
When a level output is performed and the brush 290 is in contact with the conductive part 300, the input of the inverter 299 is pulled to a low level through the conductive ring 292, the brush 290, and the diode 301, so the inverter 299 becomes a high level. Performs level output. That is, from the inverter 299, a 5-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the dial 34 is sent as timing pulses TB2 to TB61/i.
: Synchronized and output sequentially starting from the lower digit bits. The least significant digit of this 5-pit data has a weight of 0°, and the most significant bit has a weight of W 8 I+.

By the way, depending on the setting of the dial 34, it is necessary to specify whether the digital data obtained through the above-mentioned configuration is data related to the shutter speed TV or data related to the aperture value AV, but this distinction cannot be made. A mode changeover switch 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4 is provided for this purpose. This mode changeover switch 38
is interlocked with a switch 302 that closes when the aperture priority mode is set.

This switch 302 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 29.
7 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
99, and the other end is connected to the diode 30.
A timing pulse TBI is applied through 1. That is, the switch 302 is connected to the timing pulse TB.
1, and when it is in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 299 outputs a low level, and the inverter 299 is in the closed state. In this case, the input of the inverter 299 is connected to the switch 302 and the diode 3.
Since the inverter 299 is pulled to a low level through 01, the inverter 299 outputs a high level. Therefore, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode, the inverter 299 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, and the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter priority mode. When switching to the side, the inverter 299 outputs a rubber low level.

Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment determines whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed TV or the aperture value. In the following explanation, the timing pulse T from the inverter 299 is
A high level signal output in synchronization with "B1" is called an ASLC signal.

In this embodiment, the shutter speed TV is selected and set from values in 1-step increments using the dial 34, and the aperture value is selected from values in 7-step increments. It is composed of: That is, even though the shutter speed is set in steps of 1 step, the dial 34 also needs to set the aperture value including the data of 1 step, so depending on the setting position of the dial 34, the shutter speed may be set to The shutter speed including the stage data will be set. In order to deal with this problem, in this embodiment, data related to the shutter speed is set by multiplying the necessary setting digital value by 1, and the data is read out according to the setting position of the dial 34.・The data is later doubled and converted into a digital value equivalent to the apex value related to the shutter speed.
It is used as a data TV.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device has an inverter 29
9, an AsLC signal is output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 to determine whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed or the aperture value. - The data set as pulses will be output sequentially from the upper digit side, but the output of the inverter 299 will be divided as appropriate according to the timing pulses TB1 to TB6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later. .

Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment captures the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the photographer through the dial 34 as a digital value equivalent to the apex value.

Further, this camera device has a configuration for detecting the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. This is the second
As clarified in the explanation of the figures, the lens device 2 is equipped with a minimum diameter pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum aperture aperture value of the lens, and the body 4 side has a protrusion amount of the minimum diameter pin 91. A minimum diameter input pin 97 to be detected is provided. This minimum aperture input pin 97 is connected to a mechanism that detects the amount of movement thereof and specifies to which value the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 belongs among a plurality of predetermined aperture values. Ru.

The detailed structure of this mechanism is shown in FIG. 19, in which the minimum diameter input bin 97 has one end abutted against the minimum diameter pin 91 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91. This amount of movement is replaced by the amount of swinging of the swinging lever 304, which comes into contact with the other end of the minimum diameter input pin 97, about the shaft 303. This amount of oscillation is F number
ll, Ft6. F22. F32. A fan-shaped minimum aperture aperture detection plate 306 centered on the axis 303 is used for selecting one of the aperture values of F45° and F64. This minimum aperture aperture detection plate 3
06 is the F number Fll, F16. F22. Fa2',,F45°F64
Six electrodes 308 are arranged in the circumferential direction of the detection plate so that the aperture value can be selected. The contact can be made selectively depending on the amount of movement.

At the same time, the minimum diameter aperture detection plate 306 has a common electrode 310 extending in its circumferential direction, and the brush 3-05
is always connected to the common electrode 310 regardless of its swinging position.
The electrode 308 is in sliding contact with the common electrode 310, and is configured to bridge between one of the electrodes 308 and the common electrode 310. Note that the common electrode 310 is a resistor. It is connected to the power supply Vcc through 314 and to the input end of an inverter 316, and is applied with timing pulses TB1 to TB5 through six electrodes 308Fi diodes 312, respectively.

In this configuration, the protrusion amount of the minimum diameter pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 is detected by the minimum diameter manual pin 97 on the body 4 side, and the brush 305 is According to the amount of movement of the aperture input pin 97, one of the six electrodes 308 is selected and electrically connected to the common electrode 310. Now, a diode 31 is connected to the electrode 3°o8 which is in contact with the brush 305.
If the corresponding timing pulse is not input through C2, the input terminal of the inverter 316 will be at a high level depending on the power supply Vcc, so its output will be at a low level, and a diode is connected to this electrode 308. When a corresponding timing pulse is input through 312, the input terminal of inverter 316 becomes low level, so its output becomes high level. That is, - the inverter 3
16, high level output is performed in synchronization with the timing pulse corresponding to the detected minimum aperture value, and the output of the inverter 316 is synchronized with the timing pulse.
By classifying based on the pulses TBI to TB6, the detected minimum 6-diameter aperture value is the F number Fu.

F16. F22. F32. F45. It is possible to detect which value of F64 the value corresponds to.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device can input the minimum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used, but in the following explanation, the output signal of the inverter 316 will be collectively referred to as AMAX. It is called AX'.

As is clear from the above explanation, the open aperture value data A of the photographic lens device using the set film sensitivity data Sv1
Vo J manual state/automatic state discrimination signal MNAL
Lens device aperture signal 5 PDW 1 Shutter speed TV
Alternatively, the setting data of the aperture value AV, the minimum aperture aperture detection signal AMAX of the photographing lens device using the aperture priority mode selection signal ASLC1, etc. are all taken in in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI-TB6.

That is, as shown in FIG. 20, the inverter 263 (first
2), data regarding film sensitivity SV is sequentially output from bit SV- having a weight of 1" to bit Sv having a weight of 4"8" in synchronization with timing pulses TB1 to TB6.

As mentioned above, the data regarding the film sensitivity Sv is converted. Also, inverter 2
79 (Fig. 14), the timing pulse 'f'T
In synchronization with T, the MNAL signal indicating that the aperture is selected on the lens device 2 side is output, and in synchronization with the timing pulse, the 5PDW signal indicating that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state is output. In addition, in synchronization with the timing pulses T83 to 7'rUg, the gray "1" code data AV o G C with respect to the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use has a weight of 100 bit A VO , a oo.The gray color regarding the open aperture value AVo of this lens device 2 to
The code data AVooc is later converted into binary code data AVo, as described above. Furthermore, the inverter 299 (FIG. 18) outputs a signal ASLC indicating the aperture priority mode in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1, and also outputs a signal ASLC in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. Data regarding the set shutter speed TV or aperture value AV is output.
The data outputted in synchronization with ``1'' has a weight of 100, the data outputted in synchronization with timing pulse TB3 has a weight of ``1'', and the data outputted in synchronization with timing pulse TB4. has a weight of 2”α and a timing pulse of 7”1
"The data output in synchronization with 100 has a weight of 4",
The data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6 has a weight of 8", but this is based on the fact that the aperture value AV is input as data with a single stage integration.On the other hand,
The shutter speed input from the common dial 34 is l”
Since it is set with precision, the shutter speed is "1".
The bit Tvl with a weight of
TV2 is the timing pulse TB3 with a weight of
Bit TV4 is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4 as data with a weight of 1", and bit TV8 with a weight of "8" is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4 as data with a weight of 2". TV16 is imported as data with a weight of 4 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS, and data with a weight of 8 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6. In other words, the data regarding the shutter speed TV is once multiplied by 100, and is set using the common dial 34 after being made to match the accuracy of the aperture value data as pre-accuracy data.

Therefore, the timing pulse TB from inverter 299
When handling the data output in synchronization with TB2 to TB6 as shutter speed TV, it is doubled and used.

Furthermore, from the inverter 316 (Fig. 19), when the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used is F, a lever is used to select the Fi.
l, F16. F22. F32. F45. A signal A MA X' indicating which one is F64 is output,
Depending on whether the output AMAX' of this inverter 316 is synchronized with the timing leg pulse 〒B+-TB6,
A minimum aperture value is determined.

The first illustrated camera device has other switch mechanisms for setting various operating conditions, one of which is a switch mechanism linked to the shutter release button 18. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21. When the shutter release button 18 is pressed, the switch S1 is closed, a high level output is made through the inverter 1, and the shutter is released.・It starts the necessary camera operations after release. Note that these movements are caused by the lifting of the reflex mirror,
This includes operations such as narrowing down the lens device 2 to a preset position, starting the second curtain run, and starting the run of the front curtain, focal plane, shutter curtain, etc. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 8W2, and its output signal will be referred to as SR.

Further, the selector lever 22 is interlocked with two switch i structures. This is a switch mechanism for the single AE lock, and this switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. Close and
No.1 level output is made through inverter ■1,
The photometric amount is held fixed based on this high level output. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AELK.
, its output signal is called AELK. The other one is a switch mechanism for self-timer setting,
This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. This...
Depending on the level output, the release button 1
After pressing 8, the shutter is released after a predetermined period of time, so-called self-timer photography is performed. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5S.
BLF.

The output signal is called 5ELF.

Further, the first illustrated camera device is also equipped with switches or mechanisms for determining various operating states. First, an AE charge detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not the AE lever 94 provided on the body 4 side is in the AE charge state. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG.
When in the E charge state, the switch S closes the circuit and outputs "1" from the inverter II. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5ABCG, and its output signal will be referred to as AECG.

Further, a winding completion/detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not winding of the film is completed.

This switch mechanism has a mechanism as shown in FIG. 21, and when the winding lever 14 completes charging of the springs for moving the mechanical parts necessary for film winding and shutter release, switch S1 is activated. The circuit is closed, and the inverter (1) is configured to output "1". Note that the switch S1 is a shutter
After the release, the required operations are performed in sequence, and the two-act running type
The trailing curtain of the focal plane shutter remains closed until it has finished traveling. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5WNUP, and its output signal will be referred to as WNUP signal.

Furthermore, a front curtain running detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether the front curtain of the focal plane shutter has started running. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 22, and when the front curtain starts running, switch S2, which had been closed until then, opens, and the previously made "1" output changes to "0". “It is configured to be an output. The output of this switch mechanism is used to time the shutter speed and control the travel start time of the trailing curtain.

In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5CT.
ST, and its output signal is called CTST.

In addition, as mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device is
A mechanism is provided for presetting the aperture for controlling the zoom device 2 from the body 4 side, and the outline of the operation of this mechanism has already been described in the explanation of FIG.

That is, in the state immediately before the shutter number release, A E
, the lever 94 is locked in the AE charge position, and the σ lever 84 for resetting the aperture on the lens device 2 side
is held at an open aperture preset position of the lens device 2. This locked state is released when the shutter is released, but due to the unlocking, the AE lever 94 releases its hold on the lever 84, which is biased toward the minimum aperture preset side. Start driving towards the preset side.

At the same time, by detecting the amount of movement of the lever 84 using pulse means, the preset number of nine aperture stages (this increases as the lever 84 moves) is determined by the moving lever 84. When the number of aperture stages for control matches, the lever 84 is stopped at a position traveled by the number of aperture stages for control by clamping the AE lever 94. Through the above operations, it is possible to reset the aperture of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, but what is shown in FIG. It is a mechanism for The AE lever 94 is integrated with an arm 318, and this arm 318 is rotatably held by a pin 324 on the arms 32, 2 which can swing about a shaft 320. This configuration allows the AE lever 94 to move in the direction of arrow a or -σ, and is lightly biased in the direction of arrow a by a spring (not shown). The lever 326 is pivotally supported by a shaft 327, and a portion of the lever 326 is connected to the arm 318 by a pin 328.
This lever 326 is rotatably connected to the
This is provided to obtain the number of pulses corresponding to the travel distance of the E lever 64. The lever 326 is equipped with a brush 330 at its tip, and the lever 326 has a brush 330 at its tip.
It swings about the shaft 327 in the direction of the arrow A or a in response to movement in the direction. The brush 330 is always in sliding contact with the fan-shaped pulse generating plate 322, a part of which is always in contact with a grounded common electrode 334, and the other part is a comb-shaped electrode 336 that protrudes in the radial direction of the sector. is facing. The comb-like electrodes 336/'i are electrically connected to each other and are connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 338 and to the input terminal of an inverter 340. In this state, when the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of arrow a or σ, the brush 330 slides into contact with the pulse generating plate 332 and moves in the direction of arrow a or a. At this time, the brush 330 moves while repeating contact and non-contact with the comb-shaped electrode 336, but when in contact, the inverter 3400 Å
The power end is pulled to the ground side and becomes a low level, and its output becomes a high level. When the one-way valve is in contact, the input end of the inverter 340 becomes a high level depending on the power supply Vcc, and its output becomes a low level.・It becomes the level. Therefore, if the AE lever 94 moves from the locked position in the AE charging state in the direction of the arrow σ according to the biasing force of the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side, the brush 330 will also move in the direction of the arrow a, and the inverter will move. From 340, a pulse signal corresponding to the travel distance of the AE bar 94 is obtained. Therefore, by counting the number of pulses of this pulse signal, the amount of travel of the AE lever 94, that is, the pre-cut position of the number of aperture stages by the lever 84 can be determined, and when the desired number of aperture stages is reached, By clamping the AE lever 94, the aperture can be preset using the lever 84 of the lens device 2.

Note that there is naturally a difference in one operation time between mechanical operating means such as the AE lever mechanism, clamp mechanism, etc. and electrical means for counting the output pulse signals of the inverter 340. Needless to say, this problem must be solved by mechanical or electrical correction based on empirical data.

Further, a pulse generating plate 33 having a configuration as shown in FIG.
Although the pulses obtained through a contact mechanism such as 2 are not necessarily shaped pulses whose waveforms are suitable for counting, they are shaped to some extent when inverted through the inverter 340. However, if necessary, further waveform shaping may be performed using a waveform shaping means.

Through the configuration described above, this camera system,
The aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset from the body side, and the clamping position of the lever for presetting the aperture is determined through digital means of counting the number of pulses. A high aperture shield reset is possible. In the following description, the pulse signal for detecting the position of the AE lever 94 including the output of the inverter 340 will be collectively referred to as FPC.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment automatically performs strobe photography when a strobe is inserted. Explain. In the same figure, 342
is an automatic flash unit that controls the amount of light emitted according to the reflected light from the subject.The elements for controlling the amount of light are film sensitivity information from the film sensitivity setting dial 106 and aperture setting dial 108. Aperture value information is used.

The configuration of the strobe unit 342 is well known, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the strobe unit 342 will not be described in detail.
In order for the unit 342 to emit flash light, a discharge capacitor (not shown) must be charged to a required voltage. As this capacitor is fully charged, this strobe unit 342 becomes capable of emitting light.
In order to inform the public of this fact, a signal indicating the completion of charging of the discharging capacitor is outputted through the signal line 344.

This signal is introduced into the current circuit 346, and at this time, the current circuit 346 selects a first current amount signal as a fully automatic charge completion signal and a second current amount signal as a semi-automatic charge completion signal, depending on the state of the changeover switch 146. The two current amount signals can be received from the control contact 140. Note that when the first current amount reaches the control terminal 54 or one control liquid point 140, the camera device detects this and automatically switches the camera to strobe photography mode.
Instead of analog information from a TTL photometry system (not shown) built into the body 4, the circuit switches to a circuit that converts analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data and takes in the analog information. As mentioned above, depending on the first current amount (fully automatic charging completion signal), when the camera device switches to strobe photography mode, whatever shutter speed is set on the body 4 side. However, when the camera device switches to strobe photography mode in response to the second current amount (semi-automatic charging completion signal), the body 4
Only when the shutter speed is set to 1/60th of a second or more on the side, the shutter speed will be automatically controlled to 1/60th of a second. - 10,000, the data terminal 56 sets the level directly connected to the aperture setting dial 108 by data related to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side from the data contact 142. This analog information is A-D converted, taken into the camera device as digital information, and used as data for aperture control.

When the camera device enters the system strobe photography mode by receiving a fully automatic or semi-automatic charging completion signal from the strobe side, when the shutter is released, the strobe unit is activated through the synchronization contact 52.138. 342
body) 4. A flash command synchronized with the shutter movement is given, and the strobe unit 342 automatically adjusts the light, while the camera device releases the shutter at a shutter speed of 1/60th of a second or less (in the case of semi-automatic mode). At the same time, aperture control is performed according to the aperture value set on the strobe side.

In the following explanation, the signal indicating the completion of fully automatic charging including the first current amount detected through the control terminal 54 will be referred to as the C8Al signal, and the signal indicating the completion of semi-automatic charging including the second amount of current will be referred to as the C8Al signal. The C8A2 signal and these two signals indicating the completion of charging are collectively referred to as the C8A signal. Also,
Data related to the fD value transmitted through the data terminal 56 is collectively referred to as a VSA signal.

As already mentioned, the camera system of this embodiment is equipped with an external photometer to enable a wider range of exposure control.
The operation of the external photometer will be described in detail with reference to the block diagram of the external photometer shown in FIG.

In FIG. 25, 35o is a reflected light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the reflected light from the subject without going through a photographic lens or the like. This external photometer 350 is equipped with a current circuit 352 into which a third current amount as an external photometry mode signal can flow from a terminal 54 on the camera device side through a contact 146, and this reflected light type photometer is attached. On the camera device side, when the control terminal 54 becomes able to flow current at the third current amount into the contact 146, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode, which is built into the body 4. In place of the analog information from the TTL photometry system (not shown), a circuit is selected that converts the analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data. At the same time, from the external photometer 350, object brightness information obtained as a result of photometry is provided from the data contact 148 to the data terminal 56 as analog information, but this analog information is A-D converted and converted into digital information. The data is imported into the camera device and used as data for exposure control.

Further, in FIG. 26, 354 is an incident light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the illuminance of the subject area. This external photometer 354, like the photometer shown in FIG. On the side of the camera device equipped with the incident light type photometer, when the current of the third current amount can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode, and the body In place of the analog information from the TTL photometry system (not shown) built into the data terminal 56, a circuit is selected which converts the analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data and inputs the analog information. At the same time, illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry is provided from the external photometer 354 to the data terminal 56 through the data contact 168 as analog information, but this analog information is A-D converted and sent to the camera device side as digital information. The data is captured and used as data for exposure control. At this time, the data qb loaded into the camera device is illuminance information measured using the incident light method.
No particular problem arises as long as the information is converted in advance into a form that can be treated equivalently to object brightness information measured using the reflected light method.

As is clear from the above explanation, external photometers can be treated equally whether they are of the reflected light type or the incident light type, but there are particular differences with respect to the incident light type. The point is that it is equipped with two functions.

That is, the incident light type photometer 354 performs photometry only while the photometry button /174 is pressed and sends the photometry data to the terminal 168''.
It is configured to output to . Therefore, the metering button 1
When 74 is not pressed and no photometric data is output to the terminal 168, it is preferable that the camera device be in the AE lock state. Accordingly, the metering button 174 is associated with a normally closed switch (not shown), which is connected to the contact 170. Through the AE lock terminal 58, the body 2″
It is connected in parallel with the built-in AE lock switch 5AELK.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment can be applied with a reflected light type or incident light type external photometer. The signal indicating the external photometry mode including the current amount of 3 is
These signals are collectively referred to as LM signals, and data related to the photometric quantity inputted through the data terminal 56 are converted into OB multiplied signals.

This OB double signal apex value is assumed to be equivalent to the subject brightness BY.

Through the detailed configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment receives various input data, setting data, and information regarding the operating state of setting conditions.

As is clear from the above explanation, the camera system of this embodiment takes in data necessary for exposure control and information regarding operating conditions and operating states through various means, and these input information will be explained below. Processed by a digital control system.

As previously explained, the camera system of this embodiment performs operation control that organically links the overall system, and
A digital control system is applied as a control system in order to simplify manufacturing adjustments with small size and high precision, and to make it possible to develop the most rational operation based on a large number of input information. .

An example of a digital control system applied to the camera system of the present invention will be described below. The system has not been deployed. The reason is that the camera equipment mechanism applied to this embodiment has an ideal configuration that is a huge leap forward from the concept of conventionally known camera mechanisms;
This is because the camera system of this embodiment also does not exceed this. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of a digital control system adopted in order for the camera device shown in FIG. 1 to satisfy the various performances mentioned above. A mechanism section 358- includes various mechanisms such as a shutter travel mechanism, a diaphragm mechanism, a mirror amplifier, a quick return mechanism, etc., a function for setting various numerical data or operating conditions, a function for determining the operating state of each mechanism, etc. divided into three large blocks. These three large blocks are the input control section 360 and the central control section 362.
, the output control cape 364 and each control section are connected by one bus line 366. The mechanism section 358 includes various exposure control mechanisms, various display mechanisms, etc., in addition to the information input section described above, that is, a photometry section, various data setting sections, various condition setting sections, various operating state determination sections, etc. Equipped with

The input control section 360 receives photometric analog data, various condition setting signals, and operation state determination signals from the mechanical section 358 through an input system 368. It is converted into digital information and transferred to central control unit 362 via input bus 2-in 370.

The central control section 362 receives various setting data, various condition setting signals, etc. from the mechanical section 358 through the input system 372, and here the data, signals, etc. are converted into an optimal form for information processing. Necessary arithmetic processing is added to the digital information from the input control section 360, and after the calculation is completed, the output bus is used as information necessary for controlling various exposure control mechanisms and various display mechanisms included in the mechanism section 358. The signal is transmitted to the output control section 364 through a line 374. On the other hand, the central control section 362
Throughout the life 376, timing signals for capturing various setting data and various condition setting signals and timing signals for dynamic driving of various display mechanisms are provided to the mechanism section 358.

The output control section 364 operates based on various condition setting signals and various operating state determination signals input from the mechanism section 358 and control information input from the central control section 3'62.
Control signals are given to various exposure control mechanisms of the mechanism section 358, and necessary information is displayed on various display mechanisms.

The functional configuration of the mechanical parts of the camera shown in FIG. 27 will be explained in more detail with reference to the schematic configuration diagram in FIG. 28.

This mechanical part 358 is involved in all operations related to input/output and control display of the camera device, including various setting switches or detection switches or measurement devices for input, various switches and lines for output, and control. Various types for
It is equipped with a power plunger, various display mechanisms, etc.

In the same figure, 378 is the previously explained TTL photometry means, and its output signal is logarithmically compressed through a means not shown, so that in the case of open metering, BVo2BV-AVo-AVc, and in the case of narrow-down metering, BVs = BY -AV -AV”c It will be output as an analog value equivalent to Apex.

The output analog signal of the TTL photometry means 378 is transferred to the A-D converter 382 through the signal switching circuit 380 of the input control section 360, converted to digital data, and then input into the system. Note that the signal switching circuit 3
80 is photometry means other than the TTL photometry photometer tear 378;
That is, it is provided to share the A-D converter 382 when converting analog data from the reflected light type photometer 350, incident light type photometer 354, and strobe device 384 into digital values. be.

A simple block diagram of the strobe device 384 is shown in FIG. 24. When this strobe device 384 is inserted into the camera device body 4, the data contact 1 of the strobe device 384
42, control contact 140. The synchronization contact 138 contacts each of the data terminal 56, control terminal 54, and synchronization contact 52 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4. In this state, when the power switch 132 (FIG. 5) of the strobe device 384 is turned on, data VSA regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is input from the data contact 142 through the data terminal 56, and the input control In this state, if the strobe device 384 has not completed charging for strobe light emission, the signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is not input, and therefore the data VSA is The input is regulated by the switching circuit 380.

When charging of the strobe device 384 is completed, the control terminal 54
Then, current can flow into the charging completion detection circuit 386 through the data contact 140 on the strobe device 384 side. That is, a signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is input from the strobe device 384 through the data contact 140 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal C8A is detected by the current detector 386 provided in the input control section 360. This will result in

When a current flows out from the control terminal 54, the current detector 386 supplies a control signal to the signal switching circuit 380 to switch the analog signal input from the terminal 56 in place of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378. A-D converter 3
82, and a function of detecting the magnitude of the current and determining the control signal included in the amount of current. Therefore, when the signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is input from the strobe device 384, the signal switching circuit 3
Since data 80 is inputted to the A-D converter 382, the data VSA related to the aperture value input as an analog value from the terminal 54 is converted into digital data and sent to the system. It will be incorporated into.

On the other hand, the current detector 386 detects the C8A signal and generates a charge completion signal CG to set the system to strobe photography mode.
The C8A is selectively given two levels of current by a charging completion detection circuit 346 that outputs UP and also has the function of switching the current amount of a charge completion signal into two levels using a changeover switch 146. According to the amount of current of the signal,
The current detector 386 determines whether this strobe photography mode is fully automatic or semi-automatic, and outputs a fully automatic signal FAT when it is fully automatic. Therefore,
Charge completion signal CGU which is the output of the current detector 386
Depending on the input of P and the presence or absence of the fully automatic signal FAT, the system enters fully automatic or semi-automatic strobe photography mode.

The light emission trigger of the strobe device 384 for strobe photography is performed by a synchro switch 388 provided on the mechanism part 358 side.
connected to. As is well known, in the case of a two-curtain running type focal plane shutter, this synchro switch 388 is turned on by a member 390 that detects that the front curtain has finished running.

This synchro switch 388 is attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4 to configure the camera system of this embodiment! It is also connected to the X contact 64, which is used to synchronize not only the attached strobe device 384 but also other general strobe or flash devices.

A simple block diagram of the reflection type photometer 350 is shown in FIG. The data terminal 56 and the control terminal 54 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of No. 4 are in contact with each other. At this time, from the control terminal 54 to the contact 14 on the photometer 350 side
6, current can flow into it. That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 350 through the contact 146 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the current provided in the input control section 360. It is detected by the detector 386. Therefore, a control signal is given from this current detector 386 to the signal switching circuit 380, and data indicating the amount of light measured is input as an analog value from the data terminal 56 instead of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378. The OB is input to the AD converter 382, and the data OB is converted into digital data and then taken into the system. Note that since this photometric amount data OB is not obtained by photometry through a photographing lens device, various corrections are unnecessary, and the obtained signal directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV. On the other hand, the current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount and outputs a control signal 'OLM to put the system into external photometry mode. The control signal OLM
Depending on the input, the system will perform various operations based on external photometric data.

A simple block diagram of the incident light type photometer 354 is shown in FIG.
Each of the 56 contacts 168, 166, and 170 connects to the data terminal 5 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4.
6. Contact with each of the control terminal 54 and the AE lock terminal 58. At this time, current can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166 on the photometer 354 side.

That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 354 through the contact 166 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the input control section 3.
It will be detected by the current detectors 38 and 6 provided at 60. Therefore, a control signal is given from this current detector 386 to the signal switching circuit 380, and the TTL photometry means 3
The data OB regarding the photometric amount input as an analog value from the data terminal 56 instead of the analog signal from 78 is A-.
It becomes possible to input to the D converter 382.

Note that this incident light type photometer 354 has a normally closed AE lock.
A switch 392 is provided, and when the coupler 156 is attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4, the contact 170 of the coupler 156 and the AE of the accessory shoe 50 are switched on.
The AE lock switch 39 through the lock terminal 58
2ρ;, In order to short-circuit the commonly used AE lock switch 5AELK included in this mechanism part 358, this camera equipment!
is in the AE lock state. This person's 80 switch 392 works in conjunction with the photometry button 174 for making the photometer 354 perform photometry, and is opened depending on the operation of this button, so photometry is performed on the photometer 354 side. Once started, the camera device is released from the AE lock state.

At this time, the photometer 354 outputs data OB related to the photometric amount as an analog value to the contact 168.
B is input from the data terminal 56 through the signal switching circuit 380 to the A/D converter 382, converted to digital data, and then input into the system.

Note that this photometric amount data OB is not obtained by photometry using the reflected light method, so it is data related to illuminance that is completely different from the subject brightness information BV. is exactly the same as the subject brightness information BV, so by appropriately adjusting the output analog value of the photometer 354, the obtained photometric amount data OB can be made to directly correspond to the subject brightness BV.On the other hand, the current The detector 386 discriminates the OLM signal from its current amount and outputs a control signal OLM to cause the system to enter the external optical mode.The input of the control signal OLM causes the system to operate based on external photometric data. (The various operations are exactly the same as when using a reflected light photometer.

In other words, with this camera system, regardless of whether you use a reflected light meter or an incident light meter as an external metering adapter, the system will work perfectly, except for the presence of AE lock and usability issues. It performs the same operation.

As is clear from the above description, the meaning of the output digital signal of the A-D converter 382 is determined by the output signals CGUP, FAT, and OLM from the current detector 386, and the system also The operation is changed to a desired mode of operation depending on the output of the detector 386. In the following explanation, the output digital signal of the A/D converter 382 will be collectively referred to as DD.

Note that this input control section 360 detects and takes in various conditions and operating states set in the mechanism section 358, and includes a winding completion detection switch 5AELK and a winding completion detection switch 5WNU having the same switch configuration as shown in FIG.
P, A through AE charge detection switch 5AECG
It receives the AELK signal for E-lock, the winding completion detection switch WNUP 1A E Lever 94, and the ABCG signal that indicates that the gear is in the Yage state.

By the way, the AE lock switch 5AELK is located on the selector lever 22 provided on the top of the body 4.

The switch 5WNUP is operated in conjunction with a mechanism K operated by the winding lever 14, and the switch AECG is operated in conjunction with a mechanism operated in conjunction with the AE lever 94.

The data and condition setting signals inputted to the input control section 360 as described above are sent to the central control section 360 via the input bus line/370 after being appropriately time-aligned.
will be forwarded to.

The central control section 362 takes in various setting data and setting conditions from the mechanism section 358. This central control section 362 outputs a timing pulse as shown in FIG. 13 through a timing line 394, and in synchronization with this timing pulse, data SVI regarding film sensitivity SV, photographing, and /z device. Open aperture value AVo
Data related to AVo (Gray Coat)''), signal MNAL indicating that the aperture of the photographing lens device is set on the lens device side, signal 5PDW indicating that the aperture of the photographing lens device is set. data regarding the aperture value AV or shutter speed TV, a signal ASLC indicating that this data relates to the aperture value AM, and a signal A indicating what the minimum aperture value υ of the photographic lens device is.
It incorporates MAX etc.

The various data, setting conditions, and other signals described above are taken in through the configurations shown in FIGS. 12 to 19, and the details are as already described.

In this central control section 362, various calculation controls are performed, and data signals for controlling each exposure control mechanism of the camera mechanism section 358 and data signals for display are outputted via an output bus line 374. 364.

This output control unit 364 controls the release control to start the operation of the camera device, the aperture control to control the aperture value of the lens device to a set or calculated aperture value, and the shutter speed to a set or calculated speed. It has the following control functions: shutter speed control, display control to display necessary information, and includes a shutter release means 396, an aperture control means 398, a shutter speed control means 400, and a digital display provided in the mechanism section 358. The means 402 outputs a control signal to the blinking display means 404. - This output control section 364 detects various setting conditions, operating conditions, and states of the forward bending mechanism section 358, and also takes in those signals, and has a switch configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 21. Self-timer set switch 5SELF,
Indicates that the self-timer 0 timer is set through the shutter release switch SW2 and the front curtain running start switch 5CTST, which has the same switch configuration as shown in Fig. 22.-i 5ELF signal, camera after shutter release Shutter release S for starting the operation
An R signal and a CTST signal indicating that the front curtain of the two-curtain running type focal plane shutter is running are applied.

Furthermore, through the configuration shown in FIG. 23, the output control section 364 also takes in an FPC signal obtained by pulse-converting the distance traveled by the AE lever 94 from the AE charge position.

The switch 5SELF is connected to the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the shutter release switch SW, 2 is connected to the shutter release button 18,
The switch 5CTST is a leading curtain running start detection member 406.
are linked to each other.

The mechanical part 358 of this camera device is a mechanical sequence control mechanism and an electric control mechanism using an electromagnetic solenoid. The control means 400 is a part related to electrical control.

The shutter release means 396 provides a trigger for starting the mechanical sequence of the camera device, and performs the required operation using an extremely small electromagnetic solenoid. The operation of the shutter release means 396 is controlled by the shutter release signal sR% input to the input control section 360, the self-timer set signal 5ELP, and the winding completion signal input to the output control section 364. It is closely related to signals such as WNUP.

In the mechanical sequence that starts running due to the operation of the shutter release means 396, the AE lever 94
This also includes the operation of moving the vehicle from the charging position. This A
As mentioned before, the E lever 94 moves from the charging position to
While traveling toward the discharge position, it has the function of roughly resetting the aperture value of the lens device 2 by being clamped at an appropriate position, and this clamp position is determined by the AE of the AE lever 94. The amount of travel is at the charge position or 4.

That is, as is clear from the explanation of FIG. 2, the amount of travel of the AE lever 94 from the A[charge position tf] corresponds to the preset value of the number of stages of the control section of the lens device 2; While detecting the traveling distance of the lever 94, when the detected amount reaches a value corresponding to the number of stages controlled by the control section, the AE
By clamping the lever 94 and holding the travel amount at that time, the aperture can be preset in the lens device 2.

During this operation, an EPC signal is input to the output control section in response to the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. This FPC signal is a pulse signal whose number corresponds to the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. Therefore, it is easy to count the FPC signal by using a counter or the like.
You can know the amount of travel.

The aperture 9 control means 398 is configured so that the amount of travel from the AE charge position of the AE reno <-94 is determined by the central control unit 362.
When the amount corresponds to the number of aperture control stages given from
It operates a mechanism for clamping the AE lever 94, and this also uses a small electromagnetic solenoid to perform the required operation.

The mechanical sequence started by the operation of the shutter release means 396 includes, in addition to the operation of moving the AH lever 94 from the charging position, the raising of the mirror and the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 to a preset aperture. This also includes operations such as starting the front curtain of a two-curtain running type focal brain shutter.

In general, shutter speed control using a two-curtain running focal plane shutter is performed by controlling the time from the start of the first curtain to the start of the second curtain. is no exception. That is, after the front curtain of the shutter starts running, time is measured while regulating the running of the rear curtain, and after the time corresponding to the shutter speed given from the central control unit 362 has elapsed, the rear curtain is started. The objective is to obtain the required shutter speed by starting the movement. Of course, this camera device relies on electrical means to measure time.

When the front curtain of the shutter starts running, the mechanism part 358
A signal CTST indicating this fact is output from. This C
The output control unit 364 receiving the TST signal, based on the shutter speed data given from the central control unit 362,
A shutter speed control means 400 is provided to measure time and start running the rear shutter curtain after the time corresponding to the shutter speed has elapsed, and this is also a small electromagnetic solenoid. The system is configured to perform the necessary operations using the .

As mentioned above, the shutter release means 3'9
6. Aperture control means 398, shutter speed control means 400
In this camera system, the electrical control system is directly involved in controlling exposure and occupies an extremely important position.

Note that even while the electrical control means is in operation, the mechanical sequence of the camera device itself continues to operate.
A mechanical control mechanism is involved in the quick return of the mirror after the shutter trailing curtain has finished running, the cancellation of the aperture drive of the lens device, and the like.

Another function of the output control section 346 is a display function that presents information necessary for photographing to the photographer. 1st
As mentioned above, the illustrated camera device is equipped with a display device inside the fine tick 3 that displays the data necessary for photographing, but this data display device is stored in the mechanical part 358 of the system. This data display device 402 receives information regarding data to be displayed from the output section 364, that is, a decode signal for display, and also receives information from the central control section 362. timing·
A timing signal for dynamic display driving is received through the line '7394. This dynamic display drive is a well-known display method that provides common display information that changes over time to all display units that make up the display, and selects the display unit based on a timing signal. This is a display method that displays desired data on a desired display unit depending on the drive, and is widely used because it has features such as a simplified circuit configuration and reduced power consumption. This dynamic display drive is particularly advantageous in cases such as camera devices where space is limited and a large capacity power source cannot be incorporated.

Additionally, an LED is provided on the top surface of the first illustrated camera device body 4.
However, the function of this LED switch 32 is also essential. Namely, one is a function that lights up during battery check to indicate that there is sufficient battery power remaining, and the other is a function that flashes when using the self-timer to take pictures. Depending on the situation, this function indicates that the self-timer is in operation. Also for this L E'D lamp 32, four control signals are seen from the output control section 364.

As mentioned above, the mechanism portion 358 is the input control section 3.
60. The central control unit 362 and the output control unit 364 are closely connected to photometric data, external input data, setting data, setting conditions, input conditions such as discrimination status, control and display of shutter release, aperture, shutter speed, etc. It's tied together.

Next is the motor drive device whose details are shown in FIG.
It is represented by 5. This motor drive device 405 is connected from its contact 210 to the switch 5WNUP through a contact 216 of the body 4. Said switch SWN
As mentioned before, UP is a camera device in which the shutter release is performed after the film winding is completed and the shutter remains in the OFF state until the rear curtain of the shutter finishes running. However, it is possible to obtain the WNUP signal which is at the no-i level during the above-mentioned period through the inverter. The motor drive device is controlled by receiving the WNUP signal before passing through the inverter. This WNUP signal is at a high level during a period other than the above-mentioned period in the camera's operation cycle, that is, from the end of the trailing curtain to the end of film winding. The device 405 drives a film winding motor based on this WNUP signal. That is, depending on this motor drive device, after the shutter release, the film winding operation starts immediately when the shutter trailing curtain finishes traveling, and the film winding operation stops when the film winding is completed. , there is no fear of malfunction, and rapid film winding is still possible.

As shown in FIG. 8, this motor drive device 405 is equipped with a shutter device f122o that can remotely release the shutter of the camera device. The device 220 is not particularly connected to the motor drive device 405 in terms of electrical circuitry. The operation button 228 provided on this shutter release device 220 is the shutter button 228 of the mechanism section 358.
It works in conjunction with the release ψ switch SW2 and switch R8W2°, which is connected in parallel in the circuit through contacts 212 and 218, and is functionally identical to the shutter release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4. be.

Now, the input control section 360, the central control section 362, and the output control section 364 share various functions as described above, but their operations are related by the bus line/366, and the functions are Together with section 358 they form a rational system.

The main operation of this system is to perform calculations based on external conditions (photometry data, etc.) according to data or conditions set by the photographer, derive control data necessary for exposure control, and use the control data The camera apparatus displays the necessary one from among them to notify the photographer and performs exposure control based on the control data.The operations of this camera apparatus in various modes will be outlined below.

Now, the data DD digitally converted and outputted to the A-D converter 382 of the input control unit 360 is photometry data BVO based on open photometry, and photometry data BVs based on stop-down photometry.
, aperture control data VSA1 from the strobe device 384
This corresponds to either of the external photometry data OR from the external photometry adapters 350 and 354, and these are the charging completion signal CGU that is output from the current detector 386.
P, the external photometry mode control signal OLM, and the stop-down signal 5PDW which is the output of the switch 286 linked to the stop-down lever 64, and the corresponding processing is performed.

Now, let's consider a case where the flash device 384 and the external photometry adapter 350, 354 are not attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4.
The camera device can adopt five shooting modes (excluding bulb shooting).

These five modes depend on the state of the mode selector 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the state of the aperture reduction lever 64 provided on the front surface of the body 4, and the state of the aperture setting ring of the device 2. Regarding the ability to select one of the following modes: AE shooting mode, shutter-priority tE shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, stop-down metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and stop-down metering aperture-priority AE shooting mode, see Chapter 11. As shown in the figure, especially when performing data arithmetic processing, the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is the same as the aperture priority or shutter priority AE shooting modes, so the calculation routine/
is roughly divided into four types.

Now, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the aperture priority side.
are respectively set at the positions where mark 12 is selected, the system enters the aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount BV regarding the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry.

As mentioned before, the maximum aperture value A V of the lens device 2
o and the curvature error AVc, and for the actual subject brightness data BY, BVo = BV -AV o -A
As shown in the previous equation (3), there is a relationship of Vc. 'On the other hand, on the machine part 358 side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity, data AVo regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2, aperture value AV desired by the photographer, etc. are set, and data regarding the bending error AVc are set. AVc
is also derived from the open aperture value data AVo.

Although the derivation of this bending error AVc will be described in detail later, it does not depend on any particular calculation, but is calculated by selecting the maximum aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 from among a plurality of preset bending error data.
It relies on a structure that selects and derives the one corresponding to o.

Prior to starting calculations for exposure control, in this camera system, the aperture value AV set using the dial 34 is greater than or equal to the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 in use, and less than or equal to the maximum aperture value AMAX. Compare and calculate the things in . If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AY set with the dial 34 is also smaller than the open aperture value A V o , the aperture value A V o is replaced as the set aperture value AV, and vice versa. If the aperture value AV set with the dial 34 is larger than the maximum aperture value AMAX, an operation is performed to replace the maximum aperture value AMAX as the set aperture value AV. Because the aperture value AV is set not on the lens device 2 side but on the dial 34 side, the set value may sometimes exceed the controllable range depending on the photographic lens device 2 used. In that case, the upper or lower limit of the aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2
This is to apply the value AV or AMAX as the aperture value AV for control.

Note that the TTL photometry means 3 provided in the mechanism portion 358
78 to the input control unit 360 through the A-D converter 382
The photometric data BVo input into the central control unit 36
2 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVo input as described above.

That is, BVo + SV = BV・+ 5V-AVo -A
Vc−・・−==・(81 calculations are performed, but this equation can be calculated from the above equation (2) as BVo+8V=EV −AVo−AVc−=・−・(
9). Next, the open aperture value data AVo and the bending error data AVc of the lens device 2 are added to the above calculation result.

That is, BVo +SV -1-AVo +AVc = EV-
=...-QO), and through the above calculations, the appropriate exposure amount EV for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

Note that this operation is a digital operation as mentioned above, but (8), f9L (JOI, if the operation register is overflowed due to the operation of the expression, the operation register's The maximum capacity is the result of the calculation.

Next, the next aperture value data AV set by the dial 34 is subtracted from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above, and the result is EV - AV - 'rv ・ ・ ・ ・ ・・・
(11) Shutter speed TV required to obtain proper exposure for the set aperture value AY
You can ask for

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is a force that is control data for satisfying the exposure amount EV of the αω formula for the set aperture value AV; sometimes this calculation result is There is a risk of exceeding the shutter speed limit given to the body 4 of the camera device, and in such a case,
There is a need to inform the photographer of this fact and prevent erroneous operation.

Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV determined as a result of calculation is less than or equal to the maximum shutter speed TMAX of the shutter mechanism incorporated in the body 4 of the camera device, and is greater than or equal to the minimum shutter speed "rMIN". Comparison operation is performed to determine whether

If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the shutter speed TV that has been reduced as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum shutter speed TMAX or minimum shutter speed TMIN, then the limit value TMAX or TMIN can be changed as a result of the calculation. Shutter speed TV for control is used instead of shutter speed TV, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this.

Next, the open aperture value data AV o of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control, and AV - AVo = AV s . . .
(12) The number of aperture stages AVs for aperture control is calculated. Please note that this camera system has aperture stop number A for aperture control.
The reason why the Vs control is performed is that the control mechanism for the photographing lens device 20 shown in FIG. 2 employs a stage number control mechanism.

Through the calculation operations described above, the set aperture value A
Based on V, the shutter speed TV and the number of control stages A Vs will be derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the 7 eye/dar 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a).
), the aperture υ set with the dial 34 as shown in (If)
A format is adopted in which the value and the shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation are displayed together. Incidentally, the format of this display is the same as previously explained.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but since the lens device 2 has its aperture setting ring 8 selecting w-22,
Preset control of the number of narrowing stages AVs is performed from the body 4 side.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
is not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stop number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 uses the aperture setting ring 8 to preset the aperture setting ring 8. The aperture will be narrowed down to the specified aperture position. Therefore, in this camera system, in such a case, the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, that is, the aperture value set by the dial 34' on the side of the body 4, is set as the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. By presetting the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side based on the aperture value, exposure control can be performed using the calculated shutter speed and the preset aperture value.

In addition, in such an aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the image shown in FIG. 10(a) - (If
As shown in f), in addition to the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the calculated shutter speed, an "M" character is displayed, and it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 according to the display. The fact that the photographer is made aware of this is the same as previously explained. Note that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have an aperture-priority character since the aperture value is first set using the dial 34. What is particularly interesting is that in this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the aperture value set by the lens device 2'''r nib reset setting or aperture tightening and the aperture value set by the dial 34 are always the same value. It should be noted that this camera device performs an aperture-priority AE shooting operation.

Now, when the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the aperture closing lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position where mark 12 is selected, the system changes the shutter speed. It becomes priority AE shooting mode.

At this time, the photometric amount, BVO, related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry includes the open aperture value AVO of the lens device 2 and the curvature error AVc, so it is different from the actual subject brightness data BV. So, BVo =BY-AVo-A
The relationship between Vc fx and ICIy is the same as previously mentioned. On the other hand, in the mechanism section 358, data regarding the film sensitivity Sv, data regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2 A Vo, and shutter speed desired by the photographer TV.
The data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is also derived from the initial open aperture constant data AVo, which is the same as in the case of the aperture be end.

Now, the TTL photometry means 37 provided in the mechanism part 358
The photometric data BVo input from 8 to the input control unit 360 through the A-D converter 382 is further input to the central control unit 362.
is introduced and the following calculation processing is performed.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVo taken in as described above.

Sochi BTo+5V=BV-)'-8V-AVo-AVc
This means that a naru-en K is performed, and this formula is as described above (
2) The fact that the equation is equivalent to BVO1SV2Ev-AvO-AvC is the same as in the case of Aya9 priority. Next, the open aperture value data AVo of the lens device 2 and the bending error data AVCt are added to the above calculation results f;
,. In other words, the calculation BVo+SV+AVo-1-AVc=Ev is performed, and through the above calculations, the appropriate exposure amount EV for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

As mentioned above, the operation with is a digital operation, but if the operation register flows due to the above series of operations Let this be the result of the calculation.

Next, the shutter speed data TV set using the dial 34 is subtracted from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above, and as is clear from equation (1), the result is EV-TV= AV・・・・・・・・・－・・・・・・
(13) Therefore, it is possible to find the aperture value AV necessary to obtain proper exposure for the set shutter speed TV.

Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount Ev calculated for the set shutter speed TV, but sometimes this calculation result is used in the lens device 2. There is a risk of exceeding the controllable aperture limit, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent mistakes. For that reason,
In this camera system, the aperture value AV obtained as a result of calculation is the maximum aperture value AMA that can be controlled by the lens device 2.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether the aperture value is less than or equal to X and greater than or equal to the minimum aperture value A V o. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AY obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, the limit value AMAX or A V o is used as the result of the calculation. In place of the obtained aperture value AV, the nine aperture value AY is used for control purposes, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Next, from the aperture value data AV for control, the maximum aperture value data AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted AV - AVo.
= AVs is performed, and the number of aperture reduction stages AVs for aperture control is calculated. The reason why this camera system performs aperture step number AVs control for aperture control is that the control mechanism of the photographing/zoosing device 2 shown in FIG. 2 employs a step number control mechanism. This is the same as I mentioned earlier.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the number of control aperture stages AVs based on the set shutter speed TV is derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a).
), the aperture value obtained as a result of calculation with the shutter speed set with the dial 34 is also displayed.The format of this display has already been explained. .

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after the shutter release, but the lens device 2 has its aperture setting ring set to 22, so the camera device controls the exposure after the shutter release. Preset control of the number of aperture stages AvS is performed from the side.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
Since this is selected, the number of aperture stages AVs from the body 4 side
Preset control is carried out at 0. Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
is not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture step number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 uses the aperture setting ring 8 to set the aperture. This will narrow it down to the position. Therefore, in this camera system, such a case is set as an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and the lens device is adjusted based on the aperture value displayed in the finder 13, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation. By presetting the aperture value using the aperture setting button 8 on the second side, it is possible to control exposure using the set shutter speed and the aperture value preset by the lens device 2. In the wide open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, an "M" character is displayed in the viewfinder 13 as shown in Fig. 10(a)-(1), and the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 is displayed. As previously explained, the photographer is informed that the settings must be made manually according to the display. Note that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have the character of giving priority to the shutter speed, since the shutter speed is first set using the dial 34.

Next, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture setting lever 64 is set to the aperture setting side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position where a specific aperture value is preset. When set, the system will be set to
At this time, the photometric amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry includes the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 and the bending error AVc' as elements, as described above. In this system,
Since there is no means for taking in the aperture value AV, it is impossible to determine the bending error, and therefore the bending error AVc' is ignored. Therefore, the photometric amount BVs is calculated as follows with respect to the actual subject brightness data BV: BVs = BV - AV
This relationship is as shown in the previous equation (5). On the other hand, on the mechanism portion 358 side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity is set.

TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism portion 358
The focused photometric data BVs inputted into the input control section 360 through the A/D converter 382 is further introduced into the central control section 362 and subjected to the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVs imported as described above. In other words, BVs + 5V=BY-AV+SV...
・・・Song ・・・・・・・・・・・・α荀 garu calculation is performed, but this formula is the above-mentioned (1), <2
) From the formula, BVs + SV = EV - AV = TV...
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・α
Through such calculation, the appropriate exposure Ev
It is possible to derive the shutter speed TV required to obtain .

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount BV of formula Q5) with respect to the aperture value AV of the lens device 2, but sometimes this calculation There is a possibility that the result will exceed the shutter speed limit given to the body of the camera device, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV calculated as a result of calculation is the maximum shutter speed T of the shutter mechanism built into the body 4 of the camera device.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether the shutter speed is less than or equal to MAX and greater than or equal to the minimum shutter speed TM-IN. If, as a result of the comparison calculation, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum shutter speed T'MAX and the minimum shutter speed TMIN, the limit value TMAX or TMIN is calculated as the result of the calculation. The shutter speed TVK is replaced by the shutter speed TV for control, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Incidentally, in the camera mode, the aperture value set using the dial 34 is completely ignored.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the shutter speed based on the aperture value of the photographing lens device 2 is derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (al.
(ITJ) The format of this display is the same as that already explained.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release 1. The shutter is controlled by the shutter speed TV on the body 4 side, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled by the aperture angle. The diaphragm is held at the manually set 8 aperture position.

Next, the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side (the aperture tightening lever 64 is set to the aperture tightening side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position where a specific aperture value is preset. At this time, the system enters the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.At this time, the photometric amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry is determined by the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 and the aperture value AV of the lens device 2. In this system, the aperture value A
Since there is no means to capture V, the bending error is ignored. As mentioned above, the photometric amount BVs has the relationship BVs=BV-AV with respect to the actual subject brightness data BV. On the other hand, on the mechanism part 358 side, data sV regarding film sensitivity and the photographer (7
) The desired shutter speed, TV, etc. are set.

The stop-down photometry data BVs input from the TTL photometry means 378 provided in the front mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 via the A-D converter 382 is further transmitted to the central control section 3.
62 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is calculated from the photometric data BVs input as described above.

In other words, BVS + 5V = BV - AV + SV
Note that s + 5V = EV - AV = TVK.Through this calculation, it is possible to derive the shutter speed TV required to obtain the appropriate exposure Ev.

It should be noted that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is calculation data for perfecting the exposure amount Ev with respect to the aperture value AV of the lens device 2. It is not necessarily the same as the shutter speed TV' for control set by the dial 34 of the camera device body 4.

, Therefore, if the photographer wants to achieve proper exposure E■,
Operate the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 to adjust the aperture so that the calculated data TV is equal to the set data TV', or change the data of the set shutter speed TV' to set the calculated data TV. It is necessary to adjust the shutter speed to make it equal to .

In this camera system, the calculation f obtained as a result of the calculation is
-ta TV K + K 1, - (1 at x2-).

A configuration is adopted in which a permissible error range is set, and a display in the finder 13 instructs the photographer to perform a manual operation such that the shutter speed TV' set by the dial 34 falls within the permissible error range.

The calculation operation will be explained below. First, a constant of 1 is added to the shutter speed data TV obtained as a result of the calculation. If the data TV10 obtained as a result of this addition overflows the capacity of the calculation register, the maximum capacity of this calculation register is set as the calculation result.

Next, the shutter speed data TV set from 1 to the data TV+ obtained as described above using the dial 34 is set.
If carry is found as a result of subtraction, this indicates that the set shutter speed data TV' is not within the allowable error range. It operates to give an instruction to reduce the amount of aperture, that is, to adjust the aperture to the open side or to reduce the setting data of the shutter speed data TV'. In addition, if no carry is obtained as a result of this subtraction, then the result of the subtraction TV 1 K 1- TV' is further reduced to a constant 2
Subtract TV0 to 1-TV'- to 2=TV-(K2
-Kl) -TV'・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
...obtains the result αe. As a result of this subtraction, if a carry amount is found, the set shutter speed data W' is considered to be within the tolerance range of 1 to 1 - (1 to K2 -) with respect to the calculated shutter speed TV, and the photographer If the player does not receive a carry,
This indicates that the set shutter speed TV' is not within the allowable error range, and in this camera system, the photographer is asked to increase the aperture of the seven-lens device 2, that is, adjust the aperture to a smaller aperture side. Or shutter speed data TV
It operates to give instructions such as increasing the setting data of '.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, it is determined whether or not the amount of aperture of the photographic lens device 2 that is apertured is appropriate or not, or conversely, the amount of aperture that is aperture of the photographic lens device 2 that is apertured with respect to the set shutter speed TV'. It will be determined whether the set jasciter speed W' is appropriate or not.

The photographer can check the result of the above discrimination in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time takes the format shown in (V) in Figure 10 (al).The format of this display has already been explained. As explained above, based on this display, the photographer can adjust the optimal combination of the shutter speed TV and the aperture amount of the lens device 2 to obtain proper exposure.

In this mode, the camera device controls its shutter on the body 4 side based on the shutter speed W' set by the photographer using the dial 34, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled by the photographer in the aperture state. Therefore, it is held at the manually set aperture position.

It should be noted that the display and manual operation by the photographer regarding this stop-down manual exposure adjustment photography have been described previously, so detailed explanations will be omitted here.

The above-mentioned modes of aperture priority AE shooting, shutter priority AE shooting, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting, aperture tightening aperture priority AE shooting, aperture tightening metering manual exposure adjustment shooting,
The camera system operates based on the amount of photometry obtained by the TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism section 358, but as mentioned earlier, this camera system can be applied with an external photometry adapter.

Next, the accessory shoe 5 of the camera device body 54
Consider the case where an external photometry adapter such as a reflected light photometer 350 or an incident light photometer 354 is attached to the camera.
(excluding pulp photography).

These three modes are aperture-priority AE shooting mode, shutter-priority AE shooting mode, and external You can select each mode of photometry, manual exposure adjustment, and shooting mode.

Each of the above modes will be explained below, but they are not essentially different from the case where TTL photometry hand-killing 378 is applied. However, the following points must be kept in mind at this time: 1. The photometric amount obtained when the external photometric adapter is applied is completely different from the photometric amount obtained through the TTL photometric means 378. This means that arithmetic operations will become necessary.

In other words, the photometric amount measured by the external photometer 350, 354 is the same even if the photometric method is based on the reflected light method.
Incident 1. Even if it is based on the optical method, it is given as data corresponding to the subject brightness BV. Therefore, since the photometric amount does not include elements related to the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used, the bending error AVc, etc., the subject brightness B
There is no need for the process of calculating V.

When shooting using this external metering adapter, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to mark 1.
2, the system enters the external metering aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time,
The photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is the subject brightness BV.
Since it is compatible with K, the calculation operations that follow are exactly the same as the aperture priority AE shooting mode described above, except that there is no need to add the maximum aperture value AVo or the curvature error AVc. be. However, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same in this case as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.
There is a passage shown in FIG. 10(a)-(Ill).

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stage number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture is set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. controlled by the specified value. This means that it is necessary to manually set the same aperture value on the lens device 2 as that set on the dial 34 of the body 4.

In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is in an open or stopped-down state. Therefore, in this camera system, the lens device 2
If the aperture setting ring 8 on the side does not select YARK 12, the lens device 2 is controlled to be open or close.

Based on the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, that is, the aperture value set using the dial 34 on the body 4 side, the aperture setting ring on the lens device 2 side By presetting or narrowing down the aperture value using step 8, it is possible to control exposure using the calculated shutter speed p and the preset or narrowing down aperture value. In addition, in this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the viewfinder 13 is exactly the same as in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
As shown in FIG. 10 (al-(I)), the aperture value set by the Daikiru 34, the calculated shutter speed, and the need to manually set the lens device 2 are displayed.
A display is made.

Also, when shooting using this external metering adapter,
When the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position that selects mark 12, the system gives priority to external photometry shutter speed. The mode becomes AE shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is
Since it directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV, there is no need to add the open aperture value AVo or the curvature error AVc. Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are exactly the same as in the shutter speed priority AE photography mode described above. Furthermore, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same as in the shutter speed priority AE photography mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (al-(+1)).

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If not selected, it is impossible to preset the number of aperture steps AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture is set to the aperture setting IJ4G8 of the lens device 2 side. Therefore, it is controlled to the set value.

This means that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value calculated on the basis of the shutter speed, photometric amount, etc. projected on the dial 34 on the lens device 2 side. In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is in an open or stopped-down state. Follow
In this camera system, if the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2% does not select mark 12, external metering manual exposure will be used regardless of the open or aperture state of the lens device 2. In the adjustment shooting mode, the aperture value is preset or adjusted by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, based on the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation. By setting the aperture, it is possible to control exposure using the set shutter speed and calculated aperture value. In addition, in this external photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the settings are made using the dial 34 as shown in FIG. "°M" indicates that it is necessary to manually set the shutter speed and calculated aperture value and the lens device 2.
A display is made.

Note that this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode also has an aperture-priority character or a shutter speed-priority mode, depending on whether the mode selector 38 is set to aperture priority or shutter speed priority. It can be divided into two types with different characteristics, but there is no essential difference between them. However, if the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture value preset or aperture set in the lens device 2 and the aperture value set by the dial 34 should always be the same value. To the extent possible,
The device of this camera is to perform aperture priority AE shooting operation.

As mentioned above, when taking pictures using an external metering adapter, the calculation routine is T
This is the same as in the case of photographing using the TL photometry means.

The explanatory diagram in FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between each shooting mode based on TTL photometry and external photometry and the corresponding calculation routine as explained above. Regarding the state of the aperture setting ring 8 of 2, the state of the aperture lever 64, and the differences in light metering methods, etc., the shooting modes adopted by this camera system and the 4.
．． It shows two calculation routines. Note that the lens device 2
As already explained, when the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8 and the aperture lever 64 is in the state where the aperture position of the lens device 2 is selected, the handling warning lock is activated as an erroneous operation. It is.

On the other hand, as previously mentioned, this camera system has the function of working closely with an auto-flash type strobe.
Let's consider a case where 4 is applied to photography. This strobe device 384 can be used as an accessory for the camera device body 4.
After the strobe device 384 is attached to the shoe 50 and electrically connected to the body 4, when the strobe device 384 is ready to emit light, that is, when charging for emitting light is completed, the camera device enters the strobe photography mode. Switching is possible.

At this time, as already explained, 16 shooting modes can be taken depending on how the conditions are set for the camera device and the strobe device. Operations are roughly divided into four routines.

These four calculation routines are selected as appropriate depending on the states of the aperture setting dial 108 and changeover switch 146 of the strobe device 384. In particular, each control routine The system determines the corresponding mode and operates it.In addition, the operation mode of this system depending on the settings of each part of the strobe device 384 and camera device is also described in the 11th part. As shown, the above four calculation routines are for fully automatic, automatic dimming, automatic mode, semi-automatic/auto dimming/auto mode, fully automatic/full flash/manual mode, and semi-automatic/full flash/manual mode. The operation of other modes also corresponds to each mode.
It is summarized in operations based on the calculation results of two calculation routines.

Now, in the case of fully automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode, the flash device 384 is in a state where it can automatically control light emission according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106. However, on the camera device side, analog signal data VI corresponding to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is stored.
A is applied, and at the same time, a charge completion signal C8A is applied. This charge completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current for fully automatic/semi-automatic mode, but as mentioned earlier, the fully automatic mode is when this charge completion signal C8A is used.
8A includes a control signal for the fully automatic mode, or the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to aperture priority.

The aperture value data input to the camera device side is converted into a digital value by an A-D converter 382 and then sent to the central control unit 3.
62, but the data regarding this aperture value VS
A is biased by a constant C3T2 with respect to the aperture value AV actually used for control. This is because the data VSA related to the aperture value is taken in as an analog value, and this analog value has a large number of stages, so there is a risk of incorrect input in the minute voltage range, so it is necessary to set the bias appropriately. This is because the digital conversion data DD is also larger than the actually used aperture value data AV by the amount corresponding to the aperture value data AV. -08T2=AV ・・・・・・・・・・・・
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .; The aperture value AV obtained in this way corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe device 384 side, but sometimes the result of this calculation is the limit of the aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2. In such cases, it is necessary to inform the photographer of this fact to prevent erroneous operation. For that reason,
In this camera system, a comparison calculation is made to determine whether the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side is less than the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2 and greater than or equal to the minimum aperture value AVo. As a result of the comparison calculation, if the aperture value AV exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, the limit value AMAX or tiAVo is changed to the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side. Instead, the aperture value AV is used for control, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Next, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographing V-lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control by subtracting AV - AV.

= AVs is performed and the number of aperture stages A for aperture control
Vs is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the fully automatic, automatic light control, and manual modes. However, in this mode, the data regarding the control aperture stage number AVs is not used for aperture control. The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the data on the display at this time or the As shown in (■) and (■) in Figure 10 (C1), the strobe synchronization speed TSYN, for example, the shutter speed of 1/60th of a second, and the charging of the strobe device 384 are completed and the strobe shooting mode is set. ``EF'' is displayed, and the aperture value AV used for control is displayed.

In addition, in the case of manual adjustment, it is necessary for the photographer to manually set the aperture value AV displayed in the finder 13 on the lens device 2 side, and therefore "M" is also displayed to indicate this. This is also shown in (4) of FIG. 10(C).

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, automatic light control/automatic mode, and the fully automatic/automatic light control/manual mode have already been explained previously. In the case of automatic light adjustment/automatic mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can automatically control light emission according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106.
On the other hand, the camera device side is provided with analog signal data VSA corresponding to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108, as well as a charging completion signal C8A. This charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic, but in semi-automatic mode, as explained earlier, this charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal for semi-automatic mode. Contains
This is also the case when the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to Sharada speed.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater. As a result of this comparison calculation, the shutter speed on the lower speed side is set as the shutter speed TV for control. Next, the aperture value data is transferred from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side and converted into digital data. Subtraction of constant C3T2 corresponding to bias from VSA VSA-C8T2=
Perform AV-c, derive control data AV regarding the aperture input from the strophoscope side. Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe device 384 side, but sometimes this calculation result is the aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2. It is possible to exceed the limit, and in such cases, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. For this purpose, this camera system uses a strobe device 384.
The aperture value AV set on the side must be less than or equal to the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2, and the minimum aperture value AVo
A comparison operation is performed to determine whether or not the value is greater than or equal to the value. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value AVo, the limit value AM
AX or AVo is used as the aperture value AM for control instead of the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this. be.

Next, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control by AV - AV.

Two AVs are performed, the number of aperture stages AV for aperture control.
s is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the semi-automatic, automatic light control, and manual modes. However, in this mode, data regarding the number of control aperture stages AVs is not used for aperture control.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (C).
Vl, as shown in (Vl), as a result of the previous comparison calculation, the selected shutter speed TV for control and charging of the strobe devices 3 and 84 have been completed and the camera is in strobe photography mode. ``EF'' is displayed to indicate this, and the aperture value AV used for control is displayed. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the aperture value A displayed in the finder 13
It is necessary for the photographer to manually set V on the lens device 2 side, and therefore, the "M" indicating this is also displayed as shown in Figure 10 (C) (also shown in Figure 10 (Vl+)). be.

The operations of the camera device and the strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic, automatic light control, and automatic modes, as well as in the semi-automatic, automatic light control, and manual mode, have already been explained previously.

Next, in the case of fully automatic/full flash/manual mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can fire at full power without specially setting the aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108; ．． Analog signal data VSA3 at a level indicating that no aperture value is set on the aperture setting dial 108 is given and viewed, and a charging completion signal C8 is generated.
A is given. This charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic, but as mentioned earlier, the fully automatic mode is set in this charging completion signal C8A. This is a case where a control signal is included or the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to aperture.

Note that the data VSA input to the camera device side is an analog data that overflows as a result of A-D conversion at the A-D converter 382, in order to indicate that no aperture value has been set on the strobe side. amount is set. Therefore, when the A-D converter 382 overflows in strobe photography mode, this is received by the camera device as a signal indicating full flash mode, and at this time, the body 4 side of the camera device Preset control of the aperture of the lens device 2 is not performed.

Therefore, in such a case, it is necessary to manually preset the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Such a control routine is carried out in exactly the same way in the fully automatic/full-power emission/minimum aperture mode.

However, in this mode, since the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side,
The lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position, and its aperture is eventually controlled to the minimum aperture.

- The photographer can check the state of the mode set by the above-described discrimination operation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is (r) '+ in Figure 10-(d).
As shown in (i), strobe synchronization speed TSY
N, for example, a shutter speed of 1/60 second, and "BF" indicating that the strobe device 384 has been fully charged and is in strobe photography mode are displayed. In addition, in the case of manual mode, "M" is displayed to indicate that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2, as shown in (Ill) in Figure 10(d). However, in the case of the minimum aperture mode, the twill of the lens device 2 is not set. No information about aperture is displayed.

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, full flash, manual mode, and the fully automatic, full flash, minimum aperture mode have already been explained previously, so we will not discuss them in more detail. No explanation will be provided.

Next, in the case of semi-automatic, full flash, and manual modes, the strobe device 384 does not need to set a special aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108, and instead relies on setting the single mode display 110 to emit light at a low volume. On the other hand, on the camera device side, analog signal data VSA at a level indicating that no aperture value is set on the aperture setting dial 108 is provided, and a charging completion signal C8A is also provided. This charging completion signal cSA includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to full automatic mode and semi-automatic mode.As explained earlier, semi-automatic mode control is applied to this charging completion signal O8A. This is a case where a signal is included and the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to shutter speed.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater. As a result of this comparison calculation, one of the lower shutter speeds is set as the shutter speed TV for control.

Next, the data VSA imported from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side indicates that no aperture value has been set on the strobe side, as a result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382.・The analog amount is set so that it flows. Therefore, when the A-D converter 382 overflows in strobe photography mode, this is taken into the camera device as a signal indicating full flash mode, and at this time, the lens is Aperture preset control of device 2 is not performed.

Therefore, in such a case, it is necessary to manually preset and sort using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.
Incidentally, such a control routine is performed in exactly the same manner in the semi-automatic, full-power emission, and minimum aperture modes. However, in this mode, the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, so the lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position. As a result, the aperture will be controlled to the minimum aperture.

The photographer can check the state of the mode set by the above-mentioned discrimination operation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is as shown in Fig. 10 (dl-(Vl
jJ shown in l, the shutter speed W for control selected as a result of the previous comparison calculation, and the strobe device 384.
``EF'' will be displayed to indicate that charging has been completed and the camera is in strobe photography mode. In addition, in the case of manual mode, "M" is displayed to indicate that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2, as shown in (II) in FIG. 10(d). ), in the case of the minimum aperture mode, the aperture 9 of the lens device 2 is not set. As shown in the figure below, no information regarding the choking is displayed.

Note that the operations of the camera device and the strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic/full-power flash/manual mode and the semi-automatic/full-power flash/minimum aperture mode have already been described, and therefore will not be described in further detail.

In addition, in the strobe photography mode, if the shutter speed is selected on the body 4 side of the camera device, the control related to fully automatic or semi-automatic in each strobe photography mode described above, that is, the automatic control regarding the shutter speed. Pulp photography becomes possible with priority given to speed determination control.

Therefore, in the pulp strobe photography mode, no special calculation is performed, and the same calculation control as in each strobe photography mode described above is performed only to control the aperture of the photographic lens device. It happens.

Therefore, in this camera system, there are 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on photometry results, 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on strobe photography, and a total of 8 general calculation control routines. Various photographic modes are realized by irregularly applying these eight general calculation and control routines.

This camera system, which includes the calculation routines described above, takes in setting input data, setting conditions, and operating conditions, and performs calculations and controls each mechanism based on comprehensive judgment, and is applicable to such a system. The control system that will be used will need to be arranged efficiently based on rational considerations.

In other words, with the eight calculation routines mentioned above as the core of the system, data input from the outside is automatically determined and input into the system in response to the various shooting modes desired by the photographer. Detects erroneous settings or erroneous operations associated with various mechanical limitations of the mechanism, notifies the photographer of this, and displays information necessary for various types of photography,
There is a need to realize a control system that makes it possible to set effective control signals and control sequences for the mechanical operation of a camera mechanism.

From this point of view, a control circuit as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 30 was constructed.
64 is shown more specifically.

This system is basically controlled by clock pulses CP, and for this purpose a clock pulse generator 542 is provided in the central control section 362. Although the clock pulse generator 542 is distributed throughout the system, the clock pulse generator 542 can be specifically realized through a configuration as shown in FIG. The clock period of this clock pulse CP is extremely important for measuring real time, which will be explained later, and needs to be sufficiently adjusted and set by the 31st variable pressure resistor 542A.

This clock pulse CP is introduced into a system pulse generator 544, which generates the 32nd clock pulse based on the clock pulse CP.
A system pulse is generated as shown in the figure. The system pulses consist of counter pulses CT1 to OT4 and timing pulses TBO° to TB7, etc., and various operations of this camera system are performed based on the system pulses. Note that in this system, the period between timing pulses TB 0 to TB 7 is one word time.

The specific configuration of this system pulse generator 544 is shown in FIG. 33, and in order to generate counter pulses (1!TI, OT2.
029 (manufactured by ROA) is used as a binary up counter, and the timing pulse T
CD4028 (RC!) to generate BO~TB7.
Accumulation of products made by A).

A decoder using circuit elements is used.

The integrated circuit element 0D4029, whose detailed circuit diagram is shown in FIG. 34, is functionally an up/down counter; It is used as a binary up counter that operates as follows. With this configuration, by inputting the clock pulse CP to the clock pulse terminal CLK, the counter pulses CT1 to CT4 as shown in FIG.
It is possible to obtain each of them.

Further, the integrated circuit element CD4028, whose detailed d-thic diagram is shown in FIG. 35, functionally constitutes a binary value decoder. This system relies on inputting the counter pulses OTI, OT2 and OT4 to the A to C terminals of this element, and the timing pulses TBO to TB7 as shown in FIG. 32 are input from the d terminals QO to Q7. It is something that can be obtained.

TB to the timing pulse TB obtained as described above.
6 is applied to a driver circuit 546, which outputs timing pulses TBI to TB6. These timing pulses TBI to TB6 are given to the display means 402 through the timing line 394 as digit pulses for dynamically driving the digital display means 402, and are also applied to the film sensitivity input mechanism 518, the aperture value/MNAL, and The 8PDW signal is applied to the setting input mechanism 52-2, the AV/TV and ASLO setting mechanism 528, and the maximum aperture setting mechanism 536 as a timing pulse for data acquisition through the timing line 394.

Here, the film sensitivity input mechanism 518 has a configuration as shown in FIG. 12, and the film sensitivity Sv' can be sequentially extracted from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.

The details of this are already mentioned in Section 9. The data S■ relating to the film sensitivity is input by approximating the data set at 1/3/amateur degree to 1/8 step fine amateur. That is, from the initial film sensitivity input mechanism 518, for one level of weight, a bit with 14 levels of weight is input,
It has already been mentioned that data Sv' relating to the film sensitivity is input into the camera system by setting "l" in the bits having the weights of the b-stages for the three-stage weights. However, as it is, it will not be approximation data of 3 degrees, so the data Sv' regarding the film sensitivity, which is captured by setting "1" in the pit corresponding to the weight of 2 steps or 4 steps, is unconditionally It has already been mentioned that it is necessary to input into the camera system as data approximated with #)/8 stage accuracy by setting "1" in the pit corresponding to the weight of h stage. This is just an approximation of equations (6) and (71) as is.

Here, the role of setting "1" to the bit with the h level weight of the data S■' regarding the film sensitivity S■ and converting it to the desired film sensitivity data S■ of the h amateur level is as follows.
This is a set circuit 520. This set circuit 520 receives data Sv' regarding film sensitivity, which is input sequentially from the lower digits in advance of the timing pulses TBI to TB6.
A bit input in synchronization with TBl, or a bit with a weight l, TB2.
If 1" is detected in a pit input in synchronization with
It is possible to obtain h amateur film sensitivity data Sv synchronized with BO to TB6.

The detailed circuit diagram of the set circuit 520 is shown in FIG. 36, and as is clear from the figure, in synchronization with the evening timing pulses TBI to TB6,
The lower two digits of the film sensitivity data S■' input sequentially from the lower digits, that is, 1/
(or game) that "1" is set in a pit with a weight of 4 or a bit with a 4-stage 0 weight synchronized with TB2.
Timing pulse signal TBI input through ORI
Or, by detecting it through the AND gate AND1 by TB2 and using the output of ANDI as the input signal of the J input terminal of the 7-lip flop F1, 1 of the input data S It detects that a "1" stands on a step or a pit having the weight of one step and stores it.0 At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F1 is "1". ′″
The output is the first timing pulse TB of the next word time.
It is read out through the AND gate AND2 in synchronization with O. The output of this AND gate AND2 is
h of film sensitivity data S■ through OR, 2
Since it is output as a stage weight bit in synchronization with the timing pulse TBO, the film sensitivity S
v is 1 synchronized with timing pulse TBO to TB6
It will be disbursed as 4-level precision data.

In the following description, the output (2) of OR2 will be referred to as film sensitivity setting data DTSV.

Further, the open aperture value/MNAL, 5PDW setting mechanism 522 has a configuration as shown in FIG. Then, data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 can be sequentially extracted from the 5PDW signal in synchronization with the timing nozzles TB3 to TB-6, starting from the most significant digits. The details of this are the same as previously mentioned.

The open aperture value data AVo is the data AVo (gray code) corresponding to the gray V-code, which is the open aperture value MN.
It has already been mentioned that the AL, 5 PDW setting mechanism 522 inputs sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, but among the information input from the setting mechanism 522, MNAL Signals and 5P
Since the DW signal is also included, the maximum aperture value AV can be determined from this.
It is necessary to separate only the data AVo (Gray code) regarding o. The signal separation circuit 524 serves as the key to this purpose. This signal separation circuit 524 receives data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo that is input in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6.
The data AVo (
Gray code) is the following Gray code binary -
Open aperture value data AV through code converter 526.

is converted to As already mentioned above, it is necessary to set the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used in accordance with the Gray code. It has a configuration based on a similar principle, and the data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6, is a binary -
・Converted to code, timing pulse JB2 to T
It is possible to obtain amateur level data AVo synchronized with the BS.

The detailed circuit diagram of the signal separation circuit 524 and the Gray code/binary code converter 526 is shown in FIG. 37, and as is clear from the same figure, the timing noise ζ ~Data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with TB6, is input to the NOR gate N0R1, which receives the timing nodes TBI' and TB2.
Depending on the AND3 that receives the output of
It is separated from the MNAL signal, 5PI)W signal, etc., and is a 4-bit parallel input parallel output shift register CD4.
035 (manufactured by ROA) directly to the J terminal and to the K terminal through the inverter INVI.

This integrated circuit element CD4035 has a detailed logic circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 38, and the logic configuration of the transmission gate shown in the figure is shown in FIG. 39.

This CD40.35 is configured so that it operates as a serial shift register when "0" is input to its P/s terminal, and operates as a parallel shift register when "11" is input to its P/s terminal. This S terminal receives the timing pulse TB2 at the J input terminal, and the timing pulse TB2 is received at the J input terminal.
The pulse TB6 is received at the input terminal of the Σ flip-flop F.
2 Q output is input. That is, this flip-flop F2 is set in synchronization with the rising of the clock pulse CP following the rising of the timing pulse TB2, that is, with the rising of TB3, and when TB6 rises, the next clock pulse CP rises. A TB that is reset in synchronization with the rising edge of CP, that is, the falling edge of TB6, and into which data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo is input.
3 to TB6, a "0" input is applied to one terminal of the 0D4035 to operate the 0D4035 as a serial shift register.

Now, while the integrated circuit element CD4035 is operating as a direct type shift register, if serial data of gray coats 8 which are mutually inverted are sequentially input to the terminal J' from the upper digits, that is, This is nothing special J
This corresponds to inputting the same serial data to the terminals of , but the Gray code serial data is converted to binary code serial data and stored. This operation is performed while the timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are being generated to which data AVo (gray code) regarding the nine values of open aperture AVo are input.

After the above operation, when the timing of timing pulse TB7 is reached, flip-flop F2 is reset and its mutual output becomes "1", so C! which receives this silkworm output at terminal 5! The D4035 will operate as a parallel shift register, and this CD4035 will operate as a parallel shift register.
Since the output is given to D2 human power, Q2 output is given to D1 human power, and Q1 output is given to Do large input, this CD40/35
is, while the i'' input is given to one terminal, that is, TB
It will operate as a register in series between TB7 and TB2. At this time, from the QO terminal, the open aperture value data AVo, which is binary-converted and stored in this register from the upper digits, is sequentially sent to the timing pulse TB from the lower digits.
It will be output in synchronization with 7~TB2. This data AVo is taken out through AND4, which receives the Q output of flip-flop F2 which is in the reset state between timing pulses TB7 and TB2. The correspondence between the weight and the timing pulse is different from other data.

Therefore, after providing a delay time of 3 bits through flip-flops F3 to F5,
From the Q output terminal of 5, timing pulses TB2 to T
It will be extracted as data synchronized with B6. In this way, the open aperture value AVo is extracted as η-adjustment data synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

In the following explanation, the Q output (2) of the clip/frog F5 will be referred to as open aperture value data DTAO.

The aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used as described above has a close relationship with the curvature error AVc during aperture metering, and calculations for exposure control using aperture metering are required. When doing so, it is necessary to take this bending error AVc into consideration. This bending error AVc is the maximum aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 used.

However, in the system of this embodiment, the open aperture value AvO that is considered to be input is
For each of the above, the corresponding music error data AV
c is prepared in advance, and bending error data AVc corresponding to the input aperture value AVo is selected and imported. Such bending error data AVc is stored in the fixed data ROM 528, is selected as appropriate in accordance with the input aperture value AVo, and is sequentially output from the lower digits as h-adjustment data synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB3. It is something that will be done.

The detailed configuration for capturing the curvature error as described above is shown in FIG.
The data from each terminal of 35 QO-Q3 is sent to the decoder O.
It is decoded by D4028, and any one of the outputs Q2 to Q9 of this decoder is output as "1". The output of the decoder is given to a ROM which stores a plurality of curvature errors AVc in advance, and 4-bit cursor error data AV written in the address corresponding to the decoder output.
Output c. The output of this ROM is applied to each D1, D2, D3, and D4 input terminal of the timing buffer OD4042. This timing buffer OD404
Reference numeral 2 denotes an integrated circuit element manufactured by RCA, a block diagram of which is shown in FIG. This timing seventh sofa has Vcc applied to its Pol terminal, and therefore has the function of capturing the output of the ROM at timing TB7 and storing and outputting it at timings other than T'B7. is the register OD 40
35 converts the open aperture value AVo into binary and completes the capture at the rising edge of TB7. At this point, Qo, Ql, Q of register CD 4035
2. Since it is the binary-converted open aperture value AVo that begins to be output in parallel from the Q3 terminal, the bending error AVc corresponding to the open aperture value AVo to which the output of the ROM is input is This is done at the timing of TB7, therefore, by taking in the output at this time at the timing of Th7, the necessary bending error AVc is obtained.As described above, the timing buffer OD 40
The music error data AVc stored in 42 are QO, Ql,
Q2. X of the integrated circuit element MC14539 (manufactured by Motorola) that is output from the Q3 terminal and then converted to serial data.
The signals are input to the O, Xi, and X2 and X3 terminals, respectively. The block diagram of this integrated circuit element MC14539 is shown in FIG. 41, the truth table is shown in FIG. 42, and the specific logic diagram is shown in FIG. 43.
X2. The curve error data AVc inputted in parallel through the X3 terminal is input to the counter pulses CTI, OT2 . Based on OT4,
It is output from the Z terminal as serial data synchronized with timing structures TB0-TB3. In this way, the bending error AVc is expressed as h-level data synchronized with the timing pulses TBO to TB3 in the integrated circuit element MC14.
It will be taken out from the Z terminal of 539.

In the following description, the integrated circuit element MC1
The Z terminal output of the 4539 is expressed as the error data DTA (
:! It is called.

The TV-AV-A SLO setting mechanism 528 has a configuration as shown in FIG. Diamond 34 in sync with
The set shutter speed TV or aperture value AV can be extracted depending on the settings. The details have already been described.

shutter speed 1iTV set by dial 34;
Aperture iAV etc. (7) 7”-Evening is AV-TV-A8
Timing pulse TB2 through LC setting mechanism 528
As mentioned before, the data from the setting device 528 corresponds to the shutter speed TV or the aperture value AV. However, whether this data is captured as shutter speed TV or aperture value depends on the aperture setting signal that is captured in synchronization with the TBI timing pulse. It is determined based on ASLO. It should be noted that the data is the same as the aperture setting signal ASLC and the AV-TV.
-A8 The signal is received from the LC setting mechanism 528, and the signal separation circuit separates the data received from the output signal of the setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. It is 532. The signal amount.

The data separated by the separate circuit 532 can be used as is as the data AV related to the aperture value, but in order to use this data as data related to the shutter speed TV, as mentioned above, 2 need to be doubled. This is because the minimum unit for setting the aperture value AV using the □ dial 34 is 1 or 7 steps, whereas the minimum unit for the shutter speed TV set through the common dial 34 is 1 step. The shutter speed TV is multiplied by i and set after matching the minimum unit of data with the aperture value AV, and when this data is later used as the shutter speed, it is multiplied by two. A doubling circuit 530 is used to achieve this purpose, and data is output as data TV regarding the shutter speed through the doubling circuit 530. Note that the action of this doubling circuit 5300 is such that data input in synchronization with timing pulses TB2 to TB6 is outputted as data synchronized with timing pulses TB3 to TB7. The point is that it gives a delay.

As described above, the data TV regarding the set shutter speed is inputted as data with one precision in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB7.
Further, the data AV regarding the set aperture value is inputted as data on the b amateur degree in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

A specific circuit diagram of the signal separation circuit 532 and the doubling circuit 530 described above is shown in FIG.
,AV=ASLC! The output of the setting mechanism 528 is an AND gate AND4 to which the timing pulse TBI is input through the inverter INV2, and only the signals related to TV and AVK, which are the same as the timing pulses TB2 to TB6, are separated. Separating in this way can be left as is, but in order to obtain data related to the shutter speed, delay it by one clock time using flip-flop F6.
The data is taken out as one-precision data in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB7.

In the following explanation, the AND gate AN
, the output of D4 is referred to as the aperture setting data DTAV,
The Q output (2) of the flip-flop F6 is referred to as shutter speed setting data DTTV.

Further, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 has a configuration as shown in FIG.
In synchronization with T'B6, data regarding the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 in use, AMAX', can be taken out, and this has already been described.

The maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 does not generate the maximum aperture value data AMAX by itself, but selectively outputs the maximum aperture value data AMAX stored in the fixed data ROM 534. That is, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536
As shown in FIG. 20, the data AMAX' input in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 to TB6 correspond to the respective numbers F11 .
F16. F22. F32. Timing pulses TBI to TB6 correspond to each of F45° and F64, so the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 outputs the data in series and in parallel, and after introducing and accumulating data in the register 538 in series, If we look at which bit of 538 outputs "1'", we can see that the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used is FIL, F16°F22. F32
．． F45. It becomes clear which one is F64. Therefore, the parallel output of the register 538 is transferred to the fixed data ROM 5.
34, and when a signal specifying the maximum aperture value AMAX is inputted to the fixed data ROM 534 from an instruction ROM 504 (described later), the maximum aperture value AMAX specified by the register 538 is output.

The specific configuration for deriving the maximum aperture value AMAX from the fixed data ROM 534 will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, the timing pulse TBI is output from the opening aperture value/MNAL-SPI)W setting mechanism 522.

MNAL signal and 5PDW input in synchronization with TB2
The signal is introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548 and the timing
Both signals are separated based on the pulses and then stored.

As a result, from the condition/signal storage circuit 548, the MNA
It is possible to obtain L to MNAL signals and 5PDW to 5PDW signals.

The detailed configuration of the signal storage circuit 548 is shown in FIG. 45 under the above conditions. Among the 8 PDW signals, the MNA L signal is the timing pulse T]32
The 5PDW signal is detected and stored by the flip-flop FIO which takes the clock input as clock input, and the 5PDW signal is also detected and stored by the flip clock °F11 which takes the 9min pulse TB3 as the clock input.

As a result, the MNAL signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop FIO, the MNAL signal is output from the Q output terminal, the 5PDW signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop FIL, and the 5PDW signal is output from the output terminal of the flip-flop FIO. Eight PDW signals will be output respectively.

Also, the ASLO input from the TV/AV/ASLO setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI
The signals are introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548 where they are separated and stored based on the timing signal.
An ASLO signal can be obtained from the condition signal storage circuit 548.

The details are also shown in FIG. 45, and TV/AV, A8LC! The ksLc signal input from the setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI is detected and stored by the flip-flop F9 which uses the timing pulse TB2 as a clock input, and therefore The A8LO signal is output from the Q output terminal of F9, and the ASLC signal is output from the Q output terminal.

On the other hand, the condition signal storage circuit 548 takes in the data separated by the signal separation circuit 532 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6, but this is because the pulse mode is selected by the dial 34. This is to determine this when the situation arises. That is, in this system, the pulp mode is when all the pits of the data set by the dial 34 are "0", and therefore only the #Q +T times signal is input between the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. If this occurs, the pulp mode is determined by detecting this fact.

That is, the condition signal storage circuit 548 has the function of detecting and storing when there is no "1" output from the output end of the signal discriminating circuit 532 during the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

This storage signal is output from the condition signal storage path 548 as a BLB signal or converse penalty 1 signal indicating that the shutter speed is in pulp mode.

The details of this are also shown in FIG. 45, and the data input from the TV, AV-ASLC setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6 is input to the timing pulse TBI through the inverter INV3. After removing the ASLO signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBI by AND5, the ASLO signal is input to the J input terminal of the flip-flop F7. Flip to this J- Flop F7
has a clock pulse CP input as its clock input, and a timing pulse T at its input terminal.
BI is input. The Q output of this flip-flop F7 is further applied to the input terminal of another J-flip-flop F8, and its output is applied to the J input terminal.

Note that the clock pulse TBO is input as the clock input of the flip-flop 7'F8 to the above J-. With this configuration, the evening timing pulse TBI is input to the input terminal of the flip-flop F7. At that point, flip-flop F7 is temporarily placed in a reset state in synchronization with the rising edge of the next clock pulse CP. At this time, if there is even one "1" output from the AND gate AND5 between the timing pulses TBI to TB6, this flip-flop F7 becomes set and its Q output becomes "1". . This “1” output is free.
□ Since it becomes a terminal input to the flip-flop F8, even if TBO is input as the clock input of this flip-flop F8, since the flip-flop F8 is in the reset state, its Q output is held at “O”. On the other hand, and
Goo) AND5 to timing pulse TBI~TB6
If there is no "1" output during this period, this flip-flop F7 holds the reset state and its Q output also remains at "1".
Since it becomes the J terminal input of the flip-flop F8, when TBO is input as the clock input of the flip-flop F8, the flip-flop F8 is set and its Q output is held at "1". This state is “and goo”
If even one output is "1" from TB2 to TB6 from AND5, it will be resolved at the time of the next TBO. As described above, the flip-flop F
The BLB signal will be output from the Q output terminal of No. 8, and the BLB signal will be output from the retraction blade terminal.

Through the above-described configuration, the condition signal storage circuit 548 outputs the MNAL signal according to the condition of various conditions in the mechanism section 358.

A signal will be output.

On the other hand, various data, condition setting signals, state determination signals, etc. are also input from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360.

The analog output of the TTL photometry means 378-75 or the analog signal input from the terminal 56 is the current detector 38.
A signal switching circuit 36 controlled by a signal switching circuit 36.6. -, o are selectively input to the A-D ff1l converter, which is connected to the reference level generating means 550. A-D
Conversion control circuit 552. Integrator 554. Integrator control means 5
55. Comparator 556° counter 558. Flip flop 56o.

562 and a buffer register 564.

ing.

A-D converters with dual lamp A-D
A well-known A-D converter called converter,
The input analog data is integrated in the positive direction for a certain period of time to obtain an integration level proportional to the input analog data, and then, from the integration level, it is integrated in the negative direction based on a predetermined constant level signal. By integrating the initially input analog data into the time from the start to the end of this integration in the negative direction, and counting the reference Norculus signal during said time. The digital converter is configured to obtain a digital conversion value of the input analog data.

In the A-D converter having such a configuration, the integrator 554 is used to integrate the input analog data in the positive direction and the reference bell signal in the negative direction. A reference level generating means 550 is provided for generating the reference level signal and also for generating the integrator control means 5.
In order to clear the residual integral value of 55, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 switches the signal input to the integrator 554, that is, the analog data and the reference level signal, and controls the positive direction of the integrator 554. , for negative ramp switching, the pre-comparator 556 compares the output of the integrator 554 with a reference level (ground level in this embodiment),
In order to detect the completion of the negative direction integration, the counter 558 measures the constant time when the input analog data is integrated in the positive direction for a certain period of time, and also when the reference level signal is fixedly integrated in the reverse direction. In order to measure the integration time, the buffer register 564 captures and stores the contents of the counter 558 when the integrator 554 finishes integrating the reference level signal in the opposite direction. Further, the flip-flop 560 generates a signal for switching the signal taken in through the A/D conversion control circuit 552 and applied to the integrator 554, and for switching the integration direction of the integrator 554, that is, for switching the lamp. To, again.

The flip-flops 562 are used to output a detection command signal for detecting that the counter 558 has overflowed as a result of AD conversion.

Note that the comparator 556: ・°1'' when there is an input integral value
When the output and input integral values fall below a certain level □, it becomes “0”
When starting A-D conversion in such a configuration, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 initially takes in analog data input from its a input terminal. is given to the integrator 554. At this time, the flip-flop 560 is still in the reset state, and therefore the integrator 554 is set to integrate in the positive direction. It is integrated. counter 5 at the same time
58 starts counting in synchronization with the clock pulse CP. The counter 558 is used for time control and A as described above.
It is used to take in D-converted data, and has a configuration in which the input clock pulse CP is divided appropriately to create a reference time, and this reference time is counted.

After the counting operation as described above, when the counter 558 overflows, that is, after a certain period of -7 has elapsed after the start of counting, the contents of the counter 558 become all "0".
At the same time, flip-flop 560 is set. Well, the fact that the flop 560 was set.

This indicates that a certain period of time has passed since the counter 558 started counting.
This means that the integration of the input analog data by 54 has been performed for a certain period of time. Integrator 554 at this time
It goes without saying that the output is proportional to the input analog data.

The output of the flip-flop 560 is given to an A-D conversion control circuit 552, and the input given to the integrator 554 is sent from a reference level generation means 550 connected to the b terminal side of the A-D conversion control circuit 552. By setting the integrator 554 to integrate in the negative direction at the same time as switching to the reference voltage signal, the integrator 554 integrates the reference voltage signal in the opposite direction. Therefore, based on the reference voltage from this b input terminal, the result of - previous data integration is
The data stored in the integral 5554 is inversely integrated. On the other hand, the counter 558, which previously overflowed and its contents were all 0'', continues counting.

At this time, it is obvious that the amount counted by the counter 558 and the amount of inverse integration by the integrator 554 are in a proportional relationship. As a result of this inverse integration, when the output of this integrator 554 reaches a constant value, that is, at a constant time first. When the inverse integration corresponding to the integral amount of the analog data that has been integrated over time is completed, the output of the comparator 556 changes from 1" to 0, so this is detected. At this time, the comparator 556 immediately Based on the change in the output of the counter 556, the buffer register 564 captures and stores the count of the counter 558. At this time, the count of the counter 558 stored in the buffer register 564 is calculated by the inverse integration by the integrator 554. , that is, the analog data that has been positively integrated for a certain period of time by the integrator 554. In the system of this embodiment, after such an operation, the buffer register 56
The counted amount of the counter 558 introduced and stored in 4 is used as digital conversion data corresponding to the input analog data.

Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues to count, and as a result of this counting, if the counter '558 overflows again, the contents of the counter 558 will be all "0" and at the same time the flip Flop 560 is reset and flip-flop 562 is set. By resetting the flip-flop 560, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 once clears the front integrator 554 through the integrator control means 555, and then receives an input signal from its a input terminal. The analog data is taken in and fed to the integrator 554, and the analog data is integrated again. As mentioned above, since this A-D converter repeats the same operation from now on, the system of this embodiment always repeatedly imports new analog data and converts it from A to D. Thus, the contents of buffer register 564/ are always updated to digital data corresponding to new input analog data.

Note that the operating state of this AD converter must always be detected by the system, and a logic circuit 566 is provided for this purpose. This logic circuit 566 is
an INT signal which captures the output signals of the flip-flops 560 and 562 of the comparator 556 and indicates that the input analog data is being integrated by the integrator 554;
ADC that indicates that A-D conversion has been completed and that A-D conversion data can be transferred and read! E signal, as a result of A-D conversion, the input analog data is too thick and the counter 5
58 outputs an ADOF signal indicating that it has overflowed.

As described above, the analog data introduced from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 is stored in the buffer register 564 as digital conversion data DD, but this data DD is transferred through the signal switching circuit 568. , based on the command from the logic circuit 5664, the digital data synchronized with the timing pulses TBO to TB7 is sequentially loaded onto the input bus line 370 from the lower digit and transferred to the central control unit 362.

On the other hand, the INT signal output from the logic circuit 566 is placed on the bus line 366 as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, and the ADOE signal is sent as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB6.

Note that the details will be explained later.

The terminal 54 of the mechanical part 358 receives the strobe charging completion signal 08A and the signal OL indicating the external photometry adapter mode.
As mentioned above, these signals include the CGUP signal that indicates whether or not charging of the strobe is completed by the current detector 386, and the shutter speed during strobe photography. It is divided into a FAT signal indicating that it is fully automatic and an OLM signal indicating that an external photometry adapter is being applied. These signals are further processed by an encoder 570.
It is converted into two signals OU and AO. This OU and AO
Double signal, as shown in the explanatory diagram in Fig. 47, OU double signal"
0" means that the system performs exposure control based on photometric data, and at this time, the AO multiplication signal "
If it is 0', the TTL photometry shooting mode will be instructed, and if it is "1", the external photometry shooting mode will be instructed. Also, when the CU multiplication signal is "1", it instructs the system to flash photography mode, and at this time the AO multiplication signal is 00.
If it is ``, it instructs to control the shutter speed semi-automatically, and if it is 1'', it instructs to control the shutter speed fully automatically. These signals OU and AO are applied to terminals a and b of multiplexer 572, respectively.

The multiplexer 572 has input terminals a to f, and input signals from the input terminals to a timing pulse T.
It is configured to convert into a serial signal and output it in synchronization with BI to TB6. The C, 'd, and e terminals of the multiplexer 572 each have an AE
A lock signal AELK, an AE charge signal AECG, and a winding completion signal WNUP are applied, and a signal ADOF indicating an AD conversion flow is applied from the logic circuit 566 to the f terminal.As a result, this multiplexer 57275- are timing pulses TB1 to TB
6, the ADO'F signal, AEL
K signal, AEOG signal, WNUP signal, AO double signal CU
A double signal is output, and this serial signal is outputted from the signal switching circuit 568 by timing pulses TBI to TBI.
In synchronization with signal B6, the signal is sequentially placed on the input path line 370 and transferred to the central control unit 3"62...The signal switching circuit 568 is controlled based on the command from the logic circuit 566. A of the input analog data
-D conversion complete.

When the transfer of A-D conversion data becomes possible, the output of the buffer register 564 is transferred to the input path line 3.
70, and in other conditions provides the serial output signal of multiplexer 572 to input path line 370.

The detailed block diagram of the input control section 360 described above is shown in FIG. 48. In the same figure, 5
Reference numeral 57 denotes a frequency division counter which divides the clock pulse CP by 32 to generate a reference clock for timekeeping, and generates the reference clock from its Q4 terminal. This reference clock is input to the counter 558 through the inverter INV4.
Therefore, this counter 558 divides and counts the reference clock and calculates its Q.
Outputs 8-bit count data from terminals O to Q7. Note that the most significant bit Q of the output data of the counter 5
7 is applied to the clock terminal of flip-flop 560 through inverter INV5. This flip
Flop 560 has its Q output as its D input,
substantially one extension of the most significant bit of said counter 558
This is what constitutes a bit. Further, the inverter I
The output of NV5 is the Q of the flip-flop 560.
NANDl which receives the output at one input end
The output of this NANDl is
Provided to the clock terminal of clip flop 562. Like the flip-flop 560, this flip-flop 562 also uses its running output as its D input, and essentially constitutes a further extension of the counter 558 and flip-flop 560. be.

That is, as is clear from the above explanation, the frequency division counter 577, the counter 558, and the flip syrup 56
When viewed as a whole, 0,562 constitutes a frequency dividing counter of 15 pits. In this embodiment, two integrated circuit elements MC14520 (manufactured by Motorola) were used to realize such a 15-pit frequency division counter.

This integrated circuit device MCI4520 is a dual up counter including two 4-pit counters, as shown in the block diagram of FIG.・It has a configuration as shown in the diagram.

Therefore, by combining the integrated circuit elements Me14520 as shown in FIG. 51, the 15-pit counter described above can be realized. In this configuration, four 4-bit counters are connected in series. This is realized by connecting, but a counter configured in this way is
The 5th bit from the least significant bit is used as the frequency dividing counter 557, and the 6th bit to the 1st bit
Up to the third bit is allocated to an 8-pit counter, that is, the counter 558, and the 14th and 15th bits are allocated to 7. It is used as a lip flop 560562. The counter having the above-mentioned configuration is reset immediately when a signal is input to the direct reset terminal.

In FIG. 48, the buffer register 564 is a parallel
It is composed of an in-parallel-out type register, and inputs and stores data input to input terminals Do-D7 in synchronization with the rising edge of its clock terminal C input, and outputs the data to its QO to Q7 terminals. This is what is output. This buffer register 56'4 receives the QO-Q7 terminal outputs of the counter 558 at each of its Do-D7 terminals, and sends each of the QO-Q7 terminal outputs to the Xo-X7 terminals of the signal separation circuit 568. It is applied to the input terminal. Further, the output of the comparator 556 is applied to the clock terminal C of this buffer register 564 through an inverter INV8.
The count data of the counter 558 is input when the output of the comparator 556 falls from "1" to "0", that is, when the definite integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554 is completed. .

The buffer register 564 is specifically a 4-bit parallel-in/parallel-out type shift register integrated circuit element CD40 shown in FIG.
35 (manufactured by RCA), can be easily realized by arranging two of them side by side as shown in Fig. 52.

The signal switching circuit 568 and the multiplexer 572 are basically multiplexers having the same configuration, and both can be configured using an integrated circuit element MO14512 (manufactured by Motorola).

This integrated circuit element, MO14512, has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 53 and characteristics as shown in the truth table of FIG. 54. This integrated circuit element Me1
4512 has 8-bit parallel data input from the XO to X7 terminals, and is A when a "0" signal is applied to the DIS terminal.

When a counter pulse as shown in FIG. 32 is applied from each of the μ-elements B and C, the input data of the X0-X7 terminals is sequentially transferred from the Z terminal to the switching circuit 568 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. For each terminal of Xo-X7,
The buffer register Q (receives the input of each output signal of the buffer register Q (1-Q7), and has its A, B, and O terminals input with counter pulses OTI, CT2, and CT4, respectively. The X1 terminal of the plexer 572 receives an ADOF signal indicating that the counter 558 has over-lowed as a result of AD conversion, and the ADOF signal is sent to the X2 terminal.
The K signal is input to the X3 terminal, the AEOG signal to the X4 terminal, the WNUP signal to the X4 terminal, the AO multiplied signal to the X5 terminal, and the OU multiplied signal to the X6 terminal.
Each terminal has counter pulses CTI and CT2, respectively.
゜CT4 is input 0 Note that the output terminal Z of the switching circuit 668 and the output terminal Z of the multiplexer 572 are wired-OR coupled to each other and connected to the input path line 370. In this configuration, since the same signal as the switching control signal input to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572 is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 via INV9, the input The path line 370 receives data inputted from Xo-X7 of the signal switching circuit 568 or various signals inputted from XO-X7 of the multiplexer 572, depending on the state of the switching control signal. One of them will be output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB0-TB7.

Still, the output of the flip-flop 560 is input to the D terminal of the 7-lip-flop F14 synchronized with the clock pulse CP through the inverter INV7, and the ζ output of the flip-flop F14 is input to the D terminal of the 7-lip flop F14 synchronized with the clock pulse CP. It is input to the D terminal of the synchronous 7-rip-flop F15. Furthermore, this clip flop F15
The ζ output of the timing pulse TBO synchronized flip-flop F16 is input to the D terminal, and the ζ output of this flip-flop F16 is input to the D terminal of the timing pulse TBO synchronized flip-flop F17. input to the terminal.

In the configuration as described above, the flip-flop F
The operations of 1-4 to F17 will be explained according to the timing chart of FIG. Now, when the output of the 7-lip/7-o switch 560 changes from "1° to 0", that is, when the output of the inverter INV7 changes from "0° to 1", the flip-flop F14 changes from the immediately following clock signal. The flip-flop F1 is set in synchronization with the
A "1" signal is input to the D terminal of 5. Therefore, clip flop F15 outputs the next timing pulse TBO
Since it is set in synchronization with the startup of , its ζ output is 1
becomes. Since the ζ output of this flip-flop 7'F15 is input to the D terminal of flip-flop F16,
Flip-flop F16 is the next timing pulse'
Since it is set in synchronization with the rise of STBO, its ζ output becomes "1". Through the above operations, the output of the comparator 556 changes from "0" to "1" by adopting the AND condition of the ζ output of the flip-flop F15 and the ζ output of the flip-flop F16. The 1-word time obtained in this way indicates that the ADC has completed the A-D conversion.
This is the basis for obtaining the E signal. Note that the 1° output from the ζ output terminal of the flip-flop F16 is 4 to 1. Since the input is to the D terminal of the clip-flop F17, the flip-flop F17 is input to the next timing.
- It is set in synchronization with the rising edge of pulse TBO, and its ζ output becomes "1".

In other words, through the above operations, the clip-flop F1
By adopting the AND condition of the ζ output of 6 and the 4 outputs of flip-flop F17, the output of the comparator 556 becomes 0.
The second 1-word time can be obtained after changing from ° to "1".

The 1-word time obtained in this way is that the A-D conversion is completed at the 1-word time immediately after the 1-word time when the ADCE signal indicating that the A-D conversion has been completed is output. Used to transfer conversion data.

Note that the ζ output of the flip-flop F15 and the glue output of the flip-flop F16 are the timing pulse T.
B6 is input to the AND gate AND9, and as a result, as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned AND at the timing of TB6.
A signal is output from the gate AND9, and this signal is an A-D conversion completion signal ADC indicating that AD conversion has been completed.
Or Goo as E) Pass Umin 36 through OR4
It can be put on 6. That is, the flip-flop 560
The fact that the ζ output of has changed from “1” to °O” means that
This is because it indicates that the lamp of the integrator 554, which had been performing constant integration in the negative direction, has been switched, that is, the A/D conversion has been completely completed. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

In addition, the ζ output of the flip-flop F16 and the 4 outputs of the flip-flop F17 are
As a result, as shown in FIG. 55, a signal is outputted from the AND gate which is at a high level for one word after the output of the ADCE signal. The output signal of AND10 is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 through the inverter INV9 as a control signal for data transfer, and is also applied directly to the D terminal of the multiplexer 572. As a result, for only one word after the ADCE signal is output, the data in the buffer register 564, that is, the digital data obtained by A-D conversion, is transferred to the signal switching circuit 568. The lower digits are output from the second terminal to the next input bus line 370 in synchronization with timing 1 pulses TBO to TB7.

During this time, since the 1" signal is input from the AND gate AND10 to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572, the output from the SOME2 terminal is regulated. Input bus 3
70, from two terminals of multiplexer 572, in synchronization with timing pulses TBI to TB6.
L.K.

When signals such as AECG, WNUP, AO, CU, etc. are output, but after the A-D conversion is completed and the ADCE signal is output, the signal switching circuit 56.8 is switched on only during the next word time. The A/D converted digital data DD stored in the buffer register 564 is outputted through the buffer register 564.

On the other hand, the Q output of the clip-flop 560 is the inverter I. Timing pulse TB7 through NVIO
is input to the AND gate AND8 which receives the input. That is, while the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is "0°," the AND gate AND8 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7. 554
is placed on bus line 366 through OR gate OR4 as an INT signal indicating that it is integrating input analog data in the positive direction. That is, the fact that the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is "0" indicates that the integrator 554 is integrating the input analog data in the positive direction. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, the output of the comparator 556 is the clock pulse C
It is input to the D terminal of the P-synchronized flip-flop F1-3. Further, the Q output of this flip-flop F13 is inputted to the D terminal of the flip-flop F12 which is also synchronized with the clock pulse CP. The Q output of the flip-flop F1'3 and the flip-flop F1? The Q output of is given to the AND gate AND7, and the output of this AND gate AND7 is OR.
Through gate OR3, frequency division counter 557. The direct reset signal is applied to the respective direct reset terminals R of counter 558 and flip-flops 560 and 562.

This means that if the lamp is switched after the integrator 554 performs definite integration in the negative direction, integration in the positive direction starts and a positive output is obtained from the once reset comparator 556. Although there is some delay time (this is entirely due to the characteristics of the integrator 554), the counter 558
This is provided so that the operation start time of the comparator 556 does not differ from the time when a positive output starts to be output from the comparator 556.
When a positive output begins to appear from the comparator 556, the 1 immediately after that
The frequency division counter 557 . The configuration is such that the counter 558 and flip-flops 560 and 562 are directly reset to match the count start time of the counter 558 with the output start time of the comparator 556.

Furthermore, the Q output of the clip-flop 562 is input to the clock terminal of the clip-flop F18, which receives the output signal of the comparator 556 at its D input terminal, and the integrator 554 performs definite integration in the negative direction. comparator 55 while
If the counter 558 overflows even though the output of 6' has not been inverted from "1 degree" to "0", that is, even though the A-D conversion has not been completed,
Flip-flop 562 is set and configured so that the Q terminal of flip-flop F18, which uses its Q terminal output as a clock, outputs a 1" output. The Q output signal of flip-flop F18 is A-D. The result of the conversion is applied to the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572 as an ADOF signal indicating that counter 558 has overflowed.

The operation of the input control section 360 having the above-described configuration will be explained in more detail below with reference to the operation characteristic diagrams shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

By the way, Fig. 56 shows the case where the A-D conversion was performed smoothly, and Fig. 57 shows the result of the A-D conversion.

Each shows a case in which an overflow occurs.

First, when the power is turned on, a clear signal PUC is output from a power-up/clear circuit (not shown), and the frequency division counter 557. Counter 558° flip, Tsubu flop 560
,562. F14°F15. F16. Clear F17
Reset, to. In this state, the flip-flop 560
The Q output of is °0', so the A-D conversion control circuit 5
52 ramps the integrator 554 in the positive direction and simultaneously provides input analog data to the integrator 554. At this time, the output of the comparator 556 becomes 1°, and at approximately the same time, the counter 558 starts counting up the output pulses of the frequency division counter 557. While this integration is occurring, the 0'' output of flip-flop 560 is connected to inverter INV10.
is fed to the AND gate AND8 through the AND gate AND8, and therefore from this AND gate AND8 to the OR gate OR
4, an INT signal is output on path line 366 in synchronization with timing pulse TB7, indicating that integrator 554 is integrating input analog data.

When the counter 55t8 overflows during the integration operation as described above, the output of the flip-flop 56.0 becomes "1" and at the same time the frequency division counter 557. The contents of the counter 558 are set to 0 degrees for all pits, and counting starts again from the last point.
2 makes the ramp of the integrator 554 negative, and at the same time supplies the reference level signal from the reference level generating means 550 to the integrator 554. At the point when this negative integration begins, the integral value of the integrator 554 is proportional to the input analog data. During this negative integration, the clip flop 560 -,
Since the 1° output continues, the output of the AND gate AND8 is regulated, so of course the INT signal is not output.

As a result of the integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554 described above, when the output signal of the integrator 554 falls to a certain level, that is, when the integration is completed, the output of the comparator 556 becomes "1".
” to “0”. As a result, 1. The comparator 5
At that point, the buffer register 564, which receives the output signal of 56 at the clock terminal C through the inverter INV8, captures and stores the count data counted by the counter 558 and output from the QO-Q7 terminals. .

In this manner, the count data captured in buffer register 564 is a digital value corresponding to the input analog data, as previously described.

Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting operation, and when the counter 558 overflows, the flip-flop 560 is turned off and its Q
The Q output of the 0 flip-flop 562, whose output becomes 0° and the flip-flop 562 is set and its Q output becomes 1, is applied to the clock terminal of the flip-flop F18. Flop F
Since the output of the comparator 556, which provides an output to the D terminal of 18, is already 0'', it is naturally not output.

On the other hand, the D output of the clip-flop F14 is passed through the Q output cover inverter INV7 of the flip-flop 5-60.
In order to give a "1" input to the terminal, seven lip-flops 56
During the l word after the ot6Q output goes to 0'', starting from the first timing pulse TBO, the ADCE signal synchronized to the timing pulse TB6 is applied from the AND gate AND9 to the bus line 366 through the OR gate OR4. That is, in this system, when the counter 5581, which continues counting during and after definite integration by the integrator 554 in the negative direction, overflows, the A-D conversion is terminated. Therefore, as mentioned above, the Q of the clip flop 560 is
A-D at the moment the output changes from “1” to °0.
This means that the end of conversion is detected.

Furthermore, at the next word time after the ADCE signal is output, the AND gate ANDIO is activated as shown in FIG.
A "1" output is made for one word from and, and the 1" output from and is given to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572, regulating the signal output from the two terminals of the multiplexer 572,
At the same time, it is applied as an O signal to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 through the inverter INV9, and only for one word during which this "1" signal is output, in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7, the signal is sent to the buffer register 56.
The A/D conversion data DD stored in 4 is sequentially sent to the input bus line 370 from the lower digits through the Z output terminal.

On the other hand, the Q output of flip-flop 560, which was reset by the overflow of counter 558, becomes A-
The A-D conversion control circuit 552 that receives the Q output once clears the integrator 554, switches its ramp in the positive direction, and outputs the input analog data. input to the integrator 554. Integrator 55 whose ramp is switched from negative direction to positive direction
4 does not start integration immediately, but due to the characteristics of the element, integration starts after a certain delay time.
It takes a certain amount of time until the output of the integrator 554 exceeds a certain level and the comparator 556 starts outputting "1°."

On the other hand, since the counter 558 immediately starts the next counting operation from the state of all pits °o'' after the counter 558 overflows, the integrator 554 cannot accurately integrate the input analog data. To prevent this, a direct reset mechanism consisting of flip-flops F12, F13, and gate AND7 is provided, and when integrating in the positive direction, the comparator 556 When a "1" output starts to appear, this is detected and the frequency division counter 557, counter 558, and flip-flops 560 and 562 are cleared and reset, and all pits are newly set to "0". The purpose is to start counting from the state of .

The above-mentioned operations are repeated six times, and for each A-D conversion cycle, the ADC signal indicating the end of A-D conversion is
E signal and A-D converted digital data D
D is output. In addition, as mentioned earlier, the input bus
Line 370 is synchronized with the AELK signal, the AECG signal, the WNUP signal, the AO signal 9, and the CU double signal timing pulses TBI to TB6, except for the word time when the A-D converted digital data DD is output. Te repeat 9
This is what is returned and output.

Note that after obtaining the integral value corresponding to the input analog data by the integration in the positive direction by the integrator 554, when performing the integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554, the integrator Before the output of comparator 554 falls below a certain level, that is, while the output of comparator 556 remains at °1'',
Counter 558 overflows and flips 7.
When the 0-tube 562 is set, the clip-flop F18 whose D input is the output of the comparator 556 is set, and the A-D signal is output from its Q output terminal. An ADOF signal indicating that the conversion result has overflowed is output and applied to the X1 terminal of multiplexer 572. On the other hand, at the same time as the counter 558 overflows, the flip-flop 560 is set to υ', so the A-D conversion control circuit 552 receiving its Q output
4, the output of the comparator 554 at this point is °
1 “Falls to °0”.

Therefore, the output of the comparator 554 is connected to the inverter INV8.
The buffer register 564, which is applied to the clock terminal through The data taken into the register 564 is data in which all pits are "0".

Note that even if the result of the A/D conversion overflows as described above, the ADCE signal and the INT signal are sent to the bus line 366 based on the output of the flip-flop 560.

By the way, when the A-D conversion result overflows when shooting with a strobe, it is a signal indicating that the aperture on the camera device side needs to be set manually.
This is a case where t is given as an analog signal for iris control from 4 to 4 so that the A-D converter 382 overflows. Therefore, at this time, the data with all the bits of 0'' taken into the buffer register 564 is of course something that can be ignored as a matter of course. 3
The analog data and various conditions or state determination signals taken into the input bus line 370 are given to the central control unit 62, and the signals AD (, E and INT signals are It is placed on the pass line 366.

Here, we will return to the central control unit 362 and continue the explanation.

In central control 362, bus line 366 is coupled to input bus selector 578. The input bus selector 578 detects the ADCE signal input to the pass line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6 and determines whether the signal coming on the input bus line 370 is a condition signal or not. It determines whether it is D-converted data DD and outputs a signal instructing processing of the input signal from the input bus line 370.

On the other hand, the input path line 370 is connected to the central control unit 36
The signal switching circuit 576 normally acts as a circulation circuit for the D register 516 for storing AD converted data.

The condition register 574 is connected to the input bus selector 37.
When a signal commanding condition import is input from 8,
The ADOF signal, AELK signal, AECG signal, WNU-P signal, AO on the input bus line 370
The double signal CU is captured and stored in accordance with the double signal timing pulses TBI-TB6.

Further, although the signal switching circuit 576 normally circulates the contents DR of the D register 516, the input bus
When a signal instructing data acquisition is input from the selector 578, the A-D conversion data DD on the input bus input 370 is sent to the timing pulses TBO to T.
The data is captured and stored according to B7.

Therefore, the condition register 574 and the D register 516
Through the microcontroller line 370, new setting conditions or operating conditions and A-D conversion data DD are constantly inputted, and the accuracy is memorized. It is the same as the A-D conversion period of the converter. The signal switching circuit 576 receives the AELK signal from the condition register 574, and when this AELK signal is input, even if the input bus
Even if a signal instructing data capture is input from the selector 578, the data DR in the D register 516 continues to circulate and new A-D conversion data is not captured.

This camera system performs AE frock through such a configuration.

A more detailed explanation will be given below regarding the configuration for importing the condition signal and AD conversion data DD from the input bus line 370 into the central control unit 362.

Now, if the input control unit 360 completes the A-D conversion and the signal ADCE indicating this is put on the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, the ADC
It has already been mentioned that the A-D conversion data DD is sequentially output from the lower digits to the input path line 370 in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO-TB7 at the next word time after the E signal is output. However, for this reason, the central control unit 362 side also outputs the input bus signal in synchronization with the timing pulses TB, O to TB7 at the next word time after detecting the ADCE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB6. By feeding line 370 into D register 516,
AD conversion data DD can be stored in the D register 516. Note that at word times other than those mentioned above, various signals are transferred from the input control unit 360 to the input bus line 370, and therefore, the input bus line 370 is controlled based on the timing pulse. It is sufficient to input the signal into the condition register 574.

Therefore, the input bus selector 57I3 takes in the signal on the bus line 366 and outputs the AD signal at the timing of TB6.
It detects that the CE signal is input, and when the next 1 word is input,
A configuration may be adopted in which a command is given to take in A-D conversion data from the input path line 370.

From this point of view, in this embodiment, a configuration as shown in FIG. 58 is applied to the input bus selector 578. That is, as is clear from the figure, the bus line 366 is introduced into the D terminal of the clip-flop F18 synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, and the Q output of this clip-flop F18 is synchronized with the timing pulse TBO. The flip of
It is given to the Dq child of flop F19.

In such a configuration, each of the seven lip-flops F18. F
19 performs the operation shown in FIG. Flip-flop F synchronized with timing pulse TB7
18 is connected to the bus line 366 unless its D terminal □ terminal input is not °1'' at least at the timing of TB6.
It will not be reset unless there is an ADCE signal. At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F18 is 0'', so the flip-flop F19, which is synchronized with the timing pulse shifter 5β0 and which receives this 0° output at its D terminal, is in a reset state and its Φ output ■ It is 1°. This■
Signal i is applied to the condition register 574 and causes the condition register 574 to capture the contents of the input bus line 370.

The detailed configuration of the condition register 574 is shown in FIG. 60, and as is clear from the figure, the shift register S
It is composed of RI and a latch L that captures data in synchronization with the falling edge of the clock.

The shift register SRI has its D terminal connected to the input bus line 370 and takes in data on the input path line 370 in synchronization with the clock pulse CP. In such a configuration, all the signals carried on the input bus line 370 for each clock pulse CP are sequentially taken into this shift register SRI, and are synchronized for each clock pulse CP to be sent to the output terminal. It is output in order from Q-0 to Q5. Therefore, in this state, QO~Q 5 ffl of the shift register SRI
'Although all of the output data from the external terminals are uncertain data, the A-D conversion data D is input to the input bus line 370.
Q O-Q 5 of shift register SR1 during timing pulse TB7, except for the time when D is not on, that is, the next one word time after the ADCE signal is sent on bus line 336. From the output terminal, the CU times signal AO times signal WNUP signal, AECG signal, AELK
This means that the ADOF signal is being output. This is the CU double signal timing pulse TB6, the AO double signal timing pulse TB5, the WNUP signal as the timing pulse TB4, and the AECG signal as the timing pulse T! 33, the AECG signal is applied to TB2, the AELK signal is applied to TBI, and the AJ)OF signal is applied to the input bus line 366 in synchronization with the AJ)OF multiplied signal TBO. Therefore, the Q of the shift register SR1 is
The outputs from the O-Q5 skewer terminals are received by the DO-D5 terminals, respectively, and the launch L synchronizes with the falling edge of the clock.
By providing a signal that falls only while the timing pulse TB7 is being output, the latch L is provided with a signal that falls CU, AO.
, WNUP, AECG, AELK, and ADOF signals can be captured and stored. In this embodiment, by inputting the timing pulse TB7 to ANDII which is receiving the output signal (2) from the input path selector 578, the output of the next one of the ADCE signals is Only during the word time, a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7 whose output is regulated is obtained, and this signal is also input to the clock pulse CP.
By feeding the clock pulse CP to AND12
A signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, that is, a signal that performs a falling edge operation during the timing pulse TB7, is obtained, and this signal is applied to the clock terminal of the bridge L as a take-in signal.

Through the above-described configuration, the parallel in-parallel out register forming the latch L includes:
The next one with the ADCE signal on bus line 366
Except for the word time, a signal regarding a new setting condition or operating state is input and updated every word time. Note that the QO of the parallel in-parallel out register B R'1 forming the latch L is
From the terminal, the CU times signal 40 From the terminal, the CU times signal %Q1
The AO times signal is sent from the terminal, the T100 signal is sent from the Q1 terminal, and the Q
The WNUP signal is from the 2nd terminal, and the WNUP signal is from the ζ7 terminal.
The signal is the AECG signal from the Q3 terminal, the AECG signal from the Q3 terminal, the AELK signal from the Q4 terminal, and the Q
From the 4 terminal, the AE L K signal is from the %Q5 terminal.
The ADOF signal is output from the Q5 terminal.

Note that this condition register 574 specifically specifies 1□6□f.
f1K hot. □ゎ'I can do four things. As is clear from the figure, the 60th illustrated shift register SRI is constructed using an integrated circuit element CD4015, and the latch L is constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4042.

The integrated circuit element CD4015 (manufactured by RCA) is a dual 4-bit static shift register whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 62, and its Q31 output is given as the D2 terminal input. It consists of an 8-person shift register. In this embodiment, 6 bits are shifted to the shift register SR.
Used as I. Further, the integrated circuit element CD4042
As already shown in the logic diagram in Figure 40, is a 4-bit latch, which inputs parallel data in synchronization with the falling edge of its clock input, and when the clock input reaches 0°. The configuration is such that data is held for one time. It is obvious that an 8-bit latch can be constructed by using two latch CDs 4042 in parallel, but in this embodiment, q, 6 bits of them are used as the latch L.

On the other hand, "1" is applied from the bus line 366 to the D terminal of the 58th illustrated slip-flop F18 at the timing of TB6.
When a signal is given, that is, when there is an AECE signal, the flip-flop F18 is set at the timing of TB7, and its Q output is set to "1" -0.
The 7-timing pulse TBO synchronized flip-flop F19 receiving the Q output is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the first timing pulse TBO of the next word time, and sets its Q output to "1 degree". Note that since the flip-flop F18 retains its state after it is set until the rising edge of the next timing pulse TB7, the D input of the clip-flop F19 is At the rising edge of the next timing pulse 'I'BO, it immediately becomes '0'. Therefore, the flip-flop F19 is kept set for one word period from the rising edge of TBO to the rising edge of the third TBO, and its Q output ■ becomes "1" for this one word period. .

The ■ signal is applied to the signal switching circuit 576, but upon receiving the ■ signal, the signal switching circuit 576 stops the circulation of the contents of the D register 516 and switches the input bus.
The data on line 370 is introduced into D register 516 for one word from TBO to TB7. Note that the data introduced during this one word is A-D conversion data DD that is placed on the input bus line 370 for this one word on the input control section 360 side. The data thus fetched into the D register 516 is circulated through the signal switching circuit 576 until the next data is fetched.

The detailed configurations of the signal switching circuit 576 and the D register 516 are as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 63, but the D register 516 is an 8-pit shift register as shown in the block diagram of FIG. An integrated circuit element CD4021 (manufactured by RCA) is used.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 63, the Q output ■ of the flip-flop F19 shown in FIG. 58 and the QO output AELK of the switch L shown in FIG. Not, that is, AELK
When the signal is "1" and the signal (2) which commands data capture is "0", the output of this AND gate AND'13 is "0". Therefore, at this time, the above AND'
AND gate A directly receiving the output of ANDl 3
ND14 has its output regulated and the AND gate A
Since the output of ND13 is input through the inverter INV9, AND15 becomes conductive.
The contents DR of the D register 516 are circulated from the Q8 terminal through the AND gate AND15 and the OR5.

On the other hand, even when the Q output (2) of the 7-rip-flop F19, that is, the signal that commands the input valley of data, is "1" -,
When in the AE lock state, the AELK signal is "Oo", and therefore the output of the AND gate AND13 is "0°", so the D register 516 cannot receive A-D conversion data from the input path line 370. Instead, the content DR, that is, the previously fetched A-D conversion data DDi, is held in circulation through the AND gate AND15 and the OR gate OR5.

On the other hand, if it is not in the AE lock state, that is, the AELK
If the signal is '°1' and the flip-flop F19
The Q output ■, that is, the signal that commands data import is “
1", the output of this AND gate AND13 becomes °l", so at this time the AND gate A
AND gate A'ND1 receiving the output of ND13
4 is not conductive, and the output of the AND gate AND15, which is input through the inverter INV9, is regulated. Therefore, on the input bus line 370, the flip-flop F19
The A-D conversion data DD, which is carried only while the Q output 1 of
The data will be imported sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with .

Through the configuration described above, the input control section 360
The A-D conversion data DD and various conditions or state 1 signals obtained in the above are input to the central control section 362.

Now, in FIG. 30, 500 is an arithmetic circuit that executes a required arithmetic operation between the data AR of the A register 510 and the data specified by the data selector 502 according to the arithmetic instruction from the ink 9 traction ROM 504. It is composed as follows.

Note that the arithmetic instructions output from the instruction ROM 504 at this time include the eight arithmetic control routines described above, and one arithmetic control routine is selectively executed for each shooting mode. Become.

The arithmetic circuit 500 cooperates with auxiliary registers such as an A register 510, a B register 512, and a C register 514. In addition, 506 is a gate for circulating the data BR of the B register 512 and writing data 4AR from the A register 5510, and 508 is a gate for circulating the data BR of the B register 512 and writing data 4AR from the A register 5510.
This is a gate for writing data AR from the D and A registers 510 which circulated the data CR of the register l' 514.

The data selector 502 is a, b, c.

dy e+ f+ gt h) One of the data input from the nine terminals of 1 is sent to the instruction RO
The arithmetic circuit 50 selectively operates according to instructions from M504.
It is configured so that it is given to 0.

The data from the terminal a of the selector 502 is film sensitivity data DTSV, and the terminal b from the selector 502 is the open aperture value data DT.
AO is inputted from the C terminal, the bending error data DTAC, the d terminal receives the shutter speed data DTTV, and the C terminal receives the aperture value data DTAV, but these data, DTSV, DTAO , DTAC, DTTV
, DTAV are obtained as described above.

Further, from the terminal f of the data selector 502, data specified by the instruction ROM 504 is taken in from among several pieces of fixed data stored in the fixed data ROM 534.

The data stored in the fixed data ROM 534 includes C3TO, in which all bits of the data are O'', and C3TC, which represents other specific data.

C3TD, C3TF in which all bits of C3TE data are 1", data TMIN representing the minimum shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4, data TMAX representing the maximum shutter speed that can be controlled by body 4. , TSYN, which represents the shutter speed that can be synchronized with the strobe for flash photography.

Constants C3TI, C3T2 . Data such as the maximum aperture iAMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used are selectively given to the terminal f of the data selector 502 based on commands from the instruction ROM 504.

Note that this relates to the maximum aperture value. Regarding data AMAX, a plurality of data are stored in the fixed data ROM 534, and these aperture values are transmitted from the lens device 2 to the body 4.
Data regarding the maximum aperture value captured on the side AMAX'
It is selected and output as appropriate based on the following.

Incidentally, the fixed data written in the fixed data ROM 534 includes constants for various calculations and the lens device 2.
Conflicts regarding mechanical constraints imposed by the lens device 2 and the body 4, such as upper and lower limits of shutter speed, which are appropriately set depending on the performance of the lens device 2 and the body 4, calculation methods, data settings, and restriction methods, etc. It is.

Also, the terminal g of the data selector 502.

D registers 516.h and i respectively. B register 5
12. The respective contents of C register 514, DD, BR
, CR will be selectively incorporated.

It should be noted that out of the terminals a to i of the data selector 502, which terminal is used to import data into the arithmetic circuit is entirely determined by a command from the instruction ROM 504; All selected data are introduced into the arithmetic circuit 500.

The arithmetic circuit 500 is connected to the instruction ROM 5.
According to the command from 04, the data selected by the data selector 5°02 is loaded into the A register 510, and the data AR of the A register 510 and the data selected by the data selector 502 are loaded into the A register 510. The A register 51 is the result of performing the required operation between
When the value is accumulated to 0 or a carry or borrow is obtained as a result of the above operation, the carry flip flow 3 block 540 is set and the content AR of the A register 510, the content BR of the B register 512, or the content of the C register 514 is set. It performs arithmetic control operations such as exchange with CR.

Now, the instruction ROM 504 that provides arithmetic control instructions to the arithmetic circuit 500 will be explained.

Instruction RO provided in the central control unit 362
As mentioned above, the M504 includes eight arithmetic control routines, and these eight routines process the S'PDW signal and ASLC signal output from the condition signal storage circuit 548, as well as the condition signal and the condition signal output from the register 574. The selection is made depending on the state of the AO multiplication signal and the CU multiplication signal. The program selector 580 determines the arithmetic control routine of the t instruction ROM 504 according to the 5PDW signal No. 1, the ASLC signal, the AO multiplication signal and the CU multiplication signal state.
It is.

The instruction ROM 504 is configured to execute a routine selected and set by the program selector 580 and output a control signal to the system. - Counter 582. This program counter 582 has a latch 584 connected to its inhibit terminal.
This is provided to regulate the counting operation of the program counter 582 so that the program counter 582 does not start unless the input bus selector 578 detects the first ADCE signal. At the same time, the restriction is canceled and the program counter 5
82 counting operation is started.

The program counter 582 is timing.

It has a configuration in which the count is counted up by one for each pulse TBO, and in this system, substantially, one step of calculation by the instruction ROM 504 is performed during one word from timing pulse TBO to TB7. A control action is performed.

From then on, the program counter 582 repeatedly performs counting operations, and outputs a signal indicating that the counting operation has progressed to a certain step. This signal is given to the logic circuit 598.This signal indicates that the calculation control of the logic circuit 59 is completed.
8, the time factor is taken into consideration, one is the CALE signal that is put on the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS to indicate the completion of the calculation, and one is the output of the CALE signal. It is output from the next timing pulse TBO, and is output as an R8ND signal for carrying transfer data on the output bus line 374.

Above, # solid program selector 580° program counter 582. Instruction ROM50
4 will be described in detail below. FIG. 65 shows the control system and logic circuit 5981.4 of the instruction ROM 504. A block diagram of a latch circuit 584, a program selector 58o, and a program counter 582 is shown.

In the figure, the program selector 580 is composed of an integrated circuit element CD4019 (manufactured by RCA). It is a select gate.

Additionally, the program counter 582 is integrated circuit element CD4.
024 (manufactured by RCA), this integrated circuit element CD4024 is shown in FIG.
It is a ripple counter as shown in the diagram.

The program selector 580 sends the v signal, which is the output of the condition register 574, to its KA terminal, and also sends the KB signal to its KA terminal.
When the CU double signal is input to the terminal and it is not in strobe shooting mode, the input signals of the A1 and A2 terminals are input to DI and D2.
Outputs to each output terminal of
.

It is configured to output each input signal of the Bg terminal to each output terminal of DI and D2. The program selector 580
The output of the AND gate AND16 is given to the A1 terminal of the 5PDW signal and the AO signal obtained through the inverter INVIO. Further, the ADOF signal is input to the selector 58 (7) Bli, the ASLC signal is input to the A2 terminal, and the AO multiplied signal and the ASLC signal are input to the B2 terminal through the OR gate OR6.

In such a configuration, the program selector 580
When the CU multiplication signal is "1", that is, when not in strobe photography mode, the four arithmetic control programs are also activated as the CU multiplication signal "
1", that is, when in strobe photography mode, you can select each of the four calculation control programs.
In total, the eight arithmetic control routines described above can be specified.

The instruction ROM 504 has 28 (= 256
) step instructions, but in this embodiment the system is configured to execute eight routines consisting of 32 steps, depending on the combination of inputs from terminals 5 to A7. The eight arithmetic control routines explained above are executed according to the inputs from the AO to A4 terminals.
It executes each step routine. This instruction ROM 504 has a CU multiplied signal given to its input terminal A6. Each D of the program selector 580 is connected to each input terminal of A5.
1. Receives signal input from D, 2 output terminal. Further, each input terminal of A0-A4 of the ROM 504 receives each output of Q1 to Q5 of the program counter 582.

The program counter 582 is configured to count up by one in synchronization with each falling edge of the timing pulse TBO'. In order for the instruction ROM 504 to start incrementing as the program counter 582 counts up, it is necessary that some A-D conversion data DD has been stored in the D register 516 as a result of the first A-D conversion, and the power switch is turned on. If the program counter 582 counts up until the post-A-D conversion is not completed and no A-D conversion digit data DD is stored in the D register 516, this will lead to malfunction. Therefore, in this system,
Only after A-D conversion is completed on the input control unit 360 side without AE lock, the program
The configuration is such that the counter 582 starts counting up. That is, the frisive flop F19 of the input bus selector 578 provided in the central control unit 362
(Fig. 58) Q output ■ and ANDG which is receiving the AELK signal indicating that the system is not in the AE lock state)
Output of AND21 to J- type flip-flop F20
When the first ADCE signal is placed on the bus line 366 without AE lock, the flip-flop F20 is set to make its Q output 1''. .Therefore, the Q terminal output of the flip-flop F20 is divided by the input terminal IN V 1
1 Program color input to direct reset terminal R8T through s-OR gate OR7
82, the direct reset terminal R8T input becomes 0'' at the same time as the flip-flop F20 is set;
The instruction ROM 504 starts counting up operation in synchronization with the falling edge of timing pulse TB7. ~OPO's 5
The bits that make up the operand code are 0
In this embodiment, an integrated circuit element 1702A (manufactured by Intel) whose block diagram is shown in FIG. 68 is used as the instruction ROM 504.

The output code of this instruction ROM 504 has a meaning as shown in the code explanatory diagram of FIG. 69.

Now in the instruction code? I will explain.

In other words, O20 determines whether this instruction is related to an operation or a data exchange. When O20 is 0, it commands an operation, and when it is 1, it instructs a data exchange. It is something that commands.

When O20 is 0°, that is, when a calculation command is issued, O2
0 commands the content of the operation, and O20 is "Oo".
When it is , it is commanding addition, and when it is °1", it is commanding subtraction.

In addition, at this time, O20 instructs processing of the calculation result. When O20 is "0", the calculation result is not recorded in the A register 510, and when O20 is 1 degree, the calculation result is stored in the A register. 510 to be recorded.

Conversely, when O20 is "1", that is, a data exchange command is issued, O20 commands the conditions for data exchange, and O20 is
When 20 is “0”, carry flip-flop 54
0 is reset), it is invalid, and OF2 is “1”.
” is valid when the carry flip-flop 540 is in the reset state.

Also, at this time, OF2 also commands the conditions for data exchange! 11. When OF2 is “0”, carry/flip/
It is invalid when the flop 540 is in the set state, and the OF
When 2 is “1”, carry clip flop 54
Valid when 0 is set.

After integrating the above and considering the individual questions, we found that OF2 “
When the angle is 0°, OF2 is 0'', and OR5 is 0'', the contents AR of A register 510 and the data specified by the operand code are added, and the result is stored in A register 5.
10 is not written, so in the end, there will be no inquiry. In the following explanation, this instruction will be referred to as N0OP.

When OF2 is “0”, OF2 is “0” and OF2 is '°1
”, the command is to add the contents AR of the A register 510 and the data specified by the operand code, and then write the result to the A register 510, so-called addition.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as ADD.

When OF2 is °O”, OF2 is °1°, OF2 is °0
°, the value specified by the operand code is subtracted from the content AR of the A register 510, but the result is not written to the A register 510; however, this operation is based on the operation rather than the result. As a result, it checks whether the carry clip flop 540 is set or not, and ultimately the contents of the A register 510 and the operand
It compares the data specified by the code.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as LT.

When OF2 is “Oo”, OF2 is “1” and OF2 is “1”.
”, the command is to subtract the data specified by the operand code from the content AR of the A register 510, and then write the result to the A register 510, a so-called subtraction command.In the following explanation, SU about this command
It is called B.

When OF2 is “1”, OF2 is “0°” and OF2 is “0”.
” indicates that the exchange of data specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is invalid whether the carry flip-flop 540 is reset or set. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as N0OP2.

When OF2 is “1”, OF2 is “0” and OF2 is “1”.
”, the A register, the contents AR of the register 510, and the operand
This commands that the data exchange specified by the code is invalid when the carry flip-flop 540 is reset, but valid when it is set; flip flop 54
This instructs data exchange to be performed only when 0 is set. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SW.
It is called C.

When 0P75E is “l”, OF2 is “l” and OF2 is 0.
At this time, the exchange of data specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is valid when the carry flip-flop 540 is reset, but invalid when it is set. In the end, it is a carry flip-flop 54.
This instructs data to be exchanged only when 0 is reset.

In the following explanation, this instruction will be referred to as SWN.0 When P7 is "1", OF2 is "l'-1", and OF2 is "1", it is commanded by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code. This command indicates that the exchange of data to be carried is valid whether the carry slip-flop 540 is set or not reset;・This is a command to perform an exchange. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWU.

In addition, in the case of the data exchange explained above, the A register 51
If the operand with which data is exchanged with 0 is B register 512 or C register 514, A register 5
10 contents AR can be written to the operand,
If the operand is fixed data or setting data, the contents AR of the A register 510 cannot be written to the operand. Therefore, in this case, the operand data is unilaterally written to the A, -v raster 510 rather than data exchange, which is a so-called data read operation, but in this embodiment system, a data exchange command and a data read command are particularly distinguished. This data exchange command acts as a data exchange instruction only when the operand is a register, and acts as a data read instruction when the operand is other than a register.

As described above, this instruction ROM 504 has the eight instruction systems described above.

Next, the operand code will be explained.

O20 distinguishes whether the operand is fixed data or variable data, and when O20 is '0', the operand is fixed data and the fixed data ROM-
534 to specify fixed data specified by OP3 to OPQ. When O20 is still 0”,
The operand is variable data, and the data selector 5
It specifies the variable data input from each input terminal of a=i in 02.

When O20 is 0'', that is, regarding fixed data, OP
3~The data specified by OPO is OF2. OF2
．． When OPI and OPO are 'oooo', C3To data with all bits 'O', and when OPI and OPO are '0010', it is 11100000'
(7) C8TC data, when “0100”, “1101”
000-0” OCS TD data, “0110” “00011111”+7) C3TE data, “0”
When it is 111″, it is C3TF data with all bits “1”,
Also OF2. OF2. O.P.I.

When the OPO is '1000', the lowest shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is TMIN, '1001'.
'', the maximum shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is TMA4, and when the value is 1010'', the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2 is AMA4, and when the value is ``1011'', the strobe is controlled by the camera device body 4. Synchronized shutter speed T
The first constant C8Tl for the calculation when SYN is 1100'', and the second constant C3T2 for the calculation when 1101'' are each data.

When O20 is "l", that is, regarding variable data, O
The data specified by P3 to OPQ is OF2. OF
2. When OPI and OPO are '1000', D register 5
16 contents DR1, that is, 6 DTD with AD conversion data DD
R1"1001"+7) DTSV, 1010" D T T V, '1011" DTAVS 11
DTAO when “00”, DTAC when “1101”, “1”
110'', the content of the B register is BR, but D
When TBR is "1111", the contents of the C register are CR (7) DTCR.

The instruction ROM 5017) 7) "Response, instruction and operand code comparison table is shown in FIG. 70(a).
- Shown in (h).

FIG. 70(a) shows the instruction F
This routine is selected when all A7 to A5 terminal inputs of LOM504 are 'O', and is applied when not in flash photography mode, when the shutter speed is set to J and the aperture is not stopped down, or when in external metering mode. This routine corresponds to the third routine shown in FIG.

What is shown in FIG. 70(b) is A7. of instruction R, OM504. As when A6 terminal input is 0”
This routine is selected when the terminal input is "1", and is applied when the flash photography mode is not set, aperture priority is set and the aperture is not stopped down, or when the external metering mode is set. This corresponds to the first routine shown in FIG.

What is shown in FIG. 70(C) is A7. of the instruction ROM 504. When As terminal input is '0', A
This routine is selected when the 6-terminal input is "1", and is applied when the aperture is prioritized when not in strobe photography mode, when the aperture is stopped down, and when not in external metering mode. This corresponds to the second routine shown in FIG.

Also, FIG. 70(d) shows a routine that is selected when the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is 0" and the A6.A5 terminal input is "1", and shutter priority is given when not in strobe photography mode. This routine is applied when the aperture is closed and the external photometry mode is not in effect.This routine corresponds to the fourth routine shown in FIG.

Also, FIG. 70(e) shows a routine that is selected when the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is 1'' and the A6.A5 terminal input is 0'', and the strobe is fully charged and enters strobe photography mode. This routine is applied when the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set on the strobe device side and the shutter speed on the camera device side is semi-automatically controlled at the same time. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the fifth routine.

In addition, Fig. 70 (0 shows the instruction yR
OM5040A7. 'This is the routine selected when the A5 terminal input is 1" and the A6 terminal input is 6o", the aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the strobe device side, and at the same time the shutter speed on the camera device side is fully automatic. It is a real routine that is applied when controlled. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the sixth routine.

In addition, Fig. 70 (ω shows the instruction y
ROM 5, o4 A7. A when the A6 terminal input is “1”
This is a routine selected when the 5 terminal input is "0", and is applied when the aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and at the same time the shutter speed on the camera device side is semi-automatically controlled. be. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the seventh routine.

Also shown in FIG. 70(h) is the instruction
ROM504f) A7. A6. This is a routine that is selected when the A5 terminal input is 1", and is applied when the aperture value of lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and at the same time, the shutter speed on the camera device side is fully automatically controlled. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the eighth routine.

Incidentally, when photographing using an external photometry adapter, the first or third routine is adopted depending on the state of the ASLC signal, but in that case, unnecessary calculation steps are not executed. That is, in the case of photometry using an external photometry adapter, there is no need to consider the open aperture value AVo and the curvature chain difference AVc of the photographing lens device 2 during photometry compared to TTL photometry, and therefore the first or third routine In executing the above, the step of performing correction calculations for the open aperture value AVo and the bending error AVc may be ignored. Incidentally, the steps in the first and third routines are shown in FIG. 70(a),
As is clear from (b), the ADD-DTA of the 8th step
O,! : is the 9th step ADD-DTAC.

Also, especially when executing the 5th to 8th routines,
When the A-D converter overflows, the signal ADOF indicating this is generated as a signal indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 during strobe photography. If the -D converter 382 overflows, the signal ADOF indicating this indicates that the data obtained as a result of photometry is too large. Therefore, in that case, it is necessary to issue some kind of warning, and furthermore, it is necessary to set the contents of the register whose contents have become unknown due to overflow to the maximum capacity of that register, that is, all bits are "1". This operation can be handled completely equivalently to an overflow of the A register 510 when film sensitivity Sv, maximum aperture value AVo, bending error AVc, etc. are added to photometry result BVO. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the A-reverse converter 382 overflows when not in the strobe photography mode, during the step of executing the first to fourth calculation routines, the step next to the above-mentioned addition step is performed. That is, in the A-th step, a direct set signal is applied to the carry flip-flop 540, and the carry flip-flop 540 is set.

Furthermore, the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation while executing the first to fourth routines is the maximum or minimum limit of the aperture value of the lens device 2 or the shutter speed that can be controlled by the blur 4. If the limit is exceeded, a warning must be given to indicate this.

This can be easily achieved by blinking the aperture value or shutter speed displayed on the digital display 402. This operation is a step of determining whether the aperture value or shutter speed is within the limit value of the aperture value or shutter speed after the aperture value or shutter speed is derived as a result of the calculation, and setting or resetting the carry flip-flop 540. Based on the state, it is sufficient to generate the aperture value display blinking signal AVFL or the shutter speed display blinking signal TVFL. flop 540
Just look at the output.

As mentioned above, the overflow caused as a result of A-D conversion
If the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation exceeds the control limit value, the aperture position display or shutter speed will be displayed on the digital display 402. A logic circuit 586 generates a signal for blinking the display.

The logic circuit 586 is connected to the carry flip-flop 5.
40 and the output of the program selector 580, the output of the carry clip flop 540 is determined by a specific address designated by the program selector 580, and the digital display 402 receives the output of the carry clip flop 540.
A signal is sent to blink the shutter speed or aperture value displayed on the screen.

The shutter speed flashing signal TVFL output from the logic circuit 586 is temporarily stored in a flip-flop 588 and then applied to a multiplexer 594, and the aperture flashing signal AVF is stored in a -H flip-flop 590. is applied to multiplexer 594.

The conditions for blinking the shutter speed or aperture value displayed on the digital display 40-2 have been described previously, so the explanation will be omitted here. It will be explained in detail later whether this occurs under certain conditions.

Note that this logic circuit 586 is connected to R from the logic circuit 598.
The flip-flops 588 and 590 are reset by the R8ND signal.

As mentioned above, when using an external photometry adapter, the 8th.
Generating a signal to ignore the 9th step, directly setting the carry clip flop 540 depending on the ADOF signal generated when not in strobe shooting mode, and controlling AD conversion overflow and various data. The logic for giving a blinking signal to the digital display 402 in response to an overflow resulting from the addition of , or exceeding the limit value of the aperture value or shutter speed determined as a result of calculation is all provided by the program selector 580. It has a close relationship with the output of

A circuit configuration diagram for realizing such logic is shown in FIG.
4-bit latch consisting of 14 (manufactured by Motorola)
This shows a 16-line decoder. This integrated circuit element MC14514 has a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 72 and the logic diagram of FIG. It is configured so that it is decoded and output to the output line.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 71, program selector 580
Of the outputs Q1 to Q5, Ql-Q4 is input to the DI-D4 terminal of the decoder 600. AND27 in the figure is for detecting the 8th step and 9th step in the 1st or 3rd routine and outputting the program execution regulation signal ■ in the external photometry mode. ,
The program selector 580 receives a signal indicating an external photometry mode obtained by applying the CU double signal and the AO double signal to the A/D gate ND30.
The inverted signal of Q5 output by inverter NV12 and the output of decoder 600 S8. It receives the signal input obtained from the S9 output through the OR gate OR9,
A device configured to output a signal (■) according to AND logic between a signal indicating that the system is in external photometry mode and a signal/signal indicating that the output of the program selector 580 is in the 8th step or 9th step. It is.

The AND gate AND28 also controls the first to fourth routines in the first to fourth routines when the result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382 starts to overblow when not in the strobe photography mode. 〇It is for detecting a step and outputting a set signal ■ to directly set the carry flip-flop 540, ~CU signal and ADO
F signal and gate AND2. :9 receives a signal indicating that the A-D converter 382 has overflowed when not in strobe photography mode, and also receives an inverted signal from the inverter INV12 of the Q5 output of the program selector 580. It also receives the input of the output 810 of the decoder 600, and when the system is not in the strobe photography mode, the "AI) OF double signal" is a signal indicating that the output of the program selector 580 is in the 10th step. It is constructed so as to output a signal (2) according to AND logic.

The AND gate AND25 is the digital display 402
This is to give an input to the J terminal of the clip flop 590 which outputs the signal AVFL for blinking the displayed aperture value, and the AND26 is a signal for blinking the displayed shutter speed of the digital display 402. TV,
This is for providing an input to the J terminal of the slip flop 588 that outputs FL. and gate AND24
inputs the ASLC signal and the CU multiplication signal, and outputs a signal indicating that the aperture value is selected preferentially when not in strobe photography mode, and this output is directly sent to the AND gate AND26. The signals are also input to the AND gate AND25 through the inverter INV13. This is because when the aperture priority mode is selected, the shutter speed is calculated and determined, so when the signal to command blinking comes, this signal is the AVFL.
7 lip-flops 59 (1) Ji for outputting signals
On the other hand, when not in aperture priority mode, that is, when shutter priority mode is selected, what is calculated is the aperture value, and therefore the signal that commands blinking is This is to ensure that when the signal arrives, there is no line at the J terminal of the flip-flop 588 for outputting the TVFL signal.

The signal commanding the blinking is sent from the OR gate 0R11 to the AND GO) AI'mD25. This OR gate output, which is given to the double gate of the AND 26, includes two conditions for outputting the signal commanding the blinking.

One is the first condition output through AND22, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being set; 540 receives the input of the set signal CA.

The other is a second condition output through AND23, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being reset.
The AND gate AND23 receives a reset signal CAO input from the carry clip flop 540.

The AND gate AND22 is the OR gate OFL1
The outputs 811 and 814 of the decoder 600 are input through the inverter INV12, and the Q5 output of the program selector 580 is input through the inverter INV12.
The program step that receives the A-fold signal input and is performed by the program selector 580 is configured to output "1" at the V-th step and the V-th step.

Further, the AND2:3 is the SO ratio output of the decoder 600 and the program selector 580.
Therefore, it receives the CA double signal input from the carry clip flop 540, and also receives the program counter 5'80's program counter 5'80.
When the step is the first or -G step, it is configured to output '1'.

Note that the conditions under which the carry signal CA is output from the carry flip-flop 540 will be described in detail later.

Note that the clip flops 588 and 590 both receive the clock pulse C through OR12.
Inverter INV14 of P and timing pulse TB7
It receives an inverted signal input. That is, these two flip rollers 7'588, 590 are synchronized with the rising edge of the first flop pulse CP at the time of the timing pulse TB7.

Further, each of the flip-flops 58'8 and 590 receives an R8ND signal at its terminal. As is clear from FIG. 70, this R8ND signal is used in common for all eight routines to end each routine that is being advanced depending on the program step input of the program counter 580. , steps, when the output of the program selector 580 reaches the Vth step or later, a CALFi signal indicating that the calculation is completed is output, and thereafter each data obtained as a result of the calculation is transferred. A command signal is output, but this signal is R8
This is an ND signal.

The CALE signal and R8ND signal are obtained through the logic configuration of a logic circuit 598 as shown in FIG.

The CALE signal is applied to Q5. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. It is output from the AND gate AND20 receiving the Q4 output and the AND gate AND68 receiving the inverted output of the Q3 output of the program counter 582 by the inverter INV23.

As is clear from FIG. 70, this CALE signal is a signal that remains high for four words from the Xth step to the Vth step of the program steps.

Further, the RS N Di number is Q2. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. The Q3 output is input through the OR gate OR8, and the output of the AND20, that is, the high level for 8 words from the Xth step to the Vth step of the program step, that is, the final step. A certain signal is input to A N D 9), and it is output from A N D 9. Therefore, as is clear from FIG. 70, the R8ND signal is a signal set to be at a high level for 6 words from program step A to V step 1, that is, to the final step. It will be output as .

However, as shown in FIG. 65, the direct reset terminal R8T of the program counter 582 has an OR signal.
The output of AND18, that is, Q3. An AND condition signal is provided between the QO output and the output of the AND gate AND20. At this time, the AND gate A
As is clear from FIG. 70, the output of the ND 18 is set to be at a high level only during one word of the Vth program step. However, this and
When the output of the gate AND18 becomes high level, the program counter 582 is immediately reset, so the output of the AND18 falls to the low level the moment it rises.

Similarly, the R8ND signal - also falls to the low level at the moment the program step enters the S-th step, so the REND signal is substantially the same from the S-th step to the S-th step. This will be output as a signal at a high level between words. Note that the CALE signal is an AND signal that forms part of the logic circuit 5718.
It is input to AND62. this and goo) AND6
2 receives the input of timing pulse TB5, so
While the CALE signal is at the level, the timing pulse T is
It outputs a 1" signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS. The CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBS is sent to the 4-word bus line 366 through the OR gate 0R22. Logic circuit 598 unconditionally places timing pulse 'PB4 from OR22 on bus line 366.

Therefore, the bus line 366 has iming...
A 4-bit "0'1" signal synchronized with BO-TB3, a "1" signal synchronized with the timing pano (bus TB4), a CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBS, and a timing pulse TB6. The ADCE signal is synchronously
The INT signals are respectively placed in synchronization with the timing pulse TB7.

Next, a more detailed circuit configuration for taking in the 30' data selector 502, the fixed data ROM 534, and the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographing lens device 2 to be used will be described with reference to the circuit configuration diagram in FIG. 715.

The fixed data ROM 534 includes CS, TO.

'C3TC, C3TD, C3TE, C3TF, TMIN
, TMAX, AM, AX, , TSYN, C8T1. C3
Eleven data of T2 are stored in series, and six pieces of the serial data are further arranged in parallel. However, the data regarding the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used is
Only AMhx is different for each of the six juxtaposed data, and the F numbers are Fil, F16. F22°F3
2. F45. Contains data regarding the value of F64. This fixed data ROM 534 can basically be constructed from an integrated circuit element 1702A shown in FIG. 68.

In such data arrangement, 1. Fixed data ROM5
34 receives the outputs OP3 to OPO of the instruction ROvi 504 at its A37A6 input terminal, and is designated with specific data of the serial zone.

Therefore, by inputting the counters () (buses CTI to CT4) to the AO to A2 terminals, the ROM 534
From the output terminals QO to Q5 of
The data will be output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with 7.

The outputs of QO-Q5 are
It is input to D31 to AND36, but this AND
The gates AND31 to AND36 are selectively rendered conductive depending on the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use. The outputs of these AND gates AND31 to AND36 are summarized in ORI 2, and the OR gates ORI 2 and
Fixed data specified by OM504 will be output.

On the other hand, data regarding the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 in use is taken into the central control unit 362 from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536, and is transferred to the 6-pit shift register 5.
38.

This shift register 538 has a logic structure shown in FIG.
The diagram shows an integrated circuit device CD4015
It can be configured using 6 bits. This shift
The outputs of registers 538 Q1-Q6 are always buffered.
The contents of the shift register 538 are changed in synchronization with the rising edge of the timing pulse TBO, which is applied to the input terminal Dl-D6 of the register 60-2 and is applied as a clock to the buffer register 602.
The data is taken into the register 602 and stored. That is, the data A M A taken into the shift register 538
X' is synchronized with TBICTB5, and therefore, at the timing of TB7, AMAX is completely captured in the shift register 538, so the contents of the shift register 538 are synchronized with the rising edge of TBO. Then, it is taken into the sofa register 602 and stored.

The Q1 to Q6 outputs of the buffer register 602 are given to the AND31 to AND36, and one of the AND31 to AND36 is selected according to the stored AMAX. It is intended to be electrically conductive.

By the way, the fixed data ROM 534 receives the OP output of the instruction ROM 504 at its τ terminal, and the OF4 of the operand code shown in FIG.
As is clear from the 0 term, only when this OF2 is '0', the data specified by the instruction yROM 504 is outputted through the QO to Q5 terminals.

Note that the buffer register 602 is an integrated circuit element C.
It can be configured by combining three D4013 (manufactured by RC'A). Incidentally, the integrated circuit element C
D4013 is a dual-wave D-type flip-flop as shown in the block diagram of FIG. - Through the above-described configuration, the fixed data R, 0M534 is
When specified as an operand, the fixed data stored in
The fixed data specified for 0 is sequentially output from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing curves TBO-TB7.

On the other hand, the wired-or gates OR1 and OR3 have
Output power of data selector 502; given. The logic of this data selector 502 is shown in FIG.
Integrated circuit element MC1, of which the diagram is shown
8 channels consisting of 45, 12 (manufactured by Motorola)
The data selector is configured to selectively output data input from the XO to X7 terminals from the Z terminal in accordance with input signals from the A, B, and C terminals. The A, B, and C terminals each have an instruction ROM 504 to opo.

Each output of Pl and O'P2 is input, and as is clear from FIG. 69, depending on the combination of outputs of OPO, OPI, and OP2, DR, DTSV, DTT, V, DTAV,
DTAO,' DTAC, BR.

Each variable data of ct3 is selectively output to the Z terminal. Note that this data selector 502 has an inverter INV14 connected to its DIS terminal to receive the OP4 signal, and an inverter 1 to its IN)1 terminal. NV15
The signal of OF2 is received through the OF2. of the operand code shown in FIG. As is clear from the OF2 section, □, this OF2. Only when OF2 is n1n, this data selector 502 outputs the variable data input from the XO to X7 terminals from the Z terminal and outputs it to the signal line IIO through the wired OR gate 0R13.

As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction yR
One selection based on the data selector 502 in OM504.
When the variable data to be selected is specified by the operand and 1, the signal line 1 is connected from the wired or day (wired or day) receiving the Z terminal output of the data selector 502 to the signal line 1.
The variable data specified as 0 is the timing pulse TB.
It is outputted sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with O to TB7.

Still, the logic circuit 592 is connected to the condition signal storage circuit 548.
MNAL signal, MNAL signal.

BLB signal, 5PDW signal, 5PDW signal.

It receives an input of an ASLC signal, and at the same time receives an input of a human ECG signal, a WNtJP signal, and a CU signal from the condition register 574. This logic circuit 592 discriminates the various signals according to a certain logic, and outputs the signals to the output control section 3.
The display control signal for the digital display 402 and the control signal for the output control unit 364 for the digital display 64 are generated.

This logic circuit 592 outputs a WNUP signal indicating that film winding has been completed, and a warning signal "EEEEE".
E" display command signal EDSP, pulp display "'bul
b” display command signal BDSP, “EF” display command signal EFDS, which indicates that strobe charging is completed when in strobe shooting mode, and the need to manually set the aperture of lens device 2. Display command signals Mp and SP indicating "M" are output.

The EDSP signal is generated when a multi-camera device is operated erroneously, as mentioned above.
As shown in the figure, when the mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2, the aperture of the lens device 2 is being tightened using the aperture laser e (-64), and the state where the film winding is completed. The mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2, and the lens device 2 still depends on the aperture lever 64.
Outputs are made based on two states: when the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is in the AE discharging state while the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is in the AE discharging state. 'That is, this EDSP signal is EDSP=SPDW-MNAL+8PDW-MNAL・
WNUP, ABCG・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・ It is output in a state that satisfies the following logical formula.

Further, the BDSP signal is a signal that is output when the valve signal BLB is 1''.

Further, the EFDS signal is a signal that is output when the CU multiplied signal is "1".

Further, the MDSP signal is used when the aperture value is set by the aperture value setting ring 8 of the lens device 2.
This signal is output in two states: either the lens device 2 is not being stopped down by the stop lever 64, or the stopping down is being done by the stop lever 64 in the shutter priority mode. That is, the MDSP signal is MDSP-8PUN-MNAL+SPT:NV-MNA
It is output in a state that satisfies the logical formula L-kSLC--Ql.

The logic circuit 592 has a logic diagram shown in FIG. In the same figure, and ge,
- AND37. AND38 DEG AND39 and OR (goo) OR14 is a logical configuration to satisfy the above equation 08), and the EDSP signal is obtained from ORI4.

Also, AND gate AND40. AND41 and OR gate) OR15 is a logical configuration to satisfy the above formula (19), and from OR gate 0R15, MDSP
I get a signal.

Output of the logic circuit 592 and flip 7CM;/
7”-588,59 (1) Output TVF, A, VF are:
It is then applied to multiplexer 594 and converted into a signal synchronized with timing pulses TB'O-TB7.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of the multiplexer 594, which includes an integrated circuit element M whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG.
C14512).

I can do things. This multiplexer has input terminals
Although it has X7, its XO terminal is grounded, and its X1 terminal has a WNUP signal.

il: AVFI, signal to X2 terminal, TV- to X3 terminal
FL double signal EDSP signal to X4 terminal, B to X5 terminal
A DSP signal is input, an EFDS signal is input to the X6 terminal, and an MDSF signal is input to the X7 terminal. These input signals are output from the Z terminal as signals synchronized with the timing pulses T0 to TB7, depending on the counter pulses CTl, C, T2, and CT4 input to the A, B, and C terminals. Output in series on line 0.

As described above, the WNUP signal is the timing pulse TB1, and the AvFv signal is the timing pulse TB1.
2, the TVFL signal is connected to timing pulse TB3, E
DSP signal is timing pulse TB4, BDSP
The signal is output to the signal line 0 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB5, the EFD.S signal with the timing pulse TB5, and the MD8P signal with the timing pulse TB7.

Incidentally, this multiplexer 594 receives the R8ND signal at its INH terminal, and while the R8ND signal is being output, the signal output from its Z terminal is restricted.

FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG.
NIL47 indicates the circulation gate of the B register 512, and AND49 indicates the circulation gate of the C register 514, respectively. A register 510. B register 512. In the normal state, the C register 514 inputs each of the AND gates AND45. AND4
7. Through AND49, each content AR, mrb
, CR is circulated.

This arithmetic circuit 500 includes the instruction ROM
Operation control instruction opo from 504.

OPI, OF2. OF2. OF2. OF2. OPO, O
It is controlled by F2. Said instruction R
, OM504 outputs the instruction code OP7., as shown in FIG. op6. op5 and operand code OP4
．． OP3. OP2° is divided into OPI and OPO, and this arithmetic circuit 500 decodes each code through a group of gates and performs necessary arithmetic and control operations.

This arithmetic circuit 500 also includes a 1.5 data selector 5
Various fixed data and variable data are fetched through the circuit 02, and these data are fetched from the output signal line [phase] of the circuit shown in FIG. 75 to the AND60. Note that this AND gate AND60 takes in the signal of the output signal line ■ of the circuit shown in the figure 71 through the inverter NV21, but when it is in the external photometry mode, this signal is input only during steps unnecessary for calculation. This is to restrict the import of operand data to prevent substantially unnecessary calculations from being performed. The output of this AND gate AND60 is AND
ND43 and exclusive or gate EX2 and AND, gate AND57. AND43 is given to AND59, but the AND43 is given to A register 5.
It is used when directly importing operand data into EX.
2 and the AND gate AND57. AND 59 is used when calculating data AR of A register 510 and operand data.

In Figure 79, Exclusive or Kate EX1, E
X2. EX3 and AND gate AND57°AND5
8. AND59. AND61. or gate 0R21
, flip-flop F21 constitutes an arithmetic section. The configuration of this calculation part is a well-known addition/subtraction circuit, and when OPO, which is the input of exclusive OR gate EX1, is 0'', it operates as an addition circuit, and when OPO is 1'', it operates as a subtraction circuit. It is something to do. As shown in the OPO section of FIG. 69, this configuration follows the instruction system of adding when OPO is "0" and subtracting when OPO is "1" in the calculation mode. In addition,
The flip-flop F21 is a carry flip-flop that stores the carry generated from the OR gate OR21-, but this is used to store the carry for carry in normal arithmetic operations. The carry generated by the digit operation (+)-f4D and the carry output from OFt21 at the timing of TR7 is an AND gate receiving the input of the signal obtained by inverting the timing pulse T''R7 through the inverter INV15. AND
61. The carry output from OR21 is the AND gate AND 5
．． Carry flip flop 540 J through 6
This carry flip-flop 540 runs its clock input and outputs the inverted signal of the timing pulse TB7 (the inverted signal by the INV16 signal and the clock signal) (the OR signal by the OR gate 0R23 of the pulse CP). Since the condition signal is input, this flip-flop 540 is set or reset in accordance with the terminal input to TB7 in synchronization with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the timing of TB7. Carry flip-flop 540 is timing pulse T
It is set by the carry generated in B7, that is, the carry generated at the final stage of the operation.

As is clear from Fig. 69, when not in the operation mode, the instruction code O20 is 1'', so the AND gate AND56, which receives the input of O20 through the inverter INV1.7, outputs is regulated.

As mentioned above, the carry generated as a result of the operation is
It is detected and stored by the carry flip-flop 540, and from its Q output, the CA multiplied signal “τ
Output as a signal.

Note that the calculation result obtained by the above-mentioned addition/subtraction circuit is outputted through EX3 and applied to AND gate AND44. The output of this AND gate AND44 is the OR gate ORI.
7 to the A register 510. Therefore, if this AND 44 is conductive, the result of the above operation will be introduced and stored in the A register 510. As is clear from FIG. 69, the calculation result is taken into the A register 510 in the calculation mode and when the A register ON command signal is issued. That is, when O20 is O" and OF2 is 1", the AND gate AND45 for data circulation in the A register becomes non-conductive, and the AND gate AND45 for taking in the operation result is
It would be good if D44 became conductive, and for that purpose, AND gate AND51. Inn common-evening INV2
1. It is Noah Gate N0R2. Said And Goo)
'AND51 receives the input of OF2 and the inverted signal of O20 obtained through the inverter INV21, and
20 is "0" and OF2 is "l", that is, the output command from the instruction ROM 504 is ADD or SU,
It is configured to output "1" only when the AND gate AND51 outputs "1".
ND44 makes AND44 conductive and is also inverted through NOR gate NOR'2.
and go) is given to AND45, and the gate A
ND45 is prohibited.

Through this configuration, the operation result is introduced into the A register 510.

AND goo) AND43 is AND gate AND6
This gate is provided to input fixed or variable data input through 0 into the A register 510, and the outputs of AND gates AND52 and AND53 are input to the other input terminals through the OR gate 0R16. is recieving. The AND gate ANp52 and AND5
3 is conductive unless at least O20 is l'', that is, in the data exchange mode, as is clear from FIG.

The AND2-AND52 also receives the Q output CA of the carry flip-flop 540 and the input of OP5, and as is clear from p11000, OF2 is 1.
``When the carry CA is ``1'', the ``I I+ ratio'' is output. Furthermore, the AND53 also receives inputs from the Q output CA of the carry flip-flop 540 and OF2, and as is clear from FIG. When CA is 0'', it outputs ``1''. Through this configuration, the AND gate AND52 output becomes ``1'' when the SWC instruction or SWU instruction is passed; (Goo) The AND53 output becomes "L" when the 8WN instruction or SWU instruction is passed.

Through the above configuration, when in the data exchange mode, if the output state of the carry flip-flop 540 matches the condition to be output from the instruction ROM 504, a 1" output is made from the OR gate 0R16, and the AND gate AND43 In order to make conductive, the variable or fixed data of the operand introduced through the AND gate AND60 is captured and stored in the A register 510.At this time, the O, A gates 0R1
The “1” output of 6 is output through the NOR gate N0R2.
Since it is given as a signal to the AND gate AND45, circulation of the A register 510 by the AND45 is prohibited.

On the other hand, the output of the A register 510 is the AND gate AN
This is given to D46 and AND48, but this means that in data exchange mode, the operand data is B? When using the register BR or CR, the A register 51
This is to read the operand data into 0 and at the same time ask the operand for the data previously stored in the A register 510.

B register 512 or C register 51 as an operand
4 is selected, as is clear from FIG. 69, OF2.4 is selected among the operand codes. OF2. OF2. OP
All I's become l''. This means and ge'-)AND
50 detected. On the other hand, at this time, if the OPO is 00'', the B register 512 is selected, and if the OPO is 1'', the C register 514 is selected. Therefore, opo is directly applied to AND55 and at the same time is applied to AND gate AND54 through inverter lNV2O.

Since the output of the AND gate 50 and the output of the OR16 are given to this AND54, the B register 512 is specified as an operand in the data exchange mode, and the Only when the conditions are met, the AND54 is
1'' output, and this 61'' output is OR gate 0R.
20 through AND 46). Therefore, the AND gate AND46 is not conductive, and therefore, the data in the A register 510 is taken into the B register 512 through the AND46 and ORI8. At this time, the 1" output of OR gate 0R20 is inverter'-
Since the data is applied to the AND gate AND47 through the register INV18, the AND gate AND47 for circulating the data BK of the register 512 is prohibited. Also,
The AND gate AND55 has the output of the AND gate 50 and the OR gate 0R16 in addition to the OPO signal.
Since the output is given, only when the C register 514 is specified as an operand in the data exchange mode and the conditions for data exchange are satisfied, the above AND Go)A
ND55 outputs "1" and connects the AND gate AND
Give to 48. Therefore, the AND gate AND46
becomes conductive, and therefore, the data in the A register 510 becomes the same as the above AND48. Or Goo) ORI 9
It will be taken into the C register 514 through. At this time, the l'' output of the AND gate AND55 is
Inverter INV19 is connected to AND gate AND4
9, therefore AND'49 for circulating data CR in the C register 514 is prohibited.

Furthermore, since the carry flip knob 540 receives the input of OF2 at its terminal, it enters the data exchange mode and synchronizes with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the time of the first timing pulse TB7. However, at the timing of TB7, the commanded data exchange has been completed.

Above 1. Through the configuration as described above, this arithmetic circuit 5
00 performs necessary calculations or data exchange according to instructions from the instruction ROM 504,
This arithmetic circuit 500 according to each routine shown in FIG.
By operating , the A register 510 finally contains the following information, regardless of whether it was obtained as a result of Act 1 or was initially set.
The control aperture value or data regarding the aperture value to be displayed on the digital display 402 is obtained, and the B register 51
2, control data related to the shutter speed for display and control is obtained, regardless of whether it is obtained as a result of calculation or initially set, and the C register 514 contains control data for controlling the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2. Control data can be obtained.

As mentioned earlier, when the calculation by the calculation circuit 500 is completed, the R, SN, and D signals are output from the logic circuit 598 receiving the output of the program counter 582. The SND signal is a signal that is at the no-y level for three words after the calculation is completed.

The R8ND signal is applied to the AND gate AND42. of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG. is given to the NOR gate N0R2, the OR gate OR20, and therefore the AND gate AND42. AND46 becomes conductive, and the AND gate AND45. AND47 is prohibited. Therefore, the output of the register is AND42. directly connected to the A register 510 through the OR gate 0R17;
Since the output of the register 510 is directly connected to the B register 512 through the AND gate AND46 and the OR gate 0R18, the A, Data AR of each register B and C.

BJCR is the content BR of B register 512.

The contents of the A register 510 and the contents CR of the AR7C register 514 are sequentially output.

The signal line 0 output of the j multiplexer 594 shown in FIG. 78 and the output line @ output of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG.

This output logic circuit 596 has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 80, and is responsible for loading time-controlled data and signals onto the output bus line 374. , Monoderuru.

This output logic circuit 596 has an OR gate 0R24 at the output end to the output bus line 374, and the output of the signal line 0, the AND gate AND
64. Each output of AND63 is given. signal line 0
The outputs of timing pulses TB1. - WNUP signal synchronized with TB7, AvF
output bus line 374 through OR'24
It will be posted on. This multi-purpose Lexa 59
As mentioned above, the output of No. 4 is regulated during the 3-word period when the R8ND signal is at the floating level.
- On the other hand, when the R, S, and N D signals become high level, this NO-I level signal goes to the AN, D signal line receiving the signal line @ output from the arithmetic circuit 500.
65 is considered to be conductive. This AND65 output is given to the AND gate AND64, but this AND64 receives the signal BLB from the setting condition storage circuit 548 indicating the nokulp mode and the condition register 574 which indicates that it is not the strobe shooting mode. Signal C indicating
The AND gate AND64 becomes conductive unless it is in the strobe photography mode and the shutter speed is set to pulp. Therefore, through the AND gate AND'64, R8N
The B register 512 . A register 510. C register 51
The contents BR, AR, . . .

On the other hand, if the flash photography mode is not in effect and the shutter speed is set to pulp, the output of the NAND3 becomes "0", and therefore the AND gate AND64 is prohibited. Therefore, the data output from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the signal line
It cannot be placed on line 374.

However, in such a pulp photography mode, 1. As mentioned earlier, regarding the aperture value, the aperture value is controlled and the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 is controlled.

is displayed on the digital display 402.

Therefore, all bits of data for controlling the number of aperture stages are 0.
", but in order to display the maximum aperture value AVo, it is absolutely necessary to transfer the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used to the output control section 360. For that purpose, the aperture value to be controlled, i.e. The open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 to be used may be placed on the nox line 374 at the same timing as the data AR of the A register 510 is placed on the nox line 374.・Gate A
ND62. AND63 is provided. The above A N D 6' 2 is inputted with the Q5 output of the program counter 582 and the 811 output of the decoder 60.0, and therefore, this AND D6'
When the data 5 AR of the A register 510 is output from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the output line 0, '1' is output for the same 1 word.
The AND63 receives the output of the NAND gate NAND3 through the input terminal INV22, and also receives the output of the AND62 and the ■ signal from the circuit shown in FIG. 37, that is, DTAO.
Therefore, if the bulb is selected when the flash photography mode is not set, the photography lens device 2 to be used is opened at the same timing as the data AR of the A register 510 is output from the arithmetic circuit 500. Aperture data AVO is placed on output bus line 374 through OR gate 0R24.

FIG. 81 shows bus line 366, input gas line 370. 3 is an explanatory diagram summarizing what has been previously described regarding signals and data placed on output bus line 374. FIG.

That is, the bus line 7 line 366 carries an "O" signal between the timing pulses TBO and TB3, and the C' signal is carried in synchronization with the timing pulse TB5.
The ALE signal is carried in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, the ADCE signal is carried in synchronization with the timing pulse TB7, and the I and NT times signal is carried in synchronization with the timing pulse TB7.
The signal is sent to the input control section 360. Central control unit 362. Each part of the output control unit 364 has important plugs for determining the timing for data transfer.

In addition, the input bus line 370 plays an important role in transferring various signals and data from the input control section 360 to the central control section 362 based on timing nodes TBO to TB7. , when transferring various signals, the ADOF signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBI, the AELK signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2, the AECG signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB3, and the AECG signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4. WNUP signal, AO multiplication signal in synchronization with timing pulse TBS, CU multiplication signal in synchronization with timing pulse TB6, and data (in this case, A-D conversion data DD). In case, timing nokurusu TBO
~ In synchronization with TB7, % amateur data is sequentially loaded from the lower digits.

Further, the output bus line 374 plays an important role in transferring various signals and data from the central control unit 362 to the output control unit 364 based on the timing interval TB7, and transfers various signals. Sometimes, the WNUP signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBl, the TVFL signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2, the AVFL signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB3, and the E is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4.
BD in synchronization with DSP signal, timing pulse TB5
EFD in synchronization with SP signal and timing pulse TB6
MDSP in synchronization with S signal and timing pulse TB7
Each signal is loaded with data, such as shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, and open aperture value AV.
In the case of O, the controlled aperture control number AVs, etc., data of % amateurishness is sequentially loaded from the lower digit in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7.

Next, the output control section 364 will be explained.

The output control section 364 has two main functions. One is a display control function and the other is an exposure control function.

Various condition signals and various data are input to this output control section 364 from the central control section 362 through an output bus line 374. Since these signals and data are input under temporal control, in order to know what kind of signal or data is input to the output bus line 374, it is necessary to check the signal or data. It is necessary to know the time when the output bus line 374 is placed on the output bus line 374.

A synchronization circuit 660 receiving a signal input from bus line 366 is provided to obtain this time.

A detailed circuit diagram of this synchronous circuit 660 is shown in FIG. 82, where 700 is a ring counter. The ring counter 700 can be implemented using an integrated circuit device CD4035 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

Since the bus line 366 is input to the D terminal of a seven-day flip-flop F22 that operates in synchronization with the evening timing pulse TB6, this flip-flop F22 inputs the timing signal (synchronized with the bus TB5). bus line 3
66 is detected. The Q output of this flip-flop F22 is the output of the flip-flop F2 which operates in synchronization with the timing pulse TBO.
It is applied to the D input terminal of No.3. The Q output of this flip-flop F23 is outputted through the AND gate AND66 inputted with the timing signal 7.
This signal is input to the clock terminal CLH of the clock counter 700. This ring counter 70() is the Q
O, Q3 output through AND gate AND67, J
And it is returned to the terminal. It should be noted that the clock pulse is output to the QO ratio output signal line [phase] of the ring counter 700, and the clock pulse (<or-goo receiving the input of CP)
It is output to the signal line 0 through OR27, and the Q1 output is the OR gate 0 which receives the input of the clock bus CP.
It is outputted to the signal line [phase] through R26, and the Q31 output is outputted to the signal line (2) through OR25, which receives the input of the clock bus CP.

Note that the Q output of the clip-flop F23 is input to the S terminal of the flip-flop F24, and the Q output is output to the signal line @.

This flip-flop F24 has a power
An up clear signal PUC is provided.

Further, a direct reset signal is inputted to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 from a signal line [phase] which will be described later.

The operation of this configuration will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

Now bus line 366 has timing bus TB5
When a synchronized CALE signal is placed on the timing
Flip-flop F22, which operates in synchronization with pulse TB6, is set and its Q output becomes "P1". Since the CALE signal is output for 4 words, this flip-flop F22 "L" output continues between words.

The Q output of the flip-flop F22 is synchronized with the timing pulse TBO' to the nose-clip flop F22.
Since it is input to the D terminal of 23, this flip block F is synchronized with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO.
23 is set and its Q output becomes "1". This flip-flop F23 is similar to the flip-flop F2
Since 2 is in the set state for 4 words, it will continue to be set for 4 words in the same way.

The Q output of the clip-flop F23 is connected to the AND gate AND6, which receives the timing pulse TBO.
6, the AND gate AND66 outputs a signal synchronized with TBO for 4 words after the flip-flop F23 is set.

Since the output of this AND gate AND66 is given to the clock terminal CLK of the ring counter 700,
This ring counter 700 is a timing pulse TB
QO,' Ql, Q2 . The Q3 output terminal outputs as shown in Figure 83. In addition, this ring-f)7ta700t7)QO,Ql,Q
The output of 2 is input to the AND gate AND67, and the output of this AND gate AND67 is input to the J and 2 terminals in order to output the count output from the QO terminal at the start of counting. It is. Note that the output polarity of this ring counter 700 is normally "1" and becomes "0" when outputting a count because the T/C terminal is grounded to obtain such an output characteristic.

Therefore, a signal is output to the signal line [phase] at the 0'' level only for the next 1-word time when the CALE signal is first detected.

Also, from the OR gates 0R25, 0R26, 0R27, as shown in FIG.
At each rising time of TB7, pulse outputs having falling characteristics are output from the signal lines o and @)I@, respectively. In addition, the falling output of signal line ■ is output bus line 3.
The falling output of the signal line [phase] corresponds to the word time when the shutter speed data TV is loaded on the output bus line 366. , the falling edge of the signal line corresponds to the word time at which the control aperture stage number data AVs is placed on the output bus line 366. This is due to the transmission time of the various signals and data mentioned above. It is clear from the relationship between

On the other hand, Flip 70 tube F24 has a fringe.

- This clip-flop F24 is set by the Q output of the flop F23. The output signal from the terminal to the signal line 0 is used to prevent the camera mechanism from performing any operation after the shutter release until the first operation j is completed. This clip flop F24
receives the power up clear signal PUC at its reset terminal R. This bus line 366 also connects a 7-lip flop F2 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO.
This flip-flop F
25 is an INT signal that is placed on the bus line 366 at the time of the timing φ pulse TB7, that is, the input control section 360.
is used to detect a signal indicating that the A-D converter is integrating input analog data, and its Q
The output is placed on the signal line ◎.

The flip-flop F23 of this synchronization circuit 660 receives a direct reset signal input from the signal line [phase] to its direct reset terminal R, but this is due to the time before the shutter release and the shutter release time. The setting operation of the 7-lip flop F23 is prohibited so that data etc. are not input to the output control section 364 at any time other than when the self-dimer is operating. It is for. This is done after the shutter release is performed based on a certain calculation result and each mechanism of the camera device starts operating.
This is to prevent other data, particularly when TTL photometry is being performed, from inputting data affected by aperture stop or mirror up, thereby preventing normal exposure control operation from being disturbed.

Various signals and data on the output bus line 366 are separated based on temporal judgment based on the output from the synchronization circuit 660 and the timing pulse TBO: TB7 as described above, and this output control section These functions will be incorporated into the corresponding functional parts of H.364.

The various signals on the output bus line 366 are combined into timing pulses T B □ by a demultiplexer 610.
, based on T B 7 (separation, output control system)
622.

Such demultiplexer 610 and output control register 6
22 is shown in detail in FIG. 84, and the demultiplexer 610 includes:
The integrated circuit device CD4015 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 62 is used, and the integrated circuit device CD403 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG. 38 is used as the output control register 622.
Two items of 5- are applied.

In such a configuration, the demultiplexer 610 connects its clock terminal CK to the signal line [phase] of the 82nd illustrated circuit 660.
It receives the output input and also outputs the output control register 62.
2, the AND condition signal of the signal line 0 output of the signal line 0 of the leg cycle circuit 660 in FIG. 82 is inputted to the ± clock terminal C via the AND gate AND69. That is, as mentioned before, the CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulses TBS is placed on the bus line 366, and at the next word time, the CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulses TBI-TB7 is loaded. As shown in Figure 81, the output bus line 378 includes WNUP, TVFL, AVFL,
EDSP, BDSP.

Since the EFDS and MASP signals are input, the demultiplexer 610 takes in the signals in series between these words using the signal line 0 output as a timing pulse. After such an operation, at the next word time, the signal line @
Since the output changes from a low level to a high level, the AND gate AND69 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB1, so that QO1, Ql -1, Q21 . Q31.
QO2゜Ql2. Each output of Q22 is taken into the output control register 622 from the Do-B6 terminal and stored therein. As a result, MDSP is output from each output terminal of QO-Q6 of the output control register 622.

EFDS, BD, SP, HDSP, AVFL, TVFL
.

Each signal of WNTJP will be output.

On the other hand, each data on the output bus line 374, such as shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, and control stage number AVS, is handled as data for controlling each mechanism of the camera device and data for display. are different.

Now, to explain how to import data for display,
In the output bus line 374, there are two pieces of data used for display: shutter speed data TV and aperture value data AV. These signals are rounded off through the display control circuit 652 and converted into a form suitable for display on the digital display 402. Also, in order to prevent the digital display 402 from flickering due to sudden changes in data, data capture is performed. The display aperture value is set in the register 648 for displaying the aperture position based on the word time that is loaded on the output bus line 374. The speed TVDS is respectively fetched and stored in the shutter speed display register 650.

FIG. 85 shows a detailed logic configuration diagram of the data import circuit for such display.

In the figure, 998 is a rounding circuit for rounding off the data input from the output bus line 374, and is constituted by an integrated circuit element CD4032 (manufactured by RCA). This integrated circuit device CD4032 is formed by three serial adders, the block diagram of which is shown in FIG. 86, and the logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. In the circuit shown in No. 85, only one of them is used.

Rounding circuit 998 receives the output data of output bus line 374 at its A1 terminal, and receives the input of timing pulse TB1 at its B1 terminal. Further, a timing pulse TB7 is input to the carry terminal CA.

In such a configuration, the output bus line 374
When data is input to the terminal, the number of precision bits is T
Although it is input at the timing of BI, a timing pulse TBI is input to the Bl terminal at the same timing. That is, only the % degree bit of data is “1”.
11 will be added, but if 'I' is set in this %R precision bit, a carry will be generated in the %R accuracy bit and a carry will be performed, and the data will be 0” force on the % amateurish bit; if it is standing, the carry will not reach the % amateurish bit. Therefore, as long as we look at the upper digits of the output data from the S terminal of this rounding circuit 998 by the % amateur level bits, this output data is the % amateur level data rounded off using the % amateur level bits. becomes.

As described above, in the rounding circuit 998, the data is converted into % amateur data suitable for display, and the data output from the S terminal is sent to the aperture value display register 64.
'8 and the D terminal of the shutter speed display register j6so. It should be noted that at this stage, it is necessary to determine what the data rounded off by the rounding circuit 998 and converted to % amateur level is based on time-based judgment.
50 takes in corresponding data in accordance with control pulses input to respective clock terminals C. Note that this rounding circuit 998 is reset by receiving the timing pulse TB7 at its carry terminal CA.

The aperture display register 648 connects the clock terminal C to the clip 70 knob F2 through OR31.
Input the OR condition of the q output of 7 and the clock pulse CP.
and the shutter speed display register 6
50 receives at its clock terminal C the Q output of the clip flop F26 and the OR condition of the clock pulse CP through the OR gate 0R32.

The Q output of the flip-flop F26 is the D input of the flip-flop F27, and the D input of the clip-flop F26 is connected to the inverter INV25.
It receives the output of OR29 (through ORGOO). On the other hand, the flip-flop F27. The Q output of is given to the set terminal S of flip-flop F28,
Its Q output is given to OR28.

OR28 is the inverter INV24
From the signal line [phase] connected to the signal source described later via
2H2 on/off signal is input 1. The output signal of the second OR gate 0R28 is OR
Given to 29. This OR gate 0R29, on the other hand,
It receives a signal input from the signal line o, which is the QO terminal output of the ring counter 700 shown in the 82nd figure. Incidentally, the 2 Hz on/off signal from the signal line @ is also applied to the reset terminal R of the flip-flop F28 through the OR gate OR,30. The above-mentioned OR gate 0 is also connected to the glue set terminal R of this flip-flop F28.
A power up clear signal PUC is input through R30. On the other hand, the flip-flop F26. F2
The power up clear signal PUC is also input to each direct reset terminal R of 7.

With such a configuration, its operation will be explained according to the timing chart of FIG. 88. When the 2H2 signal sent from the signal line [phase] goes to the A level, the output of the inverter INV24 goes low.・It becomes the level. In this state, the 7-lip front knob F28 is in the reset state, and its Q output is '0
”, the output of the OR gate 0R28 is “0”, therefore, the OR gate 0FL29 is the QO ratio output of the ring counter 700 shown in the 82nd figure inputted from the signal line [phase]. , usually "1", the next 1 of the CALE signal
It is possible to output a signal that becomes O” only between words.

The output of this OR gate 0R29 is the inverter ■Nv2
5 to the D terminal of the flip-flop F26 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, so this 7 flip-flop F26! "L" is output from the inverter INV25 for one word, and only for the next one word.
It becomes set state. While this flip-flop F26 is set, this corresponds to the time when the 7-speed speed data TV is loaded on the output bus line 374, so the ζ output of this flip-flop F26 and the clock pulse CP OR gate 0R32 receiving the input of
When a clock pulse for data acquisition is applied to the shirt i speed display register 650 through
VDS will be captured and stored in the register 650. On the other hand, since the ζ output of the clip-flop FZ6 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F27 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, this flip-flop F27 is connected to the clip-flop F26.
It remains set only for the next one word between the one word in which it is set. Therefore, this flip-flop F27
The period during which is set corresponds to the time when aperture value data AV' is loaded on the output path line 374, so the ζ output of this flip-flop F27 and the input of the clock pulse CP are received. Or Gate 0R31
When a clock pulse for data capture is applied to the aperture value display register 648 through the aperture value display register 648, the display aperture value AVDS from the rounding circuit 998 is captured and stored in the register 648.

Note that since the ζ output of the flip-flop F27 is given to the set terminal of the flip-flop F28,
Said flip-flop.

When F27 is set, this flip-flop F28 is also set, and its ζ output becomes 1". This ζ output is OR.
Goo) In order to set the output to OFL28 as 1'',
The output of OR28 becomes l" and is given to the OR gate 0R29. Therefore, the signal from the signal line ◎ does not pass through OR29, and both flip-flops F26 and F27 are reset. Therefore, the corresponding data for the shutter speed display register 650 and the aperture value display register 648 are not updated.

The Conoflip 70 tube F28 receives the inverted signal of the 2H2 signal from the signal line [phase] through the inverter INV24 through OR, 3o, so the 2Hz signal becomes low level. It will be reset at that point.

On the other hand, the 2H2 signal that has become low level is passed through the inverter INV24 to the OR2 signal.
Since a "1" signal is given to signal line 8 and its output is set to "1", the signal from signal line 0 is maintained in a state where it cannot be accepted.

Next, when the 2H2 signal from the signal line [phase] goes to the A level, the output of the flip-flop F28 becomes "0".
”, the signal from signal line 0 can be received, and therefore, by the same method as described above, the shirt '
The new displayed shutter speed TVDS is input to the register 650 for displaying the aperture value, and the register 648 for displaying the aperture value
, the new display aperture value AVDS is respectively taken in and stored.

Through the above-described configuration, data for displaying both the shutter speed and aperture value is captured every 2 Hz, so flickering due to small changes in data within the digital display 402 may occur. This method can prevent errors and misreading, and is an extremely effective data capture or display method for digital display systems.

As described above, the displayed aperture value AVDS and the displayed shutter speed TVDS, which have been rounded to the aperture value display register 648 and the shutter speed display register 650, and which have been taken in at 2Hz intervals as % amateur data, are , the next display control circuit 624 and the display driver 65
6 will be displayed on the digital display 402.

The display control circuit 624 does not simply display the aperture value and appropriate shutter speed, but also displays symbols, etc., and controls blinking of the display, as shown in FIG. 10, depending on the operation mode and operating state of the camera device. etc., and for that purpose, various signals TV, F, which are taken in from the output bus line 374 and stored in the output control register 622, are
L, AVFL, ED8P, BDSP, EFDS, MD8
P and others are involved.

The detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624 is shown in FIG. 89. In the same figure, 702 is a decoder ROM for displaying the aperture position, and the second one of the display in the viewfinder in FIG. The aperture value and "OP" on the display section 250 of
”, “cL”.

This is for displaying symbols such as "oo" and "EE", and 704 is a decoder ROM for displaying the shutter speed, and is for displaying the shutter speed on the first display section 244. It is also 706
"EEEE"' for the first display section 244
, “buLb”, “bEF”.

The digital display 402, which indicates a decoder ROM for displaying symbols such as "EF", is dynamically driven based on the timing pulses TB1 to TB6 as described above. The details are shown in FIG. 90, which is a plan view of one digital display 402.

In the figure, the first display section 244 is composed of a display element 708 for displaying fractions, four 7-segment display elements 710 and 714° for displaying shutter speed and symbols, and a decimal point display element 712. However, the 7-segment display element 718 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB3, the 7-segment display element 716 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB4, and the 7-segment display element 714 and the display element for fraction display are driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB4. 70
．． 8 is driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB5, and the 7 segment display element 710 and the decimal point display element 712 are driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB6.

In addition, in the figure, the second display section 250 includes a 7-segment display element 720. 724 and a decimal point display element 722, and the third display section 252 is composed of M"
The 7-segment display element 724 and the display element 726 for displaying "M" are configured by a timing pulse TBI.
The display is driven at the timing of 7 segment display element 7.
20 and decimal point display element 722 are timing pulses T
The display is driven at timing B2.

Therefore, each of the seven segment display elements 71o.

714, 716. 718. 720. Timing pulses TBO to TB in parallel with 7 rises for 724
7, and the "M" display element 726, the decimal point display element 722,
712 and the display element 708 for displaying fractions, timing pulses TBI, TB2 . TB6. T
The digital display 402 can be dynamically driven by providing synchronized display signals to each of the display signals B5.

In addition, as the display device 402, R'7A-122-9 (
(manufactured by BOW MAR) can be used.

The aperture position display decoder R,0M702 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 68, and its input terminal AO
receives the timing pulse TB2, the input terminals A1 to A6 receive the aperture and position display register 648, and the input terminal A7 receives the EDSP signal from the output control register 622. There is.

Also, the C8 terminal has a timing pulse TBI,
The output of NOR3, which receives the input of TB2, is input through OR gate 0R40.

Therefore, the output of the aperture position display decoder ROM 702 is restricted at least at times other than the timings of jBl and TB2. Therefore, at the timing of TBI, the input to the person's O terminal is 0'', and at the timing of TB2, the input to the person's O terminal is ``1''. Then, at each timing of the timing pulses TBl and TB2, the 7-segment display element 724 and the 7-segment display element 720 of the digital display 402 are output from the output terminal DO-D7.
1. Outputs 8 lines for display driving of the decimal point display element 722.

Note that the 7-line output of Do-D6 of this decoder ROM 702 is used for segment selection of the 7-segment display elements 720 and 724.
The output of one line of D7 of 2 is the decimal point display element 722.
They will be used for selection drive respectively.

The shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has a sixth
It is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 8, and its input terminal 'AO receives timing pulses TB4. The output of TB6 (or goo) OR, which receives the input of TB6, receives the output of 3g;
(or goo receiving B60 input) receiving output of OR39. Further, input terminals A2 to A7 receive the output of a shutter speed display register 650. Also, a timing pulse 'l' 131. T.B.
The output of the NOAH GU) NOR 3 which is receiving the input of NO. Therefore, the output of the shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 is regulated at least at the timings of TBI and TB2. Therefore, the output of this decoder ROM 704 has meaning at the timing of TB3 to TB6, but at the current timing <<< TB4. TB5. When neither TB6 is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, the inputs of the AO and AI terminals are both 0'', and when the timing pulse TB4 is input, only the input of the O terminal is n-1. ”, and when the timing pulse TBS is input, the AI end terminal force becomes “L”, and when the timing pulse TB6 is input, the AO and AII child inputs become “L”. Both become '1'. Therefore, according to the output from the shutter speed display register 650, at each timing of the pulses TB3 to TB6, the output terminals Q-D and 7 are connected to the 7-segment display element 7 of the digital display 402, respectively.
It outputs 8 lines for display driving the 18.7 segment display element 716, the 7 segment display element 714, the fraction display element 708, the 7 segment display element 710, and the decimal point display element 712.

Note that the 7-line output of DOND6 of this decoder ROM 704 is the 7-segment display element 7110.714.
, 716, 718, and one line output of D7 of the decoder ROM 7''C2 is used for selectively driving the fraction display element 708 and the decimal point display element 7'22.

The symbol display decoder ROM 706 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 68, and its input terminal AO receives the timing pulse TB4. The input terminal A1 receives the input of the timing pulses TBS and TB6 through the OR gate 0R39. Also,
"EF" is input to input terminals A4 to A6, respectively.

A signal is input to command the display of "bEF", "buLb", and "EEEE". In addition, the C8 terminal is connected to the inverter INV3 to output the output of NOR3, which receives timing pulses TBI and TB2.
4. Input through OR gate OR41. Therefore, the output of the shutter speed display decoder ROM 706 is regulated at least at the timings of TBI and TB2. Therefore, this 'decoder ROM70
The output of 6 has meaning at the timing of TB3 to TB6, but now the timing
When neither B6 is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, both the inputs of the AO and AI terminals become O'',
Also, when timing pulse T'B4 is input, only that person's O terminal input becomes 1", and when timing pulse TBS is input, only that person's 1 terminal input becomes l". , and timing pulse TB6
When is input, that AO.

Both AI terminal inputs become 1". Therefore, this decoder ROM 706 outputs digital data from the output terminals Do-D6 at each timing of pulses TB3-TB6 according to the inputs of the person's 4-A7 terminals. - Outputs 7 lines for display driving of the 7 segment display element 718. ~D6
The 7-line output of the 7-segment display element 710,
It will be used for segment selection of 714, 716, and 718.

In addition, each of the decoder ROMs 702.7'04°706
The respective Do-D6jl forces are collected and given to the display drive circuit 656 as a total of seven lines of signals.゛Also, each D7 of the decoder ROM 702, 704
The outputs are combined into one line and applied to the display drive circuit 656 through an OR gate 0R37. As the display drive circuit 656, a 2m long 75491 (manufactured by TI) is used.

On the other hand, the signal for displaying the 'M' symbol display element 726 is obtained by outputting the MDSP signal by the AND gate AND74 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1. The output of
Through the OR gate 0R37, the decoded RO
It is applied to the display drive circuit 656 together with the D7 outputs of M702 and M704.

Note that the output of each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704, and 706 is regulated by various factors. In particular, since each output of the decoder ROMs 704 and 706 is output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6,
It is necessary to select one of them and output it.

If you still want to make the shutter speed display data blink,
It is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder ROM 704 once at a fixed cycle, and when you want the aperture value display data to blink, it is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder ROM 702 at a fixed cycle, and furthermore, the error warning display "EE EEEE" ” is displayed blinking, it is necessary to regulate the outputs of the decoders R, 0M 702, 706 at a constant cycle, and furthermore, during the integration of input analog data by the A-D converter in the input control section 360, That is, while the INT signal is being input, the light emitted from the digital display 4'02 in the viewfinder is T.
Since there is a risk of adversely affecting the TL photometry system, it is necessary to restrict the output of all decoder ROMs 702, 704, and 706, and disable the digital display 402. Furthermore, the camera device mechanism must be set for exposure. During operation, there is a risk that the light emitted from the digital display 402 in the viewfinder may have an adverse effect on the exposure, and when taking pictures during the self-timer operation or during long exposure times. In order to prevent wasted battery consumption due to unnecessary operation of the digital display 402, all decoder ROMs 702, 7
04°706 output regulation and digital display 4
It is necessary to make 02 inoperable.

In FIG. 89, the NOR gate N0R5 has a signal line [phase],
A signal is input from O, but from the signal line [phase] there is a signal that becomes "1" before the exposure control mechanism of the camera device starts operating, and from the signal line O, there is a signal that becomes "1" before the exposure control mechanism of the camera device starts operating. A signal that becomes "1" after the exposure control mechanism completes its operation is input to each of them. Therefore, this Noah Ge2-
When the exposure control mechanism of the camera device is in operation, a signal that becomes '1' is output from OR gate N0R5.The output of this NOR gate N0R5 is output from OR gate 0R3.
given to 4. On the other hand, this or gate has the 82nd
An INT signal indicating that integration is in progress is input from the illustrated signal line 0, and therefore, the output of the OR34 is used to erase all displays on the digital display 4-02.

This will act as a blanking signal. Said or
The output of gate OR34 is inverted from OR gate OR35 through inverter INV27 and given to AND gate AND74 as a '0' signal, so AND74 has its output regulated, and therefore M
``Blanking will be applied to the selection display signal for the display.

On the other hand, the output of the OR35 is sent to the cs terminal of the decoder ROM702 through the OR gate OR40.
Decoder RO through OR gates 0R42, 0R43
OR gates 0R42, 0R4 are connected to the C8 terminal of M704.
3 to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM 706, each output of the decoder ROM 702, 704, and 706 will be blanked, so the display on the digital display 402 will be restricted. Become.

Note that the clock pulse CP is given to the gate 0R35, and when the output of the OR34 is 0, a signal synchronized with the clock pulse CP is always output. However, the signal synchronized with this clock pulse CP is sent to each of the decoders R and 0M702.
, 704 and 706, it is used for blanking so that unnecessary data is not displayed on the digital display 402.

Now, for the digital display section 402', the first
The shutter speed is displayed on the second display section 244, and the aperture value or "CL'!" is displayed on the second display section 250.
When displaying a symbol such as op"oo" and, if necessary, displaying M" on the third display section 252, the BDSP signal, ED8F signal, and EFD8 signal are of course "O", Therefore, as mentioned earlier, for the I terminal of the decoder ROM 702, TBI, ! -TB2
The blanking signal is applied to the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM 704 at the timings TBz and TBz, as described above. On the other hand, for the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM 706, the BDSP signal, ED8P signal and BFDS
The output of the NOR gate N0R4, which is receiving the output signal of the AND73 which is receiving the input signal, and whose output is "L", is the output of the OR gate 0R4.
1 as a blanking signal. Therefore, the output of this decoder ROM 706 is regulated.

Therefore, based on the outputs from the decoder ROMs 702 and 704, the digital display 402 displays the shutter speed on its first display section 244, and the aperture value or cL"," on its second display section 250. OP", 00"
Symbols such as ``M'' are displayed on the third display section 252, if necessary.

In such a display state, if the aperture value currently calculated as a result exceeds the limit that can be controlled by the lens device 2, the display of the aperture value should be made to blink (with the AV and PL multiplication signals). I have already mentioned that "■" is output, but in this case, this AVFL signal is the 2H2 on/off signal.
Inverter IN from the seven signal lines [phases] on which the off signal is carried
Since the 2Hz on/off signal is given to NAND3 through V33, a 2Hz on/off signal is output from this NAND gate NAND3 and input to NAND4. . On the other hand, this NAND4 receives the input of NAND2, but since the EDSP signal of NAND3 is 0', its output is "1". Therefore, the NAND4 outputs an on/off signal of 2 Hz. This NAND gate NAN'D4 output is
Goo) C8 of decoder ROM70.2 through OR40
The signal is input to the terminal, and the output of the ROM is blanked at 2Hz.

Therefore, the aperture position display displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 is caused to blink at 2H2 by the decoder R,0M702.

Also, if the shutter speed determined as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit that can be controlled by the body 4, the shutter speed display should blink (it has already been mentioned that "1" is output as the TVFL signal). However, in this case, this TVFL signal is sent from the signal line [phase] on which the 2H2 on/off signal is carried, and is given to the AND gate AND72 to which the 2Hz on/off signal is given through the inverter INV3.3. This and gate AN
A 2H2 on/off signal will be output from D72. The output of this AND7'2 is sent to the decoder ROM704's ℃S through the OR gate 0R43.
input to the terminal, and blanking is applied to the output of the ROM with 2H2. Therefore, this 'decoder R,OM 7.0
4- the first display section 2 of the digital display 402;
The shutter speed display displayed at 44 will be blinked at 2 Hz.

Next, when the strobe photography mode is entered and a charge completion signal is given to the input control section 360, the central control section 362 outputs the "1P signal" as an EFDS signal, as described above. However, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, "EF" is displayed on the first display section, indicating the shutter speed to be controlled and the completion of charging.

Note that the shutter speed to be controlled is determined by the fractional display element 708.
．． 7 segment display element 71o.

714 and a decimal point display element 712, and a decoder ROM 704 and a timing pulse TB.
5. TB6 is involved, and the EF" display indicating the completion of charging is performed by the 7-segment display elements 716, 718, and the decoder ROM 706 and the timing pulses TB3 and TB4 are involved.

Now, when "1" as the EFDS signal is input to the A4 terminal of the decoder ROM 706 shown in FIG. 89, the timing pulse T'B3. T.B.
The signal output during 4 makes the 7 segment display elements 716, 718 to the first display 'EF'.

On the other hand, a shutter speed display signal is applied to the decoder R, 0M 704 from the shutter speed display register 650. Note that since the shutter speed at this time is less than the strobe synchronization shutter speed (for example, 1/6'0 second), the 7-segment display elements 710 and 71 of the first display section
It does not exceed the range indicated in 4.

In this state, the AND gate AND73 has the EFD
S signal is input, but 1. This and gate AND7
3 is the timing pulse TB3.3 through the OR gate OR,44. Since it is receiving input from TB4, this AND
Goo) AND73 is "1" at the timing of TBS and TB4
``'' will be output. This 1" output is input to NOR gate N0R4, and in order to make its output "0'",
The output of this NOR gate N0R4 is connected to the inverter INV3.
The decoder ROM704 which is input to the C8 terminal through OR43 is TB
Blanking is applied only between the timings of S and TB4,
Also, the output of the Noah Goo) NOR4 is
De:7-1” input to vI terminal through R41
Blanking is applied to the ROM 706 at timings other than TBS and TB4, that is, between TBS and TB6.

Therefore, in the strobe photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 displays the shutter speed and "
EF" will be displayed. On the other hand, the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 will display an aperture value display register 648 unless the strobe is in the full flash mode.
Aperture value data is output from , and according to the data,
A signal of the displayed aperture value is output from the decoder ROM 702-, and the aperture value is displayed. Further, for the third display section 252 of the digital display 402, the MD
If the SP signal is win, "M" is displayed.

Also, if Pulp is selected as the shutter speed,
As mentioned before, a 1" signal is output as a BDSP signal, but at this time, the first display section displays "buLb" as shown in Figure 1O(b). When 1" is input as the BD8P signal, this "1' signal is input to the AND gates AND70 and AND71, but the AND gate AND70 is connected to the EFD
8 signal is input through the inverter INV30, and since the EFDS signal is directly input to the AND71, as long as the EFD8 signal is '0',
The output of the AND gate AND70 becomes 1'' and is input to the A6 input terminal of the decoder ROM706.

As a result, the decoder ROM 706 outputs a signal to cause the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 to display "buLb". In this state, the BDSP signal is input to the NOR gate N0R4. In order to
The output of N0R4 is inverted through the inverter INV32, and the decoder ROM704 inputted to the C8 terminal through OR43 is programmed, and the output of the NOR gate NOR,4 is inputted to C8m through the OR gate 0R41. 'A71#ifiichi' to the child,
The 6der-7-ROM 706 will output a signal for displaying "buLb". So you're in pulp photography mode. Then, "buLb" will be displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402.

On the other hand, the second display section 25 of the digital display 402
0, unless the MDSP signal is "1", the open aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used is displayed according to the output signal from the aperture display register 648, and if the MD8P signal is "1", The aperture value is not displayed, but "M" is displayed on the third display section 252.
As shown in Figure 0 (b).

As mentioned above, if you are still in strobe photography mode and bulb is selected as the shutter speed, 1" signals will be output as the EFDS signal and BDSP signal, respectively. At this time, the first display section shows "bE" as shown in FIG. 10(C) and (d).
F" is displayed. When "1" is input as the EFDS signal and BDSP signal, the output of AND71 which is receiving 11 inputs becomes "1", and the A5 terminal of the decoder ROM706 As a result, the decoder ROM 706 outputs a signal to cause the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 to display "buLb". BDSF in such a state
Since the signal is input to NOR4, its output is set to 0''. Therefore, the output of this NOR gate N0R4 is inverted through inverter 1Nv32, and then input to the C8 terminal through OR43. The decoder ROM 704 is blanked, and the decoder ROM 706 is inputted to the C8 terminal through the OR gate 0R41.
will output a signal for displaying “bEF”. Therefore, in the strobe photography mode and the pulp photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402
"b EF" will be displayed. On the other hand, unless the strobe is in the full flash mode, the aperture value data is output from the aperture display register 648 to the second display section 250 of the digital display 402, and the display aperture value is output from the decoder ROM 702 according to the data. A signal is output and the aperture position is displayed.

If the MD8P signal is still 1″1″ for the third display section 252 of the digital display 402, then
"M" is displayed.

Also, when a “1” signal is input as the EDSP signal,
The first and second display sections 2'' of the digital display 402
At 44.250, a blinking display of "EEEE EE" is made.

In this way, when the "l" signal is input as the EDSP signal, the EDSP signal is input to the input terminal of the person 7 in order to cause the decoder ROM 702 to output a signal for displaying "EE". , decoder ROM706
For that person, an EDSP signal is input to the person 7 input terminal in order to output a signal for displaying "EEEE".

On the other hand, this EDSP signal is input from the signal line [phase] on which the 2H2 on/off signal is mounted, to the node INV3.
Since the on/off signal of 2H2 is given to the NAND gate NkND2 through 3, a 2Hz on/off signal is output from NAND2 and input to the NAND gate NAND4. . On the other hand, this NAND gate NAND4 is NAND gate NA
It receives the output of ND3, but this Nando Goo)NA
As long as the AVFL signal among its inputs is "0", ND3's output is "1", so the NAND gate NAND4 outputs a 2Hz on/off signal, which is output by the OR gate 0R40. through decoder ROM
fo2 is input to one terminal, and the output of the ROM7o2 is blanked by 2H2. Therefore, the decoder ROM 702 causes the "E'E" display displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 to blink at 2H2.
The 2Hz on/off signal that is the output of D2 is inverted through the inverter INV28, and the
After being matched in phase with the 2Hz on/off signal output from NAND4, it is input to the positive terminal of the decoder ROM706 through the OR gate OR41, and the R,0M70
Apply blanking to the output of 6 with 2H2. Therefore, the digital display 40 is controlled by this decoder ROM 706.
EEEE" display displayed on the first display section 244 of 2 will be blinked at 2Hz. On the other hand, the HDSP
Since the signal is input to the NOR gate N0R4, this NOR gate NoR4 must output an O".
The output of the decoder ROM 704, which is input to the C8 terminal through the OR gate 0R43, is completely regulated.

As mentioned above, when there is a “1” signal input as an EDSP signal, the digital display 402 shows “EE”.
EE EE" will be displayed blinking at intervals of two cities.

Next, detailed description will be given of how control data is acquired from output bus line 374.

The control data carried on the output bus line 374 is data TV for controlling the shutter speed and data AVs for controlling the number of stops. Tatsu, j), CAL
1 synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7 during the next one word time when the E signal is placed on pass line 366.
/8 step precision data is placed on the output bus line 374, and as mentioned above, the narrowing step number control data AVs is 3 words after the CA L'E signal is placed on the bus line 366. Timing the 1st word of the eye
It is placed on the output bus line 374 as 1/8 step precision data synchronized with pulses TBO to TB7. That is, the shutter speed control data TV is transmitted to the foot cycle circuit 6 in FIG.
60 is synchronized with the output of the output signal line [phase], and the narrowing stage number control data AVs is synchronized with the output of the signal line [phase]. In other words, the shutter speed control data TV can be taken in from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output, but this shutter speed control data TV is based on the apex value, that is, the actual shutter speed in seconds. Since it corresponds to a logarithmically compressed value of the reciprocal of time, some kind of arithmetic operation is required to obtain data corresponding to actual shutter speed seconds from shutter speed data TV corresponding to the apex value. That is, in order to make this shutter speed data TV a signal of a magnitude corresponding to the actual shutter speed, it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed control data TV from the apex value of the shutter speed that is the reference. The data obtained as a result of this subtraction corresponds to the number of stages corresponding to the apex value in the control shutter time.

The real time can be obtained by exponentially expanding the data obtained in the above based on the reference shutter speed. As mentioned above, in order to obtain the real time from the shutter speed equivalent to Apex, it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed data TV from the reference shutter speed. This is a subtraction circuit 612.

The control shutter speed gator TVs obtained through the subtraction circuit 612 as described above is input to the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626, but each of the registers 614 and 626 receives the shutter speed gator from the synchronization circuit 660. Based on the control signal that specifies the speed data acquisition time.
Then, the shutter time control data TV is separated from the output bus line 374 and is captured and stored. Incidentally, the shutter speed control register 614 is the integer part of the shutter speed data TVs, and the shutter control register 626
is provided to store the decimal part of the shirt data TV.

On the other hand, the aperture cutting stage number control data AVs can be taken in from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output.
s separates the aperture stage number control data AVs from the output bus line 374 based on a control signal that specifies the acquisition time of the aperture stage number control data AVs from the synchronization circuit 660 in the aperture stage number control register 628. The data will be captured and stored.゛Data for control as explained above, that is, the shutter speed control data TV and the number of aperture stage control data AV
The detailed logic diagram of the configuration for inputting s is shown in FIG.

As is clear from FIG. 91, the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626 are integrated into an integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is the signal line [phase] output shown in FIG. The stage switching control register 628 is composed of an integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is the signal line 0 output shown in FIG.

The detailed logic diagram of the integrated circuit element CD401'5 is shown in FIG. 62.

In the configuration shown in Figure 91, AND75,
AND76. AND77. AND78. OR e-gate 0R45, 0R46, exclusive OR gate EX4. EX5. Ia/Z-ta INV35.
-y lip--y lodge F29. Noah Dart N0R
5 is a well-known subtraction circuit configuration, and the timing φ pulse TBO− is applied to the NOR gate N0R5.
The data input to the output bus line 37-4 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBO-TB7 is subtracted from the data input in synchronization with TB7, and the result is subjected to exclusive-or-go IEX5.゛Output in synchronization with jig pulse TBO-TB7. By the way, AND gate A is connected through the inverter INV35.
The purpose of inputting the timing pulse TB7 to ND78 is to prevent the carry that occurs at the final stage of the operation and to
This is to prevent a carry from being transferred to an operation in BO-TB7.

Note that for NOR5 (Noah Goo), the equivalent value of the apex of the shirt speed, which is the reference for the shirt speed control, is input, but in this example, the maximum speed of 2000 minutes is input. 1 second is taken as the reference shirt time,
Therefore, the binary code data corresponding to the shirt time of 1/2000th of a second is input to the NOR5. This data will be shown later, but
10101000", and therefore, if this data is synchronized with the timing pulses TBO to TB7, "1" input will be given to the NOR gate N0R5 at the timing pulses TB7.TB5.TB3°. In order to realize the configuration, in this embodiment, the timing control pulse TB3.T is applied to the NOR gate N0R51/;
B5. Inputting to TB7.

The output data from the exclusive OR gate EX5 of the subtraction circuit 612 having the above-described configuration is applied to the input terminal of the shutter speed control register 614+626, but at this stage, the data is not actually controlled. It is unknown whether or not it is compatible with Shishata Second Time TV.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the shirt timing control register 6
14+626 clock terminal C, output bus line 3
The signal output from the output signal line [phase] of the synchronization circuit 660 is applied at the same word time when the data TV regarding the shutter speed is loaded on the synchronous circuit 74. As a result, the registers 614+626 separate and collect the shirt time control data TV from the output of the subtraction circuit 612 and store it therein. Through this operation, the shutter speed control data TV is output in parallel from the higher digits to the lower digits from each terminal QO-Q7 of the shutter speed control registers 614+626, and the QO-Q4 output is an integer. , and Q5 to Q7 respectively correspond to the decimal part. On the other hand, the distal filter 28 that controls the number of stages of aperture receives the output bus line 374 at its input terminal, and the clock terminal of this register Since the signal outputted from the output signal line [phase] of the synchronization circuit 660 is input to C at the same word time as when the narrowing stage number control data AVs is loaded on the output bus line 374, The register 62
8 from among the data in the output bus line 374;
This is to separate the narrowing-down stage number control data AVs and to collect and store them. Through this operation, the narrowing cutting stage number control data AVs is output in parallel from the output terminals QO to Q7 of the narrowing cutting stage number control register 628 from the upper digit to the lower digit.

As described above, the shutter speed control register 61
Exposure control operations in the mechanical part 358 of this camera system are performed based on the shutter speed control data TV stored in the camera 4+626 and the aperture step number control data AVs stored in the aperture step number control register 628. However, this camera mechanism portion 358 and its operation sequence will now be explained.

This camera system is provided with a shutter release means 396 in the mechanical part 358. Aperture control means 398. As mentioned above, the operation is controlled through the three electromagnetic mechanical conversion means called the shutter speed control means 400, and now the operation of each control means will be explained.

Most of the mechanical mechanisms of this camera system are no different from traditional camera mechanisms.

The shutter release means 396 is an electromagnetic solenoid that is interlocked with a trigger mechanism that runs a mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism by being energized for a certain period of time, and
The AE lever 94 is used to preset the aperture value from the body 4 side by energizing this electromagnetic solenoid in a pulsed manner.
Mechanical sequence mechanisms operate, such as starting the movement of the lens, driving the aperture of the lens device 2, raising the mirror, and starting the movement of the front curtain of the 7-ocal plane shutter.

The throttle control means 398 is an electromagnetic solenoid that urges the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 toward the clamp release side when energized. is capable of traveling in the unclamped state, and is clamped when the power supply is stopped. In this configuration, before the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, the aperture control means 398 is energized to hold the clamp mechanism of the AE lever 94 in the clamp release position, and the camera The AE lever 94, which starts running when the mechanical sequence of the mechanism starts running, is kept in a state where it can run. Next, when the AE lever 94 starts traveling according to a mechanical sequence, the amount of travel is detected, and when the amount of travel reaches a predetermined value, the energization to the throttle control means 398 is stopped. 2. Return the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 to the clamp position to clamp the AE lever 94. As described above, it is possible to preset the aperture value of the lens device 2, and this has been described previously.

Further, the shutter speed control means 400 is an electromagnetic solenoid that, when energized, restricts the trailing curtain of the focal plane shutter from starting to run. The shutter trailing curtain is in a travel restricted state, and the running restriction of the shutter trailing curtain is canceled due to the energization being stopped, and the trailing shutter curtain starts running. In this configuration, at the same time as the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, the shutter speed control means 400 is energized to regulate the running of the shutter rear curtain, and after the glossy front curtain runs, the timer is started. When the measured time reaches a predetermined value, the current supply to the Nyatta speed control means 400 is stopped, and the travel restriction of the shutter rear curtain is released, and the shutter rear curtain is The exposure time can be controlled by starting the travel.

Note that when the shutter trailing curtain finishes running, the mechanical sequence mechanism performs a return operation of the mirror, the aperture reduction drive lever 98, and the like.

Note that the shutter release means 396. Aperture control means 398. It is necessary for the shutter speed control means 400 to accurately control its operation timing and operation time, and for this purpose, signals for accurate sequence control obtained according to various conditions are required. - Therefore, the control signal generation circuit 64 is provided in the next output control section 364.
It is 6. This control signal generating circuit 646 is connected to the shutter release means 396. Aperture control means 398. A drive control signal is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 for an appropriate time at a timing such that an appropriate exposure control operation is performed. , the timing at which the AE lever 94 travels through the number of aperture stages stored in the aperture stage number control register 628, and the timing at which the AE lever 94 travels through the number of aperture stages accumulated in the aperture stage number control register 628;
It is created based on the timing at which the real time corresponding to the shutter time data stored in the shutter speed data 26 passes, the time to compensate for the mechanical delay of the mechanical sequence mechanism, etc.

The output data of the shirt shutter time control register 626 and the output data of the narrowing stroke number control register 628 are as follows.
The signal is input to the length selector 632 and is selectively applied to the down counter 642 based on a command from the control signal generating circuit 646.

On the other hand, the output data of the shutter time control register 614 is sent to the select gate 618 along with the output data of the constant generation circuit 616 provided in order to generate constant data corresponding to time for various temporal controls. is entered in
The signal is selectively applied to the frequency dividing circuit 620 based on commands from the control signal generating circuit 646 and others.

Note that the down counter 642 connects the AE flavor 40 to its clock terminal via a select fist gate 640.
The pulse signal FPC input as the vehicle runs and the output pulse signal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 are input, and the data input from the data selector 632 is input through the select gate 640. The configuration is such that a subtraction count is performed based on the subtraction count, and a carry generated as a result of the subtraction count is given to the control signal generation circuit 646.

In this configuration, when controlling the number of narrowing stages, the narrowing stage number control data AVs is applied from the narrowing stage number control register 628 to the down counter 642 through the data selector 632.

On the other hand, a pulse signal FPC is input to the clock terminal of the down counter 642 via the select gate 640 in accordance with the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. At this time, when the AE lever 94 moves, the reduction counter 642 subtracts the aperture reduction stage number control data AVs in accordance with the pulse signal FPC. When a carry is output from the down counter 642 through this operation, this carry indicates that the number of input pulses of the pulse signal FPC is equal to the narrowing stage number control data A.
This indicates that the AE lever 94 matches Vs.
This indicates that the travel position at that time has reached the preset position corresponding to the number of aperture reduction control stages of the lens device 2. Therefore, the control signal generating means 646 to which the carry is inputted
By clamping the AE lever 94 through the aperture control means 398, the number of aperture reduction steps of the lens device 2 can be preset to the same value as the aperture reduction step number control data AVi.

In addition, when performing shirt time control now, the data
Through the selector, the Nyatta seconds control register 62
6 to the down counter 642 is given the data below the decimal point of the shutter time control monitor TV. Note that the down counter 642 adds "1" to the decimal data and inputs this data as data multiplied by 18. On the other hand, the clock terminal of the down counter 642 is connected to the select gate 64.
The output pulse of the frequency divider circuit 620 is inputted through 0. At this time, the frequency divider circuit 620 inputs the integer part of the shutter time control data TV from the shutter time control register 614 through the select gate 618, and then receives 1/1/2 of the reference time. It divides the frequency by a pulse signal of 8 and outputs a pulse.
The data input to p642 is transmitted to the frequency dividing circuit 6.
Subtracted based on 20 output pulses. Through this operation, when a carry is output from the down counter 642, this carry indicates that the output pulse number of the frequency divider circuit 620 matches data regarding the shutter speed control data of less than a decimal number, This indicates that the real time corresponding to the shirt time control data has elapsed. Therefore, the control signal generating means 646, which receives the carry signal, depends on the shutter speed control means 400 to start running the shutter trailing curtain, and adjusts the shutter speed to correspond to the shutter speed control data m. It can be controlled in real time.

In addition, to explain the shutter speed control in more detail, the shutter speed fermentation data TVs is 1/8
We are given data with a degree of precision, and we now write this data as TVs -P 10s (18)
Took. However, p and α are integer values. This data corresponds to the actual exposure time of TR-Y x 2(P" 8) (19) with respect to the reference time Y. However, 2(P + g) is calculated using a digital circuit. In order to do this, it becomes a complicated circuit, so in this example, 2" 13 == 2P(1+i)
(20) is coming soon. Therefore, the actual exposure time TR is expressed as TR=Yx2Px(1+W (21).This formula is TR=-X2P
X (8+α) (22) Since it can be replaced by With this divided pulse,
By subtracting and counting the data 8+α inputted into the down counter 642, the real time TR in shutter seconds can be obtained.

Furthermore, from the constant generation circuit 616, data for specifying the self-second time, data for compensating for mechanical start-up operation delays, data for determining the operation time of the shutter release means 396, and data for determining the operation time of the shutter release means 396, The data to generate the two on/off signals explained is output.

Both n and n are frequency-divided by the frequency dividing circuit 620.

After being converted into real time, the control signal generation circuit 646
and said shutter release means 396. Throttle control means 398. This is the basis of the output control signal for the shutter speed control means 400.

Next, the detailed operation of this output control section 364 and the detailed circuit configuration for realizing it will be explained.

In the camera system of this embodiment, the control states of the camera device are divided into eight states.

This is because the operation of the camera device is accomplished through various sequences, and the operation of the electrical control circuit must also correspond to such sequences.

In this camera system, CCO-CC7 signals are generated in order to specify the eight control states, and the operation of the camera device corresponding to each CCO-CC7 signal will be explained with reference to FIG.

The state of the CCO@ is as follows: photometric or analog data is taken in and converted by the input section 360, calculations are made by the central control section 362, and various data are displayed by the output control section 364. The CCO signal is held in the loop (■) until the shutter release button /18 is pressed. In this state, the photographer can check the display of various data on the digital display 402 in the finder 13 and change the setting data. Note that the state of the CCO signal is maintained as long as the EDSP signal is "1" or the first CALE signal is not output after the power is turned on.

The state of the CC2 signal is a cycle corresponding to the operation of the self-timer, and during this period, the digital display 402 stops displaying various data, but the input control unit 360
Photometric or analog data capture and A
-D conversion and calculations by the central control unit 362 are repeatedly performed, and during this time an LED rung 32 (described later) blinks to notify the photographer that the self-timer is in operation. Note that the transition from the CCO signal state to the CC2 signal state occurs when the shutter release button 18 is pressed and the SR signal - changes to "5ELF signal 1".
It is performed when the CC2 signal is in the state and the 5ELF signal becomes 0", or the E
When the DSP signal becomes "1", the camera device returns from the CC2 signal state to the CCO signal state (n).

The states of the CC3 to CC6 signals change in parallel with the transition of the mechanical sequence of the camera device mechanism section 358, and when the state changes to the state of the CO2 signal, energization to the aperture control means 398 is started. , the clamp mechanism of the AE lever 94 is biased toward the clamp release side, and the AE lever 9
4 is now drivable.

By the way, the state of the CO2 signal changes from the CC2 signal state when the self-timer operation ends (V), or when the shutter release button 18 is pressed, the 5ELF signal changes. The state of the CO2 signal obtained by directly transitioning from the state of the CCO signal when is "O" is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then the state of the CCO signal is Transition to signal state (Vl).

In the state of the CCI signal, the shutter release means 396 of the camera mechanism section 358 is energized to operate the trigger mechanism for starting the mechanical sequence. The state of this CCI signal is also held for a predetermined period of time, and is then shifted to the state of the next CC5 signal (■), but depending on the operation of the trigger mechanism, the mechanical sequence of the camera device starts running. do.

The state of the CC5 signal is an aperture control cycle,
According to the mechanical sequence, mirror up, A
Operations such as moving the E lever 94 are performed. This CC5
In the state of the signal, the aperture cutting stage number control data AVs is subtracted and counted based on the pulse signal FP output in accordance with the traveling distance of the AE lever 94, and the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC is equal to the data. AVs, or if not, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the state of the CC5 signal changes to the state of the CC4 signal (■), but at this time the aperture control The energization to the means 398 is stopped, and the AE lever 94 is clamped to restrict its movement. That is, this CC5
While the signal is in the state, the diaphragm is reset from the body 4 side of the lens device 2.

Note that the state of the CC5 signal ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and shifts to the state of the CC4 signal when the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC does not match the data AVs. This is applied when the aperture preset is manually performed on the lens device 2 side, or when the aperture value AMAX of the minimum aperture is automatically selected.

Note that when the CC5 signal enters the state □, energization to the shutter speed control means 400 is started in order to restrict the movement of the shutter trailing curtain.

Note that in the state of the CC5 signal, the aperture presetting and the aperture tightening operation of the lens device 2 by the aperture drive lever 98 are performed in parallel.

Next, when the state shifts from the CC5 signal to the CC4@ state, the shutter front curtain starts running as a mechanical sequence progresses. Depending on the start of the movement of this shutter front curtain,
Exposure of the film surface does not start immediately, but there is a mechanical delay time, so the state of the CC4 signal must be set to include correction to compensate for this time.

Next, when exposure is started by the start of the shutter front curtain, a CTST signal is input, and depending on this CTST signal, the state of the CC4 signal shifts to the state of the CC6 signal (II ).

The state of the CC6 signal is a shutter speed control cycle, and after entering the state of the CC6 signal, real time is measured based on the shutter speed control data TVs and the reference time Y, and the shutter speed control data is After a corresponding period of time has elapsed, the state of the CC6 signal shifts to the state of the CC7 signal (X). In this state of the CC7 signal, the shutter speed control means 400 that was previously energized is no longer energized. Solution 75: The rear shutter curtain starts and stops the exposure of the film surface. Note that after the shutter trailing curtain finishes running, the mechanical sequence performs a quick return of the mirror and aperture drive lever.

By the way, when the BDSP signal is in the state of "1", the switch SW linked to the shutter O-release button 18
As long as the signal SR from 2 is "1", the state of the CC6 signal is maintained, and when the SR signal becomes "0" again, the state of the CC6 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal. Become (■). This function is based on the fact that in the bulb photography mode, the release button 18 is used to directly manually control the shutter speed.

In addition, the state of the CC7 signal is such that even after shooting is completed, the data that is the basis of the exposure control that has been performed can be sent to the viewfinder 13.
This is a state where so-called post display is performed, which can be confirmed within the website. When the state of the CC7 signal is entered, the operation restriction 1 of the digital display 402 is canceled and various shooting information is displayed, but this shooting information is related to the exposure control that has already been performed. . Na3, this C
The state of the C7 signal changes from the state of the CC6 signal to the state of the CC7 signal if the signal SR is "1", that is, if the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed. In the intervening state, when the signal SR becomes '0', it immediately returns to the state of the CCO signal (XI).

Furthermore, if the signal SR has already become "0" at the time of transition from the state of the CC6 signal to the state of the CC7 signal, and if the release button 18 has already been released, After the system enters the CC7 signal state, it immediately returns to the CCO state.

Furthermore, even if the shutter release button 18 is held down while the CC7 signal is present, if the film is wound manually or by the motor drive device described above, the system will return from the CC7 signal state to the CCO signal state. This is an important function that can be achieved by holding the shutter release button 18 in a depressed state when continuous photographing is performed using a motor drive device.

As described above, in the camera system of this embodiment, the output control section 364 is placed in eight control states of the CCO to CC7 signals.

The sequence of each signal cco to CC7 explained above,
Shirt release/release means 396 in each of the signal states. Aperture control means 398° Shutter control means 40
The state of the energization signal for the electromagnetic solenoid 0 is the 93rd
This is shown in the sequence explanatory diagram in the figure.

In addition, in FIG. 93, PCI, Fe2. Fe2 is the CC
This is the basic signal for obtaining the 0-CC7 signal.

Now, the control signal generation circuit 646 and cc.

~Before explaining the CC7 signal, we will explain the basic configuration and operation for control based on the aperture control stage number data AVS and the shutter speed control data TV, and the configuration and operation for obtaining other temporal control signals. .

FIG. 94 shows the shutter second time limit register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
14, I constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 61
8. It shows a detailed configuration of the frequency dividing circuit 620,
In the same figure, 618A to 618D indicate No. 6.6.
Integrated circuit element CD4019 with detailed logic diagram shown in figure
A select gate consisting of four select gates, the third
0 constitutes the select gate 618 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the 'frequency dividing circuit 620 is an integrated circuit element MC14536.
(manufactured by Motorola). This integrated circuit element MC14531 is a proger pull tie whose block diagram is shown in FIG. □The total number of programmer pull timers is 24.
It is possible to divide the pulse signal input from the In terminal based on the 4-bit data input from each terminal A, B, C, and D and the signal input from the 8b terminal. It is configured such that it rotates around the clock and outputs from the DO terminal. In addition, the above A.

The 9 input data from each terminal B, C, and D is for up to 16 stages of frequency division, and the 8b terminal input is for further 8 stages of frequency division when it is 0''.

In FIG. 94, flip-flop F39 divides the clock pulse and sends its Q output to I of the frequency divider circuit 620.
This is for inputting to the n terminal. In this embodiment system, a 64 KHz pulse signal is used as the clock pulse, but through this configuration, the In terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620 receives a 32 KHz on/off pulse. will be applied.

This 32 KHz pulse is the basis for creating the 1/8 time of the reference time Y explained earlier,
When the input terminals A, B, C, and D are all 0'' and the 8b terminal input is 1, this frequency dividing circuit 620 outputs
It is configured to output a pulse signal with a period corresponding to X multiplied by 16 kHz from the terminal. That is, this frequency dividing circuit 620 divides the frequency of a 16 KHz pulse signal based on the input data from input terminals A, B, C, and D and the 8b end terminal input bone, and divides the 16 KHz pulse signal from the 0 terminal to the signal line O. This is what is output to. Note that this frequency dividing circuit 620 includes a reset terminal R, and is reset according to an input signal from a signal line O, which will be described later.

The select gate 618A has its A1 to A4 terminals input with the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the shirtter time control data TV from Q1 to Q4 of the shirtter time control register 614, and also has its B1 to B4 terminals input with the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the shirtter time control data TV. In this case, the data to obtain the self time of 8 seconds, that is, "1010" data is input, and the CC6 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Ka terminal.
A CC2 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Kb terminal.

That is, at the time of this select gate 618AFiCC2 signal, data regarding the self-second time is stored in its D1 to D4.
output from the terminal, and the lower 4 billets of the integer part of the shutter speed control data TV are outputted to one of the CC6 signals from D1 to D.
Output from 4 terminals.

In addition, the select gate 618B has fixed data input to terminals 1 to A4 for specifying the time of the CC3 and CC4 signals, which will be described later, and the time of the CC5 signal, which will be described later, to the terminals B1 to B4. Fixed data is input to specify a certain time. In addition, CC with
A time of 2 msec is used as the time for the 3° CC4 signal, and therefore "0110" data is input to the terminals A1 to A4.

Further, as the time of the CC5 signal, the AE lever 94
A call volume of 30m5ec is used in consideration of the traveling time of
0'' data is input.

It receives the CC3 signal input, and the Kb terminal receives the CC5 signal input. That is, this select gate 6
18B is 2m at the time of CCI and CC3/signal 1.
Data regarding a time of 5 ec is output from the D1 to D4 terminals, and data regarding a 30 mm time is output from the D1 to D4 terminals at the time of the CC5 signal.

In addition, the select gate 618C connects the D1 to D4 outputs of the select gate 618A to the person 1 to A4 terminals, and the select gate 6 to its B1 to B4 terminals.
The D1 to D4 outputs of 18B are input, and the Ka terminal receives the CC2 signal and CC2 signal through OR55.
6 signals are input to the Kb terminal, and the CCI signal and CC3 signal are input to the Kb terminal through OR gates OR56 and OR57.
signal, = CC5 signal is input.

That is, this select gate 618C is CC2°CC
At the time of the 6 signal, the D of the select gate 618A is
1 to D4 terminal output from the D1 to D4 terminals,
At the time of the CC1, CC3, and CC5 signals, the D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the select group 618B are
It is output from the D4 terminal.

In addition, the select gate 618D has its A1 to A4 terminals input the D1 to D4 outputs of the select gate 618C, and its B1 to B4 terminals the data for creating the 2Hz signal described above, i.e. , "1101" data is input.

Also, the Ka terminal has OR54゜0R.
Te cc 1 through 55, 0R56, 0R57.

CC2, CC3, CC5, and CC6 signals are inputted to the Kb terminal through the inverter INV47.
An inverted signal of the a terminal input is input.

Pl! This select gate 618D is CCI
.

At the time of each signal CC2, CC3, CC5, CC6,
The D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the select group 618C are outputted from the D1 to D4 terminals, and the times other than the above, that is, CCO and CC4.

At the time of each signal of CC7, data regarding the 2 Hz signal is outputted from the terminals D1 to D4.゛Select Goo) 618D's D1 to D4 outputs are:
The signals are respectively input to terminals A to D of the frequency dividing circuit 620.

On the other hand, the output from the QO terminal of the shutter speed control register 614, that is, the most significant bit of the shaft speed control data TV, is output from the NAND signal receiving the CC6 signal.
From AND 29, inverter Nv451. +7-G) is input to the D terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the OR53.

In addition, the frequency dividing circuit 62 is connected to the frequency dividing circuit 62 through the output of the NAND29, and the CC2 signal is inputted through the inverter Nv26'4.
Power is applied to the 8b terminal of 0.

In the configuration as described above, the states of the A-D input and the 8b terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 will be explained for each state of the signals CC0-CC7.

At the time of the CCO, CC4, and CC7 signals, the Kb terminal input of the selector 618D becomes "1", and the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", so the frequency division is The input terminals A, B, , C, and D of the circuit 620 and the terminal 8b are 1", "0", and "1°, respectively.
, “1”.

It becomes "1", so this frequency dividing circuit 620175D.

The O terminal outputs a pulse of 16 KHz divided into 1101" steps, that is, a pulse of 2 Hz.

At the time of the CC2 signal, the select gate 618
B1 to B4 terminal input of A is select goo) 618C
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and since the 8b terminal input becomes "0", the input terminals A, B, C, and D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the 8b Each input of the terminal is '0', 'l', '0' respectively.

Therefore, from the Do terminal of this frequency divider circuit 620 to the signal line O, a pulse output obtained by dividing the 16KHz pulse by "1010" steps plus 8 steps, that is, 16 seconds. A periodic pulse output is performed and an event occurs.

Note that this 16-second period pulse is used as the end of the self-timer time at the time when this pulse first rises from "0" to '1', that is, when 8 seconds have passed after the start of branching. There is.

Next, during the time of the CC3 and CCI signals, the A1 to A4 terminal inputs of the select gate 618B are input to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency divider circuit 620 through the select gates 618C and 618D. In addition, the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes each input terminal of D and each input of the 8b terminal becomes °0", "1", "1", "0°, 1", respectively, so that the frequency dividing circuit 620 From the DO terminal to the signal line O, a pulse with a frequency of 1"6KHz divided by "0110' steps, that is, a pulse with a period of 4m5ec, is output.This pulse with a period of 4m5ec is When the pulse first rises from "0" to "L", that is, when 2m has passed after the start of frequency division, CC3 is set.
Or use it as the end point of the CCI signal.

At the time of CC5 signal, select game) 61
B1 to B4 terminal input of 8B is the select gate 618
A, B, C, D of frequency divider circuit 620 through C, 618D
Since the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", each input terminal of the A, B, C, D and 8b terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "0" and "1" respectively. ”,
°0'', 1'', 1'', therefore, this frequency dividing circuit 62
From the 0 DO terminal to the signal line @, the pulse output is a 16KHz pulse divided by 1010 steps, that is, 64
Pulse output with a period of m5ec will be performed. In addition,
This pulse with a period of 64m5ec is initially K“
32m from the time when it rises from “0” to “1”, that is, after the start of frequency division.
The time when 5 ec has elapsed is used as the end time of the CC5 signal.

At the time of the CC6 signal, select game controller 1
The A1 to A4 terminal input of 8A, that is, the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the second time control data TV, is the select gate) 6
A, B of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through 18C, 618D,
C and D terminals, and when the most significant bit of the integer part of the shutter second 1 o'clock control data TV is 0'', the input to the 8b terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620 is ``1'', and the shutter second When the most significant bit of the integer part of the time control data TV is 1°, it is a frequency divider circuit. 620 D terminal input is “1”
Therefore, the 8b terminal input becomes O'' - Therefore, a 16 KHz pulse signal is sent from the DO terminal of the frequency divider circuit 1620 to the signal line O by dividing the frequency based on the shutter speed control data TV. , Y in the above formula (22)
A pulse signal corresponding to ×2p will be output.

Note that this pulse signal is later converted into 8+ of the equation (2) above.
It is used to count down the data corresponding to α, and at the end of this down count, it is detected that the actual time in shutter seconds has elapsed after the shutter front curtain started running. be.

FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
26. Narrowing down stage number control register 628° data selector 632. This figure shows the detailed configuration of the down counter 642 (select goo) 640, in which the data selector 632/ri in the same figure and two integrated circuit elements CD4019 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 66 are connected in parallel. The QO to Q7 terminal outputs of the narrow-down control register 628 are input to its B7 to BO terminals, and the shutter speed control register 6
The Q5 to Q7 terminal outputs of No. 26, that is, the three pits below the decimal point of the shutter speed control data TVs are input to the A2 to AO terminals. xi, this data selector 6
32 has the °1" signal input to its A3 terminal, and
4 to A7 ends are grounded. That is, this data selector 632 receives input of 8+α data as shown in the above equation at terminals AO to A3, and also receives input of 8+α data as shown in the above equation
This is because the narrowing stage number control data AVs is input to terminals O to B7. Also, this data selector 63
2 has the CC4 signal input to its Ka terminal and the C'C3 signal input to its Kb terminal, so 1. At the time of CC3, this data selector 632 outputs the narrowing stage number control data AVs from its DO to D7 terminals, and at the time of CC4, this data selector 632 outputs the number of narrowing down control data AVs from its DO to D7 terminals. 8+α data will be output.

The Do-D7 output of the data selector 632 is input to the JO-J7 of the down counter 642, and the PR
When the CO3 signal or CC4 signal is input to the E terminal via the OR59, the down counter 642 outputs the Do-D7 signal of the data selector 632.
Capture and store the output data of i child.

Incidentally, this down counter 642 is constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4029 whose detailed logic diagrams are shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and its clock terminal CLK input Based on this, the data input and stored from the JO to J7 terminals is subtracted and counted, and if a carry (pollow =) occurs as a result, a signal indicating this is output from the CO2 terminal. . This CO terminal output signal is normally ”
1” and becomes “0” when a carry occurs, and this signal is 7 synchronized with clock pulse CP.
It is input to the D terminal of the flip clock F40, and therefore, when the subtraction count by the down counter 642 is completed, a clock pulse CPK is synchronized from the Q terminal of the flip clock F40 to indicate this. A signal is output to signal line O.

On the other hand, this down converter 42 has a NAND gate NAND31 connected to its clock terminal CLK.

At the time of the CC5 signal through NAND29, FP double signal input is received, and NAND31, NAN
The output from the DO terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620, that is, the signal input from the signal line O is received through D30 at time CC6. Therefore, the operation of this down counter 642 is
3. The explanation will be based on the illustrated sequence.

This down counter 642 converts the output data of the refinement stage number control register 628 into the data at the time of the CO3 signal.
The data is taken in from the JO to J7 terminals through the selector 632 and stored. Next, when moving to the CC5 signal time,
NAND Gate NAND30. F through NAND31
'When the PC signal is input and the stop-down stage number control data AVs stored at the time of the CC3 signal is counted down according to the FPC signal, as a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the CO2 terminal output signal changes from "1" to °0. Move to °. At this point in time, the AE lever 94I/i has moved to a position '~ where the aperture reduction amount corresponding to the aforesaid aperture reduction stage number control data AVs is preset. Of course,
Needless to say, the travel i at this time is determined by taking into consideration the mechanical delay time until the AE lever 94 is clamped by the aperture control means 398, and an appropriate compensation amount is added. At this time, the fact that the CO2 terminal output signal has become "°0" is detected by the clip/70 tube F40, and the AE lever 94 controls the number of aperture stages from the d output terminal to the signal line [phase]. A signal is output in synchronization with the clock pulse CP to indicate that the vehicle has traveled to the position corresponding to the data AVs.

In addition, this down counter 642 outputs data from terminals Q5 to Q7 of the shutter speed control register 626, that is, the data below the decimal point of the shutter speed control data TVs, as well as the lowest pit of the integer part at the time of the CC4 signal. The data with "1" set in the corresponding bit is effectively converted into integer data, that is, multiplied by 8 to become 8+α data.
The data is taken in from the JO to J3 terminals through the selector 632 and stored. Next, when moving to the time of the CC5 signal,
Nando Goo) NAND30. 'The DO terminal output of the frequency divider circuit 620 is input to the clock terminal CLK from the signal line O through the NAND31, but this signal line @ has a A pulse signal with a pulse period of 2p, which is obtained by frequency-dividing a pulse signal of 16 kHz, which is one time the reference time Y, is performed based on the /Yanota second control data TVs, and therefore, the CC
The 8+α stored in the time of the 4 signal is counted down according to the pulse signal with the cycle of Y×2p, and as a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the CO2#A child output signal changes from “L” to “O”. Transition. At this point, CC60
This means that the time YX2p×(8+α) has elapsed since the start of the time, and the shirt time control data T Vs
This means that an approximate real time corresponding to (-P + s) was obtained. At this time, the fact that the CO2 terminal output signal has become "0" is detected by the flip-flop F40, and from the Q output terminal to the signal line O, the above-mentioned shutter seconds have passed since the CC6 signal state was entered. Clock pulse C to indicate that the real time corresponding to the time control data TVs has elapsed.
A signal is output in synchronization with P.

FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646, which constitutes a logic circuit for obtaining the control signals CCO to CC7 described above.

In addition, what is indicated by 990 in the figure is an integrated circuit element CD40 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG.
A decoder consisting of 28 flips and 70
Tsubu F32. F1a.

Each Q output of F34, FCI, FC2, and FC3, is decoded and output as signals of CCO to CC7. Note that the PC1 and FC2.

Each signal of FC3 is in the state shown in FIG. F33. These knob flop F signals are output from the Q output terminal of F34.
32. F33. F34 is all clock pulse CP
is synchronized with.

Now, set conditions for flip-flop F32 as 5FC.
1. Set the reset conditions to RFe5. Flip 70 tube F
33 cent conditions to 5FC2° reset conditions to RFe5
．． The setting conditions for flip-flop F34 are 5FC3,
The reset condition is set as R'FC3, and the direct blade setting condition of F34 is set as FDR.

The fact that the above FDR condition holds means that the flip-flop F32. F33. F34 is clock pulse CP
Therefore, the decoder 990 outputs "1" as the CCO signal. That is, the system will be placed or returned to the CCO signal state.

The conditions for this FDH are the power up clear signal PU
C is input, the state of the CC2 signal, that is, the EDSP signal becomes 1° while the self-timer is operating, or the film winding is not completed and the WNUP signal is 0, And when the CC7 signal is not in the state, the C
When the winding is completed with the C7 signal, the WNUP signal is “1”, and it corresponds to 2Hz! It is established when a period of time has elapsed.

By the way, the CC7 signal is 1" and the WNUP signal is "1"+
FD and R are established when the 2 Hz signal is 1” because
With the shutter release button 18 kept pressed, the next control state is entered after the film has finished winding and the next calculation result has been loaded into the display register. This is an important condition when using a motor drive device to perform continuous shooting with the shutter release button 18 held down, and in order to satisfy the above FDH condition. The AND gate AND85. AND86°AND87, OR'I'-)OR47,0R48°0R49~, and inverter N42.

The fact that the CC2 signal condition is satisfied means that the 7 lip 70 knob F33 is placed in the set state and the flip 7
0 Tsubu F32. This means that F34 is placed in a reset state, and for that purpose, it is necessary that the condition of 5FC2 is satisfied.

That is, in order to create the CC2 signal state, cc.

? In the signal state, the EDSP signal is °0" and the FD
The condition H is not satisfied, the signal from the signal line @ is 1", that is, the calculation in the central control unit 362 has been completed, and the signal from the signal line 2 is 1" In other words, when data is not being transferred from the central control unit 362 to the output control unit 364, the shutter release
It is necessary for the condition 5FC2 to be satisfied by being satisfied when the button 18 is pressed and the SR signal becomes °l''.

At this time, if the 5ELF signal is "0", the condition of 5Fcl is also satisfied, so the system is c
A transition is made from the co signal state to the CC3 signal state without passing through the CC2 signal state.

゛In addition, when the CC2 signal is in the state, if the 5ECF signal becomes °0" and once the SR signal becomes °0", it is assumed that the self-timer shooting has been canceled and the RFe5
The condition is satisfied, and the system Fcc.

It will return to the state of.

On the other hand, when in the CC2 signal state, the signal line [phase] M
The number becomes "l", that is, "frequency divider circuit 62".

“1° output is made from the DO terminal of the signal line [phase]
When the signal is "1", the condition of 5FCI is satisfied and the system shifts to the state of the CC3 signal.

The transition from the CC3 signal state to the CCI signal state occurs when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes "1", that is, when the
This is when the RPC20 condition is satisfied when m5ec has elapsed.

The transition from the CC1 signal state to the CC5 signal state is 1. When the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes "1", that is, when 2m5ec has elapsed, the condition of SFC3 is satisfied.

The state of the CC5 signal changes to the state of the CC4 signal.

This occurs when the MDSP signal is 0" and the signal on the signal line [phase] is 1", that is, when the A'E lever 94 has traveled an amount corresponding to the aperture stage number control data AVs. Or, when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes "L", that is, when 30m5ec has elapsed, the RP
This is when the CIO condition is met.

Just as the state of the CC4 signal changes to the state of the CC6 signal, the shutter front curtain starts running and the CT ST double signal "1"
This is when the condition 5Fc2 is satisfied.

The state of the CC6 signal changes to the state of the CC7 signal when the BDSP signal is "0" and the output of the signal line O is "1", that is, when the real time corresponding to the shutter time control data TVsK is measured. When SFC1 is completed,
This is when the conditions are satisfied.

Note that the BDSP signal is in the state of C'C6 signal and 1.
” and the SR signal becomes “6”, the RFC-2 and RFC40 conditions are met and the system returns to the CCO signal state.

Further, when the SR signal becomes "0" in the state of the CC7 signal, the conditions of RFCl, RFC2, and RFC4 are satisfied, and the system returns to the state of the CCO signal.

Furthermore, those involved in 5FCI are &T.
G AND79. AND80. AND87゜NAND gate NAND5. NAND6. NAND7,
NAND 16, NAND23 A7 converter INV3
6. INV37. 'INV38. The logic configuration is based on INV39 and flip-70 tube F35.

Also involved in RFCI is ANDGATE A
ND81. AND90. NAND 8. N
AND9. -NANDlo, NANDll, NAND1
9, I'y bar I INV44.7 lip flop F
31, or ter) OR50.

This is a logical configuration based on 0R51, OR52.

Also, those involved in 5FC2 are Nando Tar
NAND 1 7, NAND 1 8
, NAND24, flip-flop F30. F3
1. This is a logical configuration based on the inverter INV48.

Also, the person contributing to RFC2 is Nand Tarr.
G NAND 1 2. NAND 1 4.
NAND20, NAND8. NAND9, flip
Flop F36, AND gate AND81. AND8
8, OR gate 0R50, inverter INV37°I
NV38. This is a logical configuration based on INV44.

Also, NAND Gate NA is involved in 5FC3.
ND13. AND gate AND89° off-ter) O
R51, I7-I INV43° flip-flop F37.

Also involved in RFC3 is NAND Gate N
AND9, NAND14, NAND21.

This is a logic circuit based on an inverter INV37.

Note that the control signal generating circuit 646 provides a direct reset signal to the direct reset terminal R of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the signal line [phase].

, the condition for outputting 1° to this signal line O is CC7.
When the SR signal becomes “0°” in the signal state, the SF
CI conditions, 5FC2 conditions.

The contents of the frequency dividing circuit 620 are changed by this direct reset signal during the period between the first clock pulse CP(7) 1 pit after the conditions RFC2 and 5FC3 are satisfied. All will be cleared.

Note that NANDQ is involved in outputting ``1'' to this signal line O.

NAND22. NAND25. NAND26°NAND
27. NAND 28, inverter INV37
, INV40. , t7-gate 0R50.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, energization signals are given to the shutter release means 396, the aperture control means 398, and the shutter speed control means 400, respectively. , the energizing signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CC1 signal, and the energizing signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CC3, CC1, CC5 signals, and the shutter speed control means 40
0, an energization signal is given at times CC5, CC4° and CC6.

In order to realize such an operation, the CCI signal is directly applied to the gloss release means 396, and the CCI signal is applied directly to the aperture control means 398.
Inverter IN of PCI signal and CC7 signal via
An inverted signal based on V41 is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 via an AND gate 82.
The C3 signal and the output signal of the inverter INV41 are provided.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, a direct reset signal is applied to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 shown in FIG. 82 via the signal line .

This is to prohibit new calculation data from being input from the central control section 362 to the output control section 364 during the exposure control operation, and the AND gate AND
84, the flip-flop F32. When the AND condition of each Q output of F34 is satisfied, this signal becomes “1”.
”.

Furthermore, to explain, the control signal generation circuit 646 sends a signal to the drive circuit 404 in order to blink the LED display 32 to indicate that the self-timer is in operation and to indicate that the power supply is normal. A control signal is issued, but the configuration of the meandering control circuit of this LED display 32 is as follows.
It is shown in Figure 8.

In the figure, 800 is a 15-stage frequency divider circuit that divides the clock pulse CP of 64KI (z) by 15 stages to generate a 2Hz on/off signal.
The Hz signal is provided to an AND gate AND100.

Further, 808 indicates a battery check circuit, which outputs a "1" j signal when the remaining battery level is sufficient during battery check.

It is constructed and constructed as follows.

The output of the battery check circuit 808 is connected to the CC
The output signal of the ANDlooo is sent to the LED drive circuit 4.
04.

In such a configuration, a CC whose self-timer is in operation
When the 2 signal is '1' or when the remaining battery power is sufficient as a result of the battery check, a 2Hz on/off signal is given to the LED drive circuit 404, so that the LED The device display will blink once.

The configuration of the camera system of this embodiment is as described above, although the explanation is insufficient.

The comparison table in FIG. 99 shows how each data is used in calculations. Here, the subject brightness BV
, film sensitivity Sv, speed TV, aperture value AV,
Open aperture value A Vo + minimum aperture value AMAX, exposure amount BV, and 8-pit binary code with 1/8 stop precision are associated with each apex series of aperture value set from the metrobo side. When AD conversion is performed in the control unit, the converted digital value for analog data is the same as <1/2 of 8 bits for amateurs.
It corresponds to the hexadecimal code.

Note that the bending error ROM 528 shown in FIG.
For a given open aperture value AVo, binary code data of the bending error AVc as shown in FIG. 100 is output.

In addition, the aperture value display decoder ROM 7 shown in FIG.
02. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. FIG. 101 shows a comparison table of each input binary code of the symbol display decoder ROM 706 and display data.

In the system of this embodiment, the data is
The calculation routines shown in FIG. 70 are all based on binary data as shown in the comparison tables of FIGS. 0 and 101.

Therefore, in this specification, descriptions will not be made regarding the portions that have been insufficiently explained or how the arithmetic circuit shown in the block diagram shown in FIG. 7-9 performs operations in accordance with the arithmetic instructions shown in FIG. Each calculation routine shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 99.

I believe that those skilled in the art can easily infer this by comparing all the other drawings in addition to FIGS. 100 and 101.

As described above, according to the present invention, even if the self-timer starts operating against the photographer's will, self-timer shooting can be easily interrupted, and unnecessary use of film can be avoided. In addition, the camera can be provided at low cost, and furthermore, the degree of freedom in setting can be increased.

[Brief explanation of drawings]

11th@I is a 61st view of a camera mounting device to which a camera 2 system according to an embodiment of the present invention is applied. FIG. 2 is a perspective view for illustrating the case where the lens device 2 and body 4 of the 1111-th indicator device are separated. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the lever in a state where some aperture value is preset in the third aperture lens device 2; □ Fig. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where the aperture value is not set at all in the lens device 2. FIG. 5 is a three-view diagram showing an example of a strobe that is applied to the camera system 2 of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of finder information when looking through the finder window 13 of the camera device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of finder information shown in FIG. FIG. 11(g) is an explanatory diagram illustrating photographing modes and modes during strobe photography. FIG. 11(B) is a logical explanatory diagram showing the relationship between each photographing mode of the camera. FIG. 12 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40. Figure 13 shows the state of timing pulses TBI to TB6.
A time chart to explain. Fig. 14 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting information regarding the open aperture value, aperture ring status, and aperture drive lever of the lens device 2. Fig. 15 is a comparison diagram of the 4< inary code and gray code. 16 is a principle diagram of a conversion circuit from a Gray code to a binary code. FIG. 17 is a logical explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the flip-flop shown in FIG. 16. Fig. 19 is a specific block diagram for inputting the data set and the state of the mode changeover switch 38. Fig. 19 is a specific block diagram for inputting the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2. Fig. 20 is An explanatory diagram showing the input timing of various data and information. Figures 21 and 22 are specific configuration diagrams for inputting the states of various switches. Figure 23 is for detecting and inputting the traveling distance of the AE lever 94. Fig. 24 is a schematic block diagram of a strobe photographing device. Fig. 25 is a schematic block diagram of an external photometer. Fig. 26 is a structural block diagram of an incident light type exposure meter. Fig. 27 is a schematic block configuration diagram of the camera system of this embodiment. Fig. 28 is a schematic block diagram showing the functional configuration of the mechanical part of the camera system shown in Fig. 27. 30 is a schematic block diagram of the camera system 9 control circuit of this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram of the clock pulse CP generation circuit. Circuit configuration diagram. Figure 32 is a time chart showing the output (bus waveform) of the system and C bus generator. Figure 33 is a specific configuration diagram of the system pulse generator. Figure 34 is an integrated circuit element. Logic diagram of the CD4029. Figure 35 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4028. Figure 36 is a detailed circuit diagram of the set circuit 520. Figure 37 is a detailed circuit diagram of the gray binary converter. Figure 38 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4035. Figure 39 is a logical configuration diagram of the transmission gate shown in Figure 38. Figure 40 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4042., Figure 41 is the integrated circuit. A block diagram of the element MC14539. Figure 42 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4539. Figure 43 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4539. Figure 44 is a specific circuit configuration of the signal separation circuit and doubling circuit. Figure 45 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the condition signal storage circuit. FIG. 46 is a timing chart for explaining detection of valve signals. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of CU and AO multiplication signal logic. FIG. 48 is a detailed block diagram of the input control section. FIG. 49 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device MCI4520. FIG. 50 is a logic diagram of one of the cariters shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 51 shows a counter 558 and a flip 70 tube 560.56 based on the integrated circuit element MC14520 shown in FIG.
2 configuration diagram. FIG. 52 is a configuration diagram of a buffer register 564 based on a combination of integrated circuit elements CD4035. Fig. 53 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MC145'12. Fig. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4512 shown in Fig. 53. Fig. 55 is a time chart for explaining the operation of the input control section. 56 and 57 are time charts for explaining the state of A-D conversion in the input control section. FIG. 58 is a logic configuration diagram of the input bus selector 578. Illustrated flip-flops F18, F1
A time chart explaining the operation of 9. FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the condition register 574. FIG. 61 is a circuit configuration diagram when the circuit shown in FIG. 9 and 60 is implemented using integrated circuit elements. FIG. 62 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4015. FIG. 63 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of a signal switching circuit and a D register. FIG. 64 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4021. Figure 65 is a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598 of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 66 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4019. FIG. 67 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4024. FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the output code of the instruction ROM 504. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the comparison between the address of instruction RO14504, the instruction, and the operand code. FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of an output logic circuit of address decoder 600. FIG. 72 is a block block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC1d514. FIG. 73 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element MCI 4514. FIG. 74 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 598. FIG. 75 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the data selector 502 shown in FIG. 30, the fixed tenter ROM 534, and a circuit for taking in the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographing lens device 2 used. FIG. 76 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4013. FIG. 77 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 592. FIG. 78 is a block diagram of multiplexer 594. , Figure 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 5000. FIG. 80 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 596. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of signals and data on bus lines, input bus lines, and output bus lines. FIG. 82 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the synchronization circuit 660. FIG. 83 is an output timing chart of the water flow period circuit shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 84 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram including the demultiplexer 610 and the output control register 622. FIG. 85 is a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for display. FIG. 86 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 87 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. FIG. 88 is an operation timing chart of the circuit shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 89 is a detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624. FIG. 90 is a plan view of the digital display 402. Figure 91 is a detailed logic diagram for capturing data for control. FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining the operation of the output control section. FIG. 93 is a sequence explanatory diagram based on the flow chart of FIG. 91. FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 614 and the constant generation circuit 616. Select gate 618° frequency divider circuit 620
Detailed configuration diagram. FIG. 95 is a block diagram of integrated circuit element MC14536. FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 626.degree., the number of narrowing stage control registers 628. Data selector 632. Down counter 642. A detailed configuration diagram of the select gate 640. FIG. 97 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646. FIG. 98 is a circuit configuration diagram of a drive control circuit for an LED display. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the contrast between data and binary code. FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the contrast between the input open aperture value, the output surface value, and the error binary code of the bending error ROM 528. FIG. 101 shows a decoder ROM 702 for displaying aperture value and a decoder ROM 704 for displaying shutter speed. Each human power binary code of symbol display decoder ROM706 32... LEI) Applicant Canon Corporation - (OL) (b) (Cn/41) lji2°Δa Fig. 13-71!7 Force My horizontal circuit 5

Claims (1)

[Claims] In an electronic self-timer device, the electrical setting state of the self-timer is returned to the initial state by returning the self-timer setting member to the initial position after the self-timer is started but before the self-timer operation is completed. A self-timer device characterized by: